Ece Idp 2015 16 PDF

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
COURSE STRUCTURE
AND
DETAILED SYLLABUS
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

ENGINEERING
For
5 YEAR INTEGRATED DUAL DEGREE PROGRAM (I.D.P)

Leading to
(B.TECH. & M.Tech. / MBA )
(Applicable for the batches admitted from 2015-2016)
JNTUH COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING HYDERABAD

(Autonomous)
Kukatpally, Hyderabad – 500085
Telangana, India
IDP (B.Tech. - ECE & M.Tech. /MBA) w.e.f. 2015-2016 Academic Year

(Autonomous)
Kukatpally, Hyderabad-500 085
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS 2015

for CBCS Based 5 YEAR INTEGRATED DUAL DEGREE PROGRAM (B.Tech. & M.Tech/MBA)
(Effective for the students admitted into I year from the

Academic Year 2015-16 and onwards)
1.0 5 Year Integrated Dual Degree Program in Engineering & Technology (IDP)
JNTUH offers 5 Year (10 Semesters) Integrated Dual Degree (IDP) Programme, under
Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) at its Constituent Autonomous College - JNTUH
College of Engineering Hyderabad, with effect from the Academic Year 2015 - 16 onwards,
in the following Branches of Engineering
S.No. UG Program PG Program

M.Tech. MBA (Specialization)*
(Specialization)
1) B.Tech. in M.Tech. MBA (Human Resources /
Electronics & (Communications & Finance/ Marketing/ Systems)
Communication Signal Processing)
Engineering
2) B.Tech. in Computer M.Tech. (Computer MBA (Human Resources /
Science & Science) Finance/ Marketing/ Systems)
Engineering
3) B.Tech. in Electrical M.Tech. (Power MBA (Human Resources /
& Electronics Electronics) Finance/ Marketing/ Systems)
Engineering
4) B.Tech. in M.Tech. MBA (Human Resources /
Mechanical (Manufacturing Finance/ Marketing/ Systems)
Engineering Systems)
5) B.Tech. in Civil M.Tech. (Structural MBA (Human Resources /
Engineering Engineering) Finance/ Marketing/ Systems)
(* A Minimum of 15 students is necessary for any specialization to be offered.)

A student would be conferred the B.Tech Degree and M.Tech or MBA Degree in this IDP,
after the successful completion of all the requirements for th 10 semesters of study and
earning the appropriate credits.
2.0 Eligibility for Admission
2.1 Admission to the IDP shall be made either on the basis of the merit rank obtained by the
qualifying candidate at an Entrance Test conducted by the Telangana State Government
(EAMCET), OR the University, OR on the basis of any other order of merit approved by the
University, subject to reservations as prescribed by the Government from time to time.
2.2 The medium of instructions for the entire IDP in E&T will be ENGLISH only.
2.3 Students opting for the 5 year integrated IDP must specify their choice for M.Tech. (with in
the specializations given above) or MBA as the case may be, after choosing the appropriate
Branch of Engineering, at the time of Admissions only. Option thus exercised is final, and
cannot be changed during the study period.
1
2.4 Students opting for 5 years integrated IDP have to study for the specified period, to earn the
relevant credits for the award of both the B.Tech. and M.Tech. / MBA Degrees, and they will
not be permitted to have a choice for B.Tech. Degree alone after 4 years study.
3.0 IDP Structure
3.1 The IDP Programmes of JNTUH-CEH are of Semester Pattern, with 10 Semesters
constituting 5 Academic Years, each Academic Year having TWO Semesters (First/Odd
and Second/Even Semesters). Each Semester shall be of 22 Weeks duration (inclusive
of Examinations), with a minimum of 90 Instructional Days per Semester.
3.2 UGC/ AICTE specified Definitions/ Descriptions are adopted appropriately for various
terms and abbreviations used in these Academic Regulations, which are as listed
below.
3.3 Semester Scheme:

Each Semester having - ‘Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)’ and ‘Semester End
Examination (SEE)’. Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) and Credit Based Semester
System (CBSS) as denoted by UGC.
3.4 Credit Courses:

All Subjects/ Courses are to be registered by a student in a Semester to earn
Credits. Credits shall be assigned to each Subject/ Course in a L: T: P: C (Lecture
Periods: Tutorial Periods: Practicals Periods : Credits) Structure, based on the following
general pattern ..
• One Credit - for One hour/ Week/ Semester for Theory/ Lecture (L) Courses; and,
• One Credit - for Two hours/ Week/ Semester for Laboratory/ Practical (P) Courses or
Tutorials (T).
Other student activities like NCC, NSS, NSO, Study Tour, Guest Lecture etc., and
identified Mandatory Courses will not carry Credits.
3.5 Subject/ Course Classification:

All Subjects/ Courses offered for the UGP are broadly classified as : (a) Foundation
Courses (FnC), (b) Core Courses (CoC), and (c) Elective Courses (EℓC).
- Foundation Courses (FnC) are further categorized as : (i) HS (Humanities and

Social Sciences), (ii) BS (Basic Sciences), and (iii) ES (Engineering Sciences);
- Core Courses (CoC) and Elective Courses (EℓC) are categorized as PS

(Professional Subjects), which are further subdivided as – (i) PC (Professional/
Departmental Core) Subjects, (ii) PE (Professional/ Departmental Electives) , (iii) OE
(Open Electives); and (iv) Project Works (PW);
- Minor Courses (1 or 2 Credit Courses, belonging to HS/ BS/ ES/ PC as per

relevance); and
- Mandatory Courses (MC - non-credit oriented).
3.6 Course Nomenclature:

The Curriculum Nomenclature or Course-Structure Grouping for the each of the IDP
E&T is as listed below :
S.No UG/PG Group/Category/Co Description

. Program mponent
1) UG BS – Basic Sciences Includes - Mathematics, Physics and
Chemistry Subjects
2) UG ES - Engineering Include fundamental engineering subjects
Arts and Sciences
2
3) UG HS – Humanities Includes subjects related to Humanities,

and Social Sciences Social Sciences and Management
4) UG PC – Professional Includes core subjects related to the parent
Core discipline, department or branch of
engineering
5) UG PE – Professional Includes Elective subjects related to the

Electives parent discipline, department or branch of
engineering
6) UG OE – Open Elective subjects which include inter-
Electives disciplinary subjects or subjects in an area
outside the parent discipline, department or
branch of engineering
7) UG Project B.Tech. Project or UG Project or UG Major
Project
8) UG Industrial Training/ Industrial Training/ Internship/ UG Mini
Mini Project Project/ Mini Project
9) PG PGC PG Core Subjects related to the M.Tech.
Specialization / MBA
10) PG PGE PG Elective Subjects related to the M.Tech.
Specialization / MBA
11) PG Project PG Project M.Tech. / MBA
12) PG Seminar Seminar / Colloquium at PG level, in M.Tech. /
MBA
13) PG Comprehensive Viva Comprehensive Viva based on all Subjects
Total 254
4.0 Course Work

4.1 A student, after securing admission, shall pursue the IDP (B.Tech+M.Tech or MBA) in a
minimum period of 5 Academic Years, and a maximum period of 10 Academic Years
(starting from the Date of Commencement of I Year).
The entire course of study is of five academic years, comprising of 10 semesters. All the
I, II, III, IV and V years are on two-semester pattern.
4.2 Each student shall Register for and Secure the specified number of Credits required
for the completion of the IDP and Award of the B.Tech+M.Tech / MBA. Degree in
respective Branch of Engineering.
4.3 The student must secure a total of 260 credits for the IDP - 174 credits for the B.Tech. Degree
Program, plus 86 credits for the M.Tech./ MBA Program.
4.4 The course work and curriculum for first 3 years (6 Semesters) would be same as that the
Regular B.Tech ( 4 year) in the relevant branch of Engineering.
5.0 Course Registration

5.1 A ‘Faculty Advisor or Counselor’ shall be assigned to each student, who will advise
him about the IDP, its Course Structure and Curriculum, Choice/Option for Subjects/
Courses, based on his competence, progress, pre-requisites and interest.
5.2 Academic Section of the College invites ‘Registration Forms’ from students before the
beginning of the Semester, through ‘ON-LINE SUBMISSIONS’, ensuring ‘DATE and
TIME Stamping’. The ON-LINE Registration Requests for any ‘CURRENT SEMESTER’
shall be completed BEFORE the commencement of SEEs (Semester End Examiantions)
of the ‘PRECEDING SEMESTER’.
5.3 A Student can apply for ON-LINE Registration, ONLY AFTER obtaining the ‘WRITTEN
APPROVAL’ from his Faculty Advisor, which should be submitted to the College
Academic Section through the Head of Department (a copy of the same being retained
with Head of Department, Faculty Advisor and the Student).
3
5.4 A Student may be permitted to Register for his Subjects/ Course of CHOICE upto III
year II semester with a typical total of 24 Credits per Semester (Minimum being 20 C
and Maximum being 28 C, permitted deviation being ± 17%), based on his
PROGRESS and SGPA/ CGPA, and completion of the ‘PRE-REQUISITES’ as indicated
for various Subjects/ Courses, in the Department Course Structure and Syllabus
contents. However, a MINIMUM of 20 Credits per Semester must be registered to
ensure the ‘STUDENTSHIP’ in any Semester.
A Student may be permitted to Register for his Subjects/ Course of CHOICE in IV year
I semester and V year I semester with a typical total of 30 Credits per Semester
(Minimum being 26 C and Maximum being 34 C, permitted deviation being ± 14%),
based on his PROGRESS and SGPA/ CGPA, and completion of the ‘PRE-
REQUISITES’ as indicated for various Subjects/ Courses, in the Department Course
Structure and Syllabus contents. However, a MINIMUM of 26 Credits per Semester
must be registered to ensure the ‘STUDENTSHIP’ in any Semester.
A Student may be permitted to Register for his Subjects/ Course of CHOICE in IV year
II semester with a typical total of 28 Credits per Semester (Minimum being 24 C and
Maximum being 32 C, permitted deviation being ± 14%), based on his PROGRESS
and SGPA/ CGPA, and completion of the ‘PRE-REQUISITES’ as indicated for various
Subjects/ Courses, in the Department Course Structure and Syllabus contents.
However, a MINIMUM of 24 Credits per Semester must be registered to ensure the
‘STUDENTSHIP’ in any Semester.
A Student must Register for his Subjects/ Course in V year II semester with a total of
22 Credits per Semester.
5.5 Open Electives: Students are to register One Open Elective (OE-I) during III Year I
Semester, one (OE-II) during III Year II Semester , from the list of Open Electives given.
However, Students can not opt for an Open Elective Subject offered by their own (parent)
Department, if it is already listed under any category of the Subjects offered by parent
Department in any Semester.
5.6 There shall be an Industry oriented Mini-Project, in collaboration with an Industry of the
relevant specialization, to be registered immediately after III year II semester examinations,
and taken up during the summer vacation for about eight weeks duration.
5.7 Each Student shall Register the UG Project Work during the IV Year II Semester, as per
the instructions of the Project Guide/ Project Supervisor assigned by the Head of
Department.
5.8 The PG Project shall start immediately after the completion of the IV Year II Semester,
and shall continue through V Year I and II Semesters as per the instructions of the
Project Guide/ Project Supervisor assigned by the Head of Department and registered
after approval from PRC.
5.9 Choice for ‘additional Subjects/ Courses’ to reach the Maximum Permissible Limit of
28/32/34 Credits (above the typical 24/28/30 Credit norm) must be clearly indicated,
which needs the specific approval and signature of the Faculty Advisor/ Counselor.
5.10 If the Student submits ambiguous choices or multiple options or erroneous entries -
during ON-LINE Registration for the Subject(s) / Course(s) under a given/ specified
Course Group/ Category as listed in the Course Structure, only the first mentioned
Subject/ Course in that Category will be taken into consideration.
5.11 Subject/ Course Options exercised through ON-LINE Registration are final and CAN
NOT be changed, and CAN NOT be inter-changed; further, alternate choices will also
not be considered. However, if the Subject/ Course that has already been listed for
Registration (by the Head of Department) in a Semester could not be offered due to
4
any unforeseen or unexpected reasons, then the Student shall be allowed to have
alternate choice - either for a new Subject (subject to offering of such a Subject), or
for another existing Subject (subject to availability of seats), which may be
considered. Such alternate arrangements will be made by the Head of Department,
with due notification and time-framed schedule, within the FIRST WEEK from the
commencement of Class-work for that Semester.
5.12 Cancelation of Registration of Subjects/ Courses may be permitted, ONLY AFTER

obtaining prior approval from the Faculty Advisor (subject to retaining a minimum of
required credits) ‘within 15 Days of Time’ from the beginning of the current Semester.
6.0 Subjects/ Courses to be offered

6.1 A Subject/ Course may be offered to the Students, ONLY IF a Minimum of 1/3 of the
class Strength opt for the same. The Maximum Strength of a class is limited to 80
(60 + 1/3 of the class Strength).
6.2 More than ONE TEACHER may offer the SAME SUBJECT (Lab./ Practicals may be
included with the corresponding Theory Subject in the same Semester) in any
Semester. However, selection choice for students will be based on - ‘FIRST COME
FIRST SERVE Basis and CGPA Criterion’ (ie., the first focus shall be on early ON-
LINE ENTRY from the student for Registration in that Semester, and the second
focus, if needed, will be on CGPA of the student).
6.3 If more entries for Registration of a Subject come into picture, then the concerned
Head of Department shall take necessary action, whether to offer such a Subject/
Course for TWO (or multiple) SECTIONS or NOT .
6.4 In case of options coming from Students of other Departments/ Branches/ Disciplines
(not considering OPEN ELECTIVES), PRIORITY shall be given to the student of the
‘Parent Department’ first.
7.0 Attendance Requirements
7.1 A student shall be eligible to appear for the End Semester Examinations upto III year II
semester, if he acquires a minimum of 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the Subjects/
Courses (excluding Mandatory or Non-Credit Courses) for that Semester.
A student shall be eligible to appear for the End Semester Examinations in IV and V year , I
Semester and II Semester, if he acquires a minimum of 75% of attendance in that subject.
7.2 Condoning of shortage of attendance is up to 10% (65% and above, and below 75%) in
each Semester may be granted by the College Academic Committee on genuine and
valid grounds, based on the student’s representation with supporting evidence.
7.3 A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condoning of shortage of attendance.
7.4 Shortage of Attendance below 65% shall in NO case be condoned.
7.5 Students, whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any Semester, are not eligible to
take their End Examinations of that Semester; they get detained and their registration for
that Semester shall stand cancelled. They will not be promoted to the next Semester. They
may seek re-registration for all those Subjects registered in that Semester in which
he got detained, by seeking re-admission for that Semester as and when offered; in
case if there are any Professional Electives and/ or Open Electives, the same may
also be re-registered if offered, however, if those Electives are not offered in later
Semesters, then alternate Electives may be chosen from the SAME set of Elective
Subjects offered under that category.
5
7.6 Students from IV year I semester onwards, whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in
any Subjecr, are not eligible to take their End Examinations of that Subject, they get
detained and their registration for that Subject shall stand cancelled. They may seek re-
registration for all those Subjects registered in which they got detained, by seeking
re-regiter for that Subjects as and when offered.
8.0 Academic Requirements

The following Academic Requirements have to be satisfied, in addition to the Attendance
Requirements mentioned in Item No.7.
8.1 (a) UG Part
A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the Academic Requirements and earned the
Credits allotted to each Subject/ Course, if he secures not less than 35% marks (25 out
of 70 marks) in the End Semester Examination, and a minimum of 40% of marks in
the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester End
Examination) taken together; in terms of Letter Grades, this implies securing P Grade
or above in that Subject/ Course.
A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the Academic Requirements and earned
the Credits allotted to - Industry oriented Mini-Project/ Seminar, if he secures not less
than 40% of the total marks (40 marks) to be awarded for each. The student would
be treated as failed, if he - (i) does not submit a report on his Industry oriented
Mini-Project, or does not make a presentation of the same before the Evaluation
Committee as per schedule, or (ii) does not present the Seminar as required in the IV
year II Semester, or (iii) secures less than 40% of marks (40 marks) in Industry
oriented Mini-Project/ Seminar evaluations.
He may reappear once for each of the above evaluations, when they are scheduled
again; if he fails in such ‘one reappearance’ evaluation also, he has to reappear for
the same in the next subsequent Semester, as and when it is scheduled.
(b) PG Part
A Student shall be deemed to have satisfied the Academic Requirements and earned the
Credits allotted to each Subject/ Course, if he secures not less than 40% Marks (28 out
of 70 Marks) in the End Semester Examination, and a minimum of 50% of Marks in
the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester End
Examination) taken together; in terms of Letter Grades, this implies securing B Grade
or above in that Subject.
A Student shall be deemed to have satisfied the Academic Requirements and earned
the Credits allotted to - Seminar, and Comprehensive Viva-voce, if he secures not
less than 50% of the total Marks to be awarded for each. The Student would be
treated as failed, if he - (i) does not attend the Comprehensive Viva-voce as per
the schedule given, or (ii) does not present the Seminar as required, or (ii) secures
less than 50% of Marks ( < 50 Marks) in Seminar/ Comprehensive Viva-voce
evaluations.
He may reappear for comprehensive viva where it is scheduled again; For seminar, he
has to reappear in the next subsequent Semesters, as and when scheduled.
8.2 A Student will not be promoted from I Year to II Year, unless he fulfils the
Attendance and Academic Requirements and secures a total of 24 Credits out of 48
Credits of I Year, from all the relevant regular and supplementary examinations,
whether he takes those examinations or not.
8.3 A Student will not be promoted from II Year to III Year, unless he fulfils the
Credits upto II Year I Semester, from all the relevant regular and supplementary
examinations, whether he takes those examinations or not.
6
8.4 A Student will not be promoted from III Year to IV Year, unless he fulfils the
Credits upto III Year I Semester, from all the relevant regular and supplementary
examinations, whether he takes those examinations or not.
A student shall be promoted from IV Year to V Year, if the student completes the UG Project
satisfactorily and earns the prescribed number of credits for UG Project by the end of IV Year
II Semester.
8.5 A Student shall - register for all Subjects covering 254 Credits as specified and listed
(with the relevant Course/ Subject Classifications as mentioned) in the Course
Structure, put up all the Attendance and Academic requirements for 254 Credits
securing a minimum of P /B Grade (Pass Grade) or above in each Subject, and ‘earn
ALL 254 Credits securing SGPA ≥ 5.0 / 6.0( in each Semester), and CGPA (at the
end of each successive Semester) ≥ 5.0/ 6.0 , to successfully complete the UGP and
PGP.
8.6 If a Student registers for some more ‘extra Subjects’ (in the parent Department or
other Departments/Branches of Engg.) other than those listed Subjects totaling to 254
Credits as specified in the Course Structure of his Department, the performances in
those ‘extra Subjects’ (although evaluated and graded using the same procedure as
that of the required 254 Credits) will not be taken into account while calculating the
SGPA and CGPA. For such ‘extra Subjects’ registered, % marks and Letter Grade
alone will be indicated in the Grade Card, as a performance measure, subject to
completion of the Attendance and Academic Requirements as stated in Items 7 and
8.1 – 8.4 above.
8.7 Students who fail to earn 254 Credits as per the Course Structure, and as indicated
above, within 10 Academic Years from the Date of Commencement of their I Year
shall forfeit their seats in IDP Programme and their admissions shall stand cancelled.
8.8 When a Student is detained due to shortage of attendance in any Semester, he may be re-
admitted into that Semester, as and when offered, with the Academic Regulations of the
Batch into which he gets readmitted. However, no Grade Allotments or SGPA/ CGPA
calculations will be done for that entire Semester in which he got detained.
8.9 When a Student is detained due to lack of Credits in any year, he may be readmitted in
the next year, after fulfilment of the Academic Requirements, with the Academic
Regulations of the Batch into which he gets readmitted.
8.10 A student eligible to appear in the End Semester Examination in any Subject/ Course,
but absent at it or failed (thereby failing to secure P Grade or above), may reappear
for that Subject/ Course at the supplementary examination / SEE as and when
conducted. In such cases, his Internal Marks assessed earlier for that Subject/
Course will be carried over, and added to the Marks to be obtained in the
supplementary examination/SEE, for evaluating his performance in that Subject.
9.0 Evaluation - Distribution and Weightage of Marks
(a) UG Part
9.1 The performance of a student in each Semester shall be evaluated Subject-wise (irrespective
of Credits assigned) with a maximum of 100 marks for Theory or Practicals or
Seminar or Drawing/Design or Industry oriented Mini-Project or Minor Course, etc;
For all Subjects/ Courses as mentioned above, the distribution shall be 30 marks for CIE,
and 70 marks for the SEE. However, the UG Project Work (Major Project) will be
evaluated for 200 Marks. These evaluations shall be based on 30% CIE
(Continuous Internal Evaluation) and 70% SEE (Semester End Examination), and a
Letter Grade corresponding to the % marks obtained shall be given.
7
9.2 a) For Theory Subjects (inclusive of Minor Courses), during the Semester, there shall be 2
mid-term examinations for 25 marks each. Each mid-term examination consists of one
objective paper for 10 marks, plus one subjective paper for 15 marks, with a duration of 120
minutes (20 minutes for objective and 100 minutes for subjective papers). Further, there will
be an allocation of 5 marks for Assignment. Objective paper may be set with multiple
choice questions, True/ False, fill-in the blanks, matching type questions, etc.
Subjective paper shall contain 5 questions, out of which the Student has to answer 3
questions, each for 5 marks.
b) The first mid-term examination shall be conducted for the first 50% of the syllabus, and
the second mid-term examination shall be conducted for the remaining 50% of the syllabus.
c) First Assignment should be submitted before the conduct of the first mid-term
examinations, and the Second Assignment should be submitted before the conduct of
the second mid-term examinations. The Assignments shall be as specified by the
concerned subject teacher.
d) The first mid-term examination Marks and first Assignment Marks shall make one set
of CIE Marks , and the second mid-term examination Marks and second Assignment
Marks shall make second set of CIE Marks; and the better of these two sets of marks
shall be taken as the final marks secured by the Student towards Continuous Internal
Evaluation in that Theory Subject.
9.3 For Practical Subjects, there shall be a Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) during the
Semester for 30 internal marks, and 70 marks are assigned for Lab./Practical End
Semester Examination (SEE). Out of the 30 marks for internals, day-to-day work in
the laboratory shall be evaluated for 20 marks; and for the remaining 10 marks - two
internal practical tests (each of 10 marks) shall be conducted by the concerned laboratory
teacher and the better of these two tests is taken into account. The SEE for
Practicals shall be conducted at the end of the Semester by Two Examiners
appointed by Head of the Department.
9.4 For the Subjects having Design and/or Drawing, (such as Engineering Graphics, Engineering
Drawing, Machine Drawing, Production Drawing Practice, and Estimation), the distribution
shall be 30 marks for CIE (20 marks for day-to-day work, and 10 marks for internal
tests) and 70 marks for SEE. There shall be two internal tests in a Semester and the
better of the two shall be considered for the award of marks for internal tests.
9.5 The Industry oriented Mini-Project shall be submitted in a Report form, and a
presentation of the same shall be made before a Committee, which evaluates it for
100 marks. The Committee shall consist of Head of the Department, the supervisor of
Mini-Project, and a Senior Faculty Member of the Department. There shall be no internal
marks for Industry oriented Mini-Project. The Mini-Project shall be evaluated in the IV
Year I Semester.
9.6 Out of a total 200 marks allotted for the Project Work, 60 marks shall be for CIE
(Continuous Internal Evaluation and 140 marks for the SEE (End Semester Viva-voce
Examination). The Project Viva-voce shall be conducted by a Committee comprising of an
External Examiner, Head of the Department, Senior faculty and Project Supervisor. Out of
60 marks allocated for CIE, 30 marks shall be awarded by the Project Supervisor (based
on the continuous evaluation of student’s performance throughout the Project Work
period), and the other 30 marks shall be awarded by a Departmental Committee
consisting of Head of the Department and Project Supervisor, based on the work carried
out and the presentation made by the Student at the time of Viva-voce Examination.
9.7 For NCC/ NSS/ NSO types of Courses, and/or any other Mandatory Non-Credit Course
offered in a Semester, a ‘Satisfactory Participation Certificate’ shall be issued to the
Student from the concerned authorities, only after securing ≥ 65% attendance in such a
Course. No marks or Letter Grade shall be allotted for these activities.
8
(b) PG Part (M.Tech.)
9.8 The performance of a Student in each Semester shall be evaluated Subject-wise (irrespective
of Credits assigned) with a maximum of 100 Marks for Theory or Practicals or
Seminar or Drawing/Design or Comprehensive Viva-voce etc; These evaluations
shall be based on 30% CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and 70% SEE (Semester
End Examination), and a Letter Grade corresponding to the % Marks obtained shall
be given.
i) For Theory Subjects, CIE Marks shall comprise of - Mid-Term Examination

Marks (for 25 Marks), and Assignment Marks (for 5 Marks).
ii) During the Semester, there shall be 2 Mid-Term examinations. Each Mid-Term
examination shall be for 25 Marks ( 120 minutes duration). The better
performance out of these two Mid-Term Examinations shall be considered for
the award of 25 Marks.
9.9 For Practical Subjects, there shall be a Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) during the
Semester for 30 Internal Marks, and 70 Marks are assigned for Lab./Practicals End
Semester Examination (SEE). Out of the 30 Marks for Internals, day-to-day work
assessment in the laboratory shall be evaluated for 20 Marks; and the performance in
an internal Lab./Practical Test shall be evaluated for 10 marks. The SEE for Lab./
Practicals shall be conducted at the end of the Semester by the concerned
Laboratory Teacher and another faculty member of the same Department as assigned
by the Head of the Department.
9.10 There shall be a Seminar Presentation in V Year I Semester. For the Seminar, the
Student shall collect the information on a specialized topic, prepare a Technical Report and
submit to the Department at the time of Seminar Presentation. The Seminar Presentation
(along with the Technical Report) shall be evaluated by Two Faculty Members assigned by
Head of the Department, for 100 Marks. There shall be no SEE or External
Examination for Seminar.
9.11 Each Student shall appear for a Comprehensive Viva-Voce at the end of the V Year II
Semester. The Comprehensive Viva-Voce shall be conducted by a Committee, consisting of
three senior faculty members of Department nominated by the Head of the Department, and
the performance evaluation shall be for 100 Marks. There are no Internal Marks for the
Comprehensive Viva-voce.
9.12 i) The PGP Project shall start immediately after the completion of the IV Year II
Semester, and shall continue through V Year I and II Semesters after approval of PRC.
The Student shall carry out the literature survey, select an appropriate topic and
submit a Project Proposal within 6 weeks (immediately after his IV Year II Semester
End Examinations), for approval by the Project Review Committee (PRC). The PRC
shall be constituted by the Head of Department, and shall consist of the Head of
Department, Project Supervisor, and a Senior Faculty Member of the Department. The
Student shall present his Project Work Proposal to the PRC (PRC-I Presentation), on
whose approval he can ‘REGISTER for the PG Project’. After Registration, the
Student shall carry out his work, and continually submit ‘a fortnightly progress report’ to
his Supervisor throughout the Project period. The PRC will monitor the progress of the
Project Work and review, through PRC-II and PRC-III Presentations – one at the end of
the V Year I Semester, and one before the submission of M.Tech. Project Work
Report/ Dissertation.
ii) After PRC-III presentation, the PRC shall evaluate the entire performance of the
Student and declare the Project Report as ‘Satisfactory’ or ‘Unsatisfactory’. Every
Project Work Report/ Dissertation (that has been declared ‘satisfactory’) shall undergo
‘Plagiarism Check’ as per the University/ College norms to ensure content plagiarism
below a specified level of 30%, and to become acceptable for submission. In case of
9
unacceptable plagiarism levels, the student shall resubmit the Project Work Report,
after carrying out the necessary modifications/ additions to his Project Work/ Report as
per his Supervisor’s advice, within the specified time, as suggested by the PRC.
iii) If any Student could not be present for PRC-II at the scheduled time (after approval
and registration of his Project Work at PRC-I), his submission and presentation at
the PRC-III time (or at any other PRC specified dates) may be treated as PRC-II
peformance evaluation, and delayed PRC-III dates for him may be considered as per
PRC recommendations. Any Student is allowed to submit his M.Tech. Project
Dissertation ‘only after completion of 40 weeks from the date of approval/registration’
of his Project, and after obtaining all approvals from the PRC.
iv) A total of 200 Marks are allotted for the M.Tech. Project Work, ( out of which 100
Marks are allotted for internal evaluation and 100 Marks for external evaluation). For
internal Evaluation of 100 marks, Project Supervisor shall evaluate for 60 marks based on the
continuous Internal Evaluation(CIE) of the student’s performance and combined PRC-I, II & III
performance evaluation will be for 40 marks ( to be awarded by PRC, as SEE).
9.13 i) The Student shall be allowed to submit his Project Dissertation, only on the
successful completion of all the prescribed PG Subjects (Theory and Labs.), Seminar,
Comprehensive Viva-voce etc. (securing B Grade or above), and after obtaining all
approvals from PRC. In such cases, the M.Tech. Dissertations will be sent to an
External Examiner nominated by the Principal of the College, on whose ‘approval’, the
Student can appear for the M.Tech. Project Viva-voce Examination, which shall be
conducted by a Board, consisting of the PG Project Supervisor, Head of the
Department, and the External Examiner who adjudicate the M.Tech. Project Work and
Dissertation. The Board shall jointly declare the Project Work Performance as
‘satisfactory’, or ‘unsatisfactory’; and in successful cases, the External Examiner shall
evaluate the Student’s Project Work presentation and performance for 100 Marks
(SEE).
ii) If the adjudication report of the External Examiner is ‘not favourable’ , then the
Student shall revise and resubmit his Dissertation after one Semester, or as per the
time specified by the External Examiner and/ or the PRC. If the resubmitted report is
again evaluated by the External Examiner as ‘not favourable’, then that Dissertation
will be summarily rejected. Subsequent actions for such Dissertations may be
considered, only on the specific recommendations of the External Examiner and/ or
PRC.
iii) In cases, where the Board declared the Project Work Performance as ‘unsatisfactory’,
the Student is deemed to have failed in the Project Viva-voce Examination, and he
has to reappear for the Viva-voce Examination as per the Board recommendations. If
he fails in the second Viva-voce Examination also, he will not be considered eligible
for the Award of the Degree, unless he is asked to revise and resubmit his Project
Work by the Board within a specified time period (within 5 years from the date of
commencement of his I Year I Semester).
(c) PG Part (MBA)
10.1 Theory Subjects are evaluated for 100 marks, and Practicals / Lab. Subjects are also
evaluated for 100 marks.
10.2 PG Summer Internship, Seminar and Comprehensive Viva-voce shall be evaluated for100
marks each.
10.3. There shall be a PG Summer Internship, preferably in an industry, to be taken up during the
vacation, immediately after the IV year II Semester End Examinations. The Internship Activity
shall be submitted in a Report form, and the student shall also deliver a Seminar (based on
the PG Summer Internship) before the MBA Project Evaluation Committee (PEC); both the
Report and the Seminar shall be evaluated for 100 marks each by the PEC, at the beginning
10
of the V Year I Semester. The PEC shall be constituted by the Head of Dept. or
Principal/Director of the College/School, and shall consist of the Head of the Department, the
Supervisor of PG Summer Internship Program/Seminar/PG Project and a Senior Faculty
Member of the Department. There shall be no internal marks for this PG Summer Internship
Program.
10.4 For theory subjects, the distribution shall be 30 marks for Internal Evaluation and 70 marks
for the End-Examination. For the award of the 30 Internal (sessional) marks for theory
subjects, there shall be 2 internal examinations during the Semester, one at the middle of the
Semester and the other immediately after the completion of instructions; each of which shall
be evaluated for 25 marks, and the better of these two internals shall be considered for
awarding the 25 sessional marks. The remaining 5 sessional marks, will be awarded based
on the student’s performance in the Assignments.
10.5 i) Every PGP Student shall be required to execute his MBA Project, under the guidance
of the Supervisor assigned to him by the Head of Department. The PGP Project shall
start immediately after the completion of the V Year I Semester, and shall continue
through V Year II Semesters. The Student shall carry out the literature survey, select
an appropriate topic and submit a Project Proposal within 6 weeks (immediately after
his V Year I Semester End Examinations), for approval by the Project Review
Committee (PRC). The PRC shall be constituted by the Head of Department, and
shall consist of the Head of Department, Project Supervisor, and a Senior Faculty
Member of the Department. The Student shall present his Project Work Proposal to
the PRC (PRC-I Presentation), on whose approval he can ‘REGISTER for the PG
Project’. Every Student must compulsorily register for his MBA Project Work, within
the 6 weeks of time-frame as specified above. After Registration, the Student shall
carry out his work, and continually submit ‘a fortnightly progress report’ to his Supervisor
throughout the Project period. The PRC will monitor the progress of the Project Work
and review, through PRC-II and PRC-III Presentations – one at the end of the V Year II
Semester, and one before the submission of MBA Project Work Report/ Dissertation.
ii) After PRC-III presentation, the PRC shall evaluate the entire performance of the
Student and declare the Project Report as ‘Satisfactory’ or ‘Unsatisfactory’. Every
Project Work Report/ Dissertation (that has been declared ‘satisfactory’) shall undergo
‘Plagiarism Check’ as per the University/ College norms to ensure content plagiarism
below a specified level of 30%, and to become acceptable for submission. In case of
unacceptable plagiarism levels, the student shall resubmit the Project Work Report,
after carrying out the necessary modifications/ additions to his Project Work/ Report as
per his Supervisor’s advice, within the specified time, as suggested by the PRC.
iii) If any Student could not be present for PRC-II at the scheduled time (after approval
and registration of his Project Work at PRC-I), his submission and presentation at
the PRC-III time (or at any other PRC specified dates) may be treated as PRC-II
peformance evaluation, and delayed PRC-III dates for him may be considered as per
PRC recommendations. Any Student is allowed to submit his MBA Project Dissertation
‘only after completion of 24 weeks from the date of approval/registration’ of his
Project, and after obtaining all approvals from the PRC.
iv) A total of 200 Marks are allotted for the MBA Project Work, (out of which 100 Marks
are allotted for internal evaluation and 100 Marks for external evaluation). For internal
Evaluation of 100 marks, Project Supervisor shall evaluate for 60 marks based on the
continuous Internal Evaluation(CIE) of the student’s performance and combined PRC-I, II & III
performance evaluation will be for 40 marks ( to be awarded by PRC, as SEE).
10.6 i) The Student shall be allowed to submit his Project Dissertation, only on the
successful completion of all the prescribed PG Subjects (Theory and Labs.), Seminar,
Comprehensive Viva-voce etc. (securing B Grade or above), and after obtaining all
approvals from PRC. In such cases, the MBA. Dissertations will be sent to an
External Examiner nominated by the Principal of the College, on whose ‘approval’, the
11
Student can appear for the MBA. Project Viva-voce Examination, which shall be
conducted by a Board, consisting of the PG Project Supervisor, Head of the
Department, and the External Examiner who adjudicated the MBA Project Work and
Dissertation. The Board shall jointly declare the Project Work Performance as
‘satisfactory’, or ‘unsatisfactory’; and in successful cases, the External Examiner shall
evaluate the Student’s Project Work presentation and performance for 100 Marks
(SEE).
ii) If the adjudication report of the External Examiner is ‘not favourable’ , then the
Student shall revise and resubmit his Dissertation after one Semester, or as per the
time specified by the External Examiner and/ or the PRC. If the resubmitted report is
again evaluated by the External Examiner as ‘not favourable’, then that Dissertation
will be summarily rejected. Subsequent actions for such Dissertations may be
considered, only on the specific recommendations of the External Examiner and/ or
PRC.
iii) In cases, where the Board declared the Project Work Performance as ‘unsatisfactory’,
the Student is deemed to have failed in the Project Viva-voce Examination, and he
has to reappear for the Viva-voce Examination as per the Board recommendations. If
he fails in the second Viva-voce Examination also, he will not be considered eligible
for the Award of the Degree, unless he is asked to revise and resubmit his Project
Work by the Board within a specified time period (within 5 years from the date of
commencement of his I Year I Semester).
.
10.7 There shall be a Comprehensive Viva at the end of the V year II Semester, for the award of
100 marks. The Comprehensive Viva-Voce shall be conducted by the PRC, with the addition
of one more Senior Faculty Member of the Department/School. The Comprehensive Viva is
aimed to assess the student’s understanding in various subjects studied during the PG part of
Dual Degree Program. There are no internal marks for the Comprehensive Viva.
11.0 Grading Procedure
11.1 Marks will be awarded to indicate the performance of each student in each Theory
Subject, or Lab/Practicals, or Seminar, or Project, or Mini-Project, Minor Course etc., based
on the % marks obtained in CIE + SEE (Continuous Internal Evaluation + Semester End
Examination, both taken together) as specified in Item 9 above, and a corresponding
Letter Grade shall be given.
11.2 As a measure of the student’s performance, a 10-point Absolute Grading System using
the following Letter Grades (UGC Guidelines) and corresponding percentage of marks
shall be followed …
12
(a) For UG
% of Marks Secured Letter Grade Grade

(Class Intervals) (UGC Guidelines) Points
80% and above O 10
( ≥ 80% , ≤ 100% ) (Outstanding)
+
Below 80% but not less than 70% A 9
( ≥ 70% , < 80% ) (Excellent)
( ≥ 60% , < 70% ) (Very Good)
+
Below 60% but not less than 55% B 7
( ≥ 55% , < 60% ) (Good)
( ≥ 50% , < 55% ) (above Average)
Below 50% but not less than 45% C 5
( ≥ 45% , < 50% ) (Average)
Below 45% but not less than 40% P 4
( ≥ 40% , < 45% ) (Pass)
Below 40% F 0
( < 40% ) (FAIL)
Absent Ab 0
(b) For PG
% of Marks Secured (Class Intervals) Letter Grade (UGC Grade

Guidelines) Points
80% and above O 10
( ≥ 80% , ≤ 100% ) (Outstanding)
+
( ≥ 70% , < 80% ) (Excellent)
( ≥ 60% , < 70% ) (Very Good)
+
( ≥ 55% , < 60% ) (Good)
( ≥ 50% , < 55% ) (above Average)
Below 50% F 0
( < 50% ) (FAIL)
Absent Ab 0
11.3 A student obtaining F Grade in any Subject shall be considered ‘failed’ and will be
required to reappear as ‘Supplementary Candidate’ in the End Semester Examination
(SEE), as and when offered. In such cases, his Internal Marks (CIE Marks) in those
Subject(s) will remain same as those he obtained earlier.
11.4 A Letter Grade does not imply any specific % of Marks.
11.5 In general, a student shall not be permitted to repeat any Subject/ Course (s) only for
the sake of ‘Grade Improvement’ or ‘SGPA/ CGPA Improvement’. However, he has to
repeat all the Subjects/ Courses pertaining to that Semester, when he is detained
(as listed in Items 8.8- 8.9).
11.6 A student earns Grade Point (GP) in each Subject/ Course, on the basis of the Letter
Grade obtained by him in that Subject/ Course (excluding Mandatory non-credit
Courses). Then the corresponding ‘Credit Points’ (CP) are computed by multiplying the
Grade Point with Credits for that particular Subject/ Course.
Credit Points (CP) = Grade Point (GP) x Credits …. For a Course
13
11.7 The Student passes the Subject/ Course only when he gets GP ≥ 4/6 (P Grade or
above).
11.8 The Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) is calculated by dividing the Sum of
Credit Points (ΣCP) secured from ALL Subjects/ Courses registered in a Semester, by
the Total Number of Credits registered during that Semester. SGPA is rounded off to
TWO Decimal Places. SGPA is thus computed as
where ‘i’ is the Subject indicator index (takes into account all Subjects in a
Semester), ‘N’ is the no. of Subjects ‘REGISTERED’ for the Semester (as
specifically required and listed under the Course Structure of the parent Department),
C୧ is the no. of Credits allotted to the ith Subject, and G୧ represents the
Grade Points (GP) corresponding to the Letter Grade awarded for that ith Subject.
11.9 The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) is a measure of the overall cumulative
performance of a student over all Semesters considered for registration. The CGPA is
the ratio of the Total Credit Points secured by a student in ALL registered Courses in
ALL Semesters, and the Total Number of Credits registered in ALL the Semesters.
CGPA is rounded off to TWO Decimal Places. CGPA is thus computed from the I
Year Second Semester onwards, at the end of each Semester, as per the formula
where ‘M’ is the TOTAL no. of Subjects (as specifically required and listed under
the Course Structure of the parent Department) the Student has ‘REGISTERED’ from
the 1st Semester onwards upto and inclusive of the Semester S ( obviously M > N ),
‘j’ is the Subject indicator index (takes into account all Subjects from 1 to S
Semesters), C୨ is the no. of Credits allotted to the jth Subject, and G୨ represents
the Grade Points (GP) corresponding to the Letter Grade awarded for that jth
Subject. After registration and completion of I Year I Semester however, the SGPA
of that Semester itself may be taken as the CGPA, as there are no cumulative
effects.
11.10 For Merit Ranking or Comparison Purposes or any other listing, ONLY the ‘ROUNDED
OFF’ values of the CGPAs will be used.
11.11 For Calculations listed in Item 11.6 – 11.10, performance in failed Subjects/ Courses
(securing F Grade) will also be taken into account, and the Credits of such Subjects/
Courses will also be included in the multiplications and summations. However,
Mandatory Courses will not be taken into consideration.
11.12 Passing Standards:
i) A student shall be declared successful or ‘passed’ in a Semester, only when

he gets a SGPA ≥ 5.00/ 6.00 (at the end of that particular Semester); and a
student shall be declared successful or ‘passed’ in the entire UGP, only when
gets a CGPA ≥ 5.00/ 6.00; subject to the condition that he secures a GP ≥
4/6 (P Grade or above) in every registered Subject/ Course in each Semester
(during the entire UGP/PGP) for the Degree Award, as required.
ii) In spite of securing P Grade or above in some (or all) Subjects/ Courses in
any Semester, if a Student receives a SGPA < 5.00 / 6.00 and/ or CGPA <
5.00/ 6.00 at the end of such a Semester, then he ‘may be allowed’ (on the
‘specific recommendations’ of the Head of the Department and subsequent
approval from the Principal) -
14
(a) to go into the next subsequent Semester (subject to fulfilling all other attendance
and academic requirements as listed under Items 7-8);
(b) to ‘improve his SGPA of such a Semester (and hence CGPA) to 5.00/ 6.00 or
above’, by reappearing for ONE or MORE (as per Student’s choice) of the same
Subject(s) / Course(s) in which he has secured P Grade(s) in that Semester, at the
Supplementary Examinations to be held in the next subsequent Semester(s). In
such cases, his Internal Marks (CIE Marks) in those Subject(s) will remain same
as those he obtained earlier.
In these considerations, the newly secured Letter Grades will be recorded and
taken into account for calculation of SGPA and CGPA, only if there is an
improvement.
(iii) A Student shall be declared successful or ‘passed’ in any Non-Credit Subject/

Course, if he secures a ‘Satisfactory Participation Certificate’ for that Mandatory
Course.
11.13 After the completion of each Semester, a Grade Card or Grade Sheet (or
Transcript) shall be issued to all the Registered Students of that Semester,
indicating the Letter Grades and Credits earned. It will show the details of the
Courses Registered (Course Code, Title, No. of Credits, Grade Earned etc.), Credits
earned, SGPA, and CGPA.
12.0 Declaration of Results
12.1 Computation of SGPA and CGPA are done using the procedure listed in 11.6 – 11.10.
12.2 For Final % of Marks equivalent to the computed final CGPA, the following formula
may be used …
% of Marks = (final CGPA – 0.5) x 10
13.0 Award of Degree
13.1 A Student who registers for all the specified Subjects/ Courses as listed in the Course
Structure, satisfies all the Course Requirements, and passes all the examinations
prescribed in the entire IDP E&T Programme and secures the required number of 174
for UGP and 80 Credits for PGP (with CGPA ≥ 5.0/ 6.0), within 10 Academic Years from
the Date of Commencement of the First Academic Year, shall be declared to have
‘QUALIFIED’ for the Award of the B.Tech.+M.Tech /MBA Degree(UGP and PGP) in the
chosen Branch of Engineering as selected at the time of Admission.
13.2 A Student who qualifies for the Award of UG + PG Degree as listed in Item 13.1 shall
be placed in the following Classes …
13.3 Students with final CGPA (at the end of the IDP) for both UGP/ PGP ≥ 8.00/ 7.75, and
fulfilling the following conditions -
(i) should have passed all the Subjects/Courses in ‘FIRST APPEARANCE’ within the
first 5 Academic Years (or 10 Sequential Semesters) from the Date of
Commencement of his First Academic Year,
(ii) should have secured a CGPA ≥ 8.00/ 7.75, at the end of each of the 10
Sequential Semesters, starting from the I Year I Semester onwards,
(iii) should not have been detained or prevented from writing the End Semester
Examinations in any Semester due to shortage of attendance or any other reason,
shall be placed in ‘FIRST CLASS with DISTINCTION’.
Students having final CGPA (at the end of IDP) for both UGP/ PGP ≥ 8.00/ 7.75, but
not fulfilling the above conditions shall be placed in ‘FIRST CLASS’.
15
13.4 Students with final CGPA (at the end of the IDP) for UGP/ PGP ≥ 6.50/ 6.75 but <
8.00/ 7.75, shall be placed in ‘FIRST CLASS’.
13.5 Students with final CGPA (at the end of the IDP) for both UGP/ PGP ≥ 5.50/ 6.00
but < 6.50/ 6.75, shall be placed in ‘SECOND CLASS’.
13.6 All other Students who qualify for the Award of the Degree (as per Item 13.1), with
final CGPA (at the end of the IDP) for UGP ≥ 5.00 but < 5.50, shall be placed in
‘PASS CLASS’.
13.7 A student with final CGPA (at the end of the IDP) for UGP < 5.00 will not be eligible
for the Award of the B. Tech Degree.
13.8 A student with final CGPA (at the end of the IDP) for PGP < 6.00 will not be eligible
for the Award of the M. Tech / MBA Degree.
13.9 Students fulfilling the conditions listed under Item 13.1 alone will be eligible candidates
for - ‘University Rank’ and ‘Gold Medal’ considerations.
14.0 Withholding of Results

14.1 If the student has not paid fees to University/ College at any stage, or has pending
dues against his name due to any reason whatsoever, or if any case of indiscipline
is pending against him, the result of the student may be withheld, and he will not be
allowed to go into the next higher Semester. The Award or issue of the Degree may
also be withheld in such cases.
15.0 Transitory Regulations

15.1 Student who has discontinued for any reason, or has been detained for want of
attendance or lack of required credits as specified, or who has failed after having
undergone the Degree Programme, may be considered eligible for readmission to the same
Subjects/ Courses (or equivalent Subjects/ Courses, as the case may be), and same
Professional Electives/ Open Electives (or from set/category of Electives or equivalents
suggested, as the case may be) as and when they are offered (within the time-frame
of 10 years from the Date of Commencement of his I Year I Semester).
16.0 Student Transfers

16.1 There shall be no Branch transfers after the completion of Admission Process.
16.2 There shall be no transfer among the Constituent Colleges and Units of Jawaharlal
Nehru Technological University Hyderabad.
17.0 Scope
i) Where the words “he”, “him”, “his”, occur in the write-up of regulations, they
include “she”, “her”, “hers”.
ii) Where the words “Subject” or “Subjects”, occur in these regulations, they also
imply “Course” or “Courses”.
iii) The Academic Regulations should be read as a whole, for the purpose of any
interpretation.
iv) In case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the
decision of the Vice-Chancellor/ Principal is final.
v) The College may change or amend the Academic Regulations, Course Structure or
Syllabi at any time, and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all
Students with effect from the dates notified by the College Authorities.
16
MALPRACTICE RULES
The following Malpractice rules are applicable to both Internal
Examinations/SEE/Supplementory Examinations:
Nature of Malpractices Punishment

If the candidate:
1 (a) Possesses or keeps accessible in Expulsion from the examination hall and
examination hall, any paper, note cancellation of the performance in that subject
book, programmable calculators, only.
Cell phones, pager, palm
computers or any other form of
material concerned with or related
to the subject of the examination
(theory or practical) in which he is
appearing but has not made use of
(material shall include any marks
on the body of the candidate which
can be used as an aid in the
subject of the examination)
1 (b) Gives assistance or guidance or Expulsion from the examination hall and
receives it from any other cancellation of the performance in that subject
candidate orally or by any other only of all the candidates involved. In case of an
body language methods or outsider, he will be handed over to the police and
communicates through cell a case is registered against him.
phones with any candidate or
persons in or outside the exam hall
in respect of any matter.
2 Has copied in the examination hall Expulsion from the examination hall and
from any paper, book, cancellation of the performance in that subject
programmable calculators, palm and all other subjects the candidate has already
computers or any other form of appeared including practical examinations and
material relevant to the subject of project work and shall not be permitted to appear
the examination (theory or for the remaining examinations of the subjects of
practical) in which the candidate is that Semester/year.
appearing. The Hall Ticket of the candidate is to be
cancelled.
3 Impersonates any other candidate The candidate who has impersonated shall be
in connection with the examination. expelled from examination hall. The candidate is
also debarred and forfeits the seat. The
performance of the original candidate who has
been impersonated, shall be cancelled in all the
subjects of the examination (including practicals
and project work) already appeared and shall not
be allowed to appear for examinations of the
remaining subjects of that semester/year. The
candidate is also debarred for two consecutive
semesters from class work and all examinations.
The continuation of the course by the candidate is
subject to the academic regulations in connection
with forfeiture of seat. If the imposter is an
outsider, he will be handed over to the police and
a case is registered against him.
4 Smuggles in the Answer book or Expulsion from the examination hall and
additional sheet or takes out or cancellation of performance in that subject and all
arranges to send out the question the other subjects the candidate has already
paper during the examination or appeared including practical examinations and
answer book or additional sheet, project work and shall not be permitted for the
during or after the examination. remaining examinations of the subjects of that
semester/year. The candidate is also debarred for
17
two consecutive semesters from class work and

all examinations. The continuation of the course
by the candidate is subject to the academic
regulations in connection with forfeiture of seat.
5 Uses objectionable, abusive or Cancellation of the performance in that subject.
offensive language in the answer
paper or in letters to the examiners
or writes to the examiner
requesting him to award pass
marks.
6 Refuses to obey the orders of the In case of students of the college, they shall be
Chief Superintendent / Assistant – expelled from examination halls and cancellation
Superintendent / any officer on of their performance in that subject and all other
duty or misbehaves or creates subjects the candidate(s) has (have) already
disturbance of any kind in and appeared and shall not be permitted to appear for
around the examination hall or the remaining examinations of the subjects of that
organizes a walk out or instigates semester/year. The candidates also are debarred
others to walk out, or threatens the and forfeit their seats. In case of outsiders, they
officer-in charge or any person on will be handed over to the police and a police
duty in or outside the examination case is registered against them.
hall of any injury to his person or to
any of his relations whether by
words, either spoken or written or
by signs or by visible
representation, assaults the officer-
in-charge, or any person on duty in
or outside the examination hall or
any of his relations, or indulges in
any other act of misconduct or
mischief which result in damage to
or destruction of property in the
examination hall or any part of the
College campus or engages in any
other act which in the opinion of
the officer on duty amounts to use
of unfair means or misconduct or
has the tendency to disrupt the
orderly conduct of the examination.
7 Leaves the exam hall taking away Expulsion from the examination hall and
answer script or intentionally tears cancellation of performance in that subject and all
of the script or any part thereof the other subjects the candidate has already
inside or outside the examination appeared including practical examinations and
hall. project work and shall not be permitted for the
remaining examinations of the subjects of that
semester/year. The candidate is also debarred for
two consecutive semesters from class work and
all examinations. The continuation of the course
by the candidate is subject to the academic
regulations in connection with forfeiture of seat.
8 Possess any lethal weapon or Expulsion from the examination hall and
firearm in the examination hall. cancellation of the performance in that subject
and all other subjects the candidate has already
appeared including practical examinations and
project work and shall not be permitted for the
semester/year. The candidate is also debarred
and forfeits the seat.
9 If student of the college, who is not Student of the colleges expulsion from the
a candidate for the particular examination hall and cancellation of the
18
examination or any person not performance in that subject and all other subjects
connected with the college the candidate has already appeared including
indulges in any malpractice or practical examinations and project work and shall
improper conduct mentioned in not be permitted for the remaining examinations of
clause 6 to 8. the subjects of that semester/year. The candidate
is also debarred and forfeits the seat. Person(s)
who do not belong to the College will be handed
over to police and, a 8police case will be
registered against them.
10 Comes in a drunken condition to Expulsion from the examination hall and
the examination hall. cancellation of the performance in that subject
and all other subjects the candidate has already
appeared including practical examinations and
project work and shall not be permitted for the
semester/year.
11 Copying detected on the basis of Cancellation of the performance in that subject
internal evidence, such as, during and all other subjects the candidate has appeared
valuation or during special scrutiny. including practical examinations and project work
of that semester / year examinations.
12 If any malpractice is detected
which is not covered in the above
clauses 1 to 11 shall be reported to
the College / University for further
action to award suitable
punishment.
19

(AUTONOMOUS)
5 Year Integrated Dual Degree Program (IDP)
(B.Tech. + M.Tech.)
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
COURSE STRUCTURE
(Applicable from the batch admitted from the Academic Year 2015-16 and onwards)
I YEAR I SEMESTER
S.No. Group Subject L T P Credits
1 BS Mathematics - I 4 1 0 4
2 HS English 3 0 0 3
3 ES Computer Programming and Data Structures 4 1 0 4
4 ES Engineering Graphics 3 0 3 4
5 ES Environmental Science 3 0 0 3
6 ES Computer Programming and Data Structures Lab 0 0 3 2
7 HS English Language Communication Skills Lab 0 0 3 2
8 ES Engineering Workshop 0 0 3 2
NSS/NCC/NSO
Total Credits 17 2 12 24
I YEAR II SEMESTER
1 BS Mathematics–II 3 1 0 3
2 ES Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering 4 0 0 4
3 BS Applied Physics 3 1 0 3
4 BS Engineering Chemistry 3 1 0 3
5 ES Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 3
6 BS Computational Mathematics 2 0 0 2
7 ES Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering Lab 0 0 3 2
8 HS Applied Physics Lab 0 0 3 2
9 BS Computational Mathematics Lab 0 0 3 2
NSS/NCC/NSO
II YEAR I SEMESTER
1 BS Mathematics - III 4 0 0 4
2 PC Signals and Systems 4 1 0 4
3 PC Electrical Technology 4 0 0 4
4 PC Analog Electronics 4 0 0 4
5 ES Network Analysis 4 1 0 4
6 HS Gender Sensitization Lab - - - -
7 PC Analog Electronics Lab-I 0 0 3 1
8 PC Electrical Technology Lab 0 0 3 2
9 ES Basic Simulation Lab 0 0 3 1
20
II YEAR II SEMESTER
1 PC Switching Theory and Logic Design 3 1 0 3
2 PC Pulse and Digital Circuits 3 1 0 3
3 PC Electromagnetic Theory and Transmission Lines 4 0 0 4
4 PC Analog Communications 3 1 0 3
5 PC Control Systems 3 1 0 3
6 PC Analog Communications Lab 0 0 3 2
7 PC Pulse and Digital Circuits Lab 0 0 3 2
8 PC Analog Electronics Lab-II 0 0 3 2
9 HS Human Values and Professional Ethics 2 0 0 2
III YEAR I SEMESTER

1 PC Linear and Digital IC Applications 4 0 0 4
2 PC Antennas and Wave Propagation 4 0 0 4
3 PC Digital Communications 3 1 0 3
4 OE - I Open Elective –I 3 0 0 3
5 HS Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis 4 0 0 4
6 PC Linear IC Applications Lab 0 0 3 2
7 PC Digital Communications Lab 0 0 3 2
8 PC Design Lab 0 0 3 2
III YEAR II SEMESTER

1 OE-II Open Elective-II 3 0 0 3
2 PE-I Professional Elective-I 4 0 0 4
3 PE-II Professional Elective-II 4 0 0 4
4 PC Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 4 0 0 4
5 PC Digital Signal Processing 4 0 0 4
6 HS Advanced English Language and Communication 0 0 3 1
Skills Lab
7 PC Digital Signal Processing Lab 0 0 3 2
8 PC Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab 0 0 3 2
During Summer Vacation between III and IV Years: Industry Oriented Mini Project
21
IV YEAR I SEMESTER
1 PC Microwave Engineering 4 0 0 4
PE-III
2 Professional Elective - III 4 0 0 4
(UG)
3 PGC -I Advanced Digital Signal Processing 4 0 0 4
4 PGE - I PG Elective - I 4 0 0 4
5 PGE - II PG Elective - II 4 0 0 4
6 PGE - III PG Elective - III 4 0 0 4
PC (UG)
7 Microwave Engineering Lab 0 0 3 2
Lab
8 PGC Lab Advanced Digital Signal Processing Lab 0 0 4 2
9 CoC(UG) Industrial Training / Mini Project Evaluation 2
IV YEAR II SEMESTER
1 HS (UG) Management Science 4 0 0 4
2 PGC - II Advanced Computer Networks 4 0 0 4
3 PGE – IV PG Elective - IV 4 0 0 4
4 PGC Lab Advanced Computer Networks Lab 0 0 4 2
5 DC(UG) Major Project 14
V YEAR I SEMESTER
1 PGC - III Wireless Communications and Networks 4 0 0 4
2 PGE - V PG Elective - V 4 0 0 4
3 PGE - VI PG Elective - VI 4 0 0 4
4 PGE - VII PG Elective - VII 4 0 0 4
5 PG PG Project Stage - I 4 0 0 12
6 PG Seminar 0 0 3 2
V YEAR II SEMESTER
1 PG PG Project Stage - II - - - 18
2 PG Comprehensive Viva - - - 4
Total Credits 22
22
OPEN ELECTIVE- I
S.No. Subject Offering Department
1 Disaster Management Civil Engineering
2 Non – Conventional Power Generation
3 Electrical Engineering Materials Electrical and Electronics Engineering
4 Nano-Technology
5 Operations Research
6 Basics of Thermodynamics Mechanical Engineering
7 Fabrication Processes
Electronics and Communication
8 Electronic Measuring Instruments
Engineering
9 OOPS through JAVA
Computer Science and Engineering
10 Computer Graphics
11 Engineering Materials
Metallurgical Engineering
12 Metallurgy for Non Metallurgists
13 Industrial Pollution Control Engineering Chemical Engineering
OPEN ELECTIVE- II
S.No. Subject Offering Department
1 Estimation, Quantity Survey and Civil Engineering
Valuation
2 Design Estimation and Costing of
Electrical Systems
3 Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Energy Storage Systems
4 Mechatronics
5 Jet propulsion and Rocket Engineering
6 Ergonomics Mechanical Engineering
7 Mechatronics
Principles of Electronic Electronics and Communication
8
Communications Engineering
9 Cyber Security
Computer Science and Engineering
10 Database Management Systems
11 Corrosion Engineering
Metallurgical Engineering
12 Testing of Materials
13 Solid Waste Management Chemical Engineering
23
Professional Elective (PE) Subjects Lists
PE-I
1. Cellular and Mobile Communications
2. Computer Organization and Operating Systems
3. Digital Image Processing
4. Television Engineering
PE-II
1. Computer Networks
2. Digital System Design
3. Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation
4. Scripting Languages
PE-III
1. Radar Systems
2. Optical Communications
3. Satellite Communications
4. Artificial Neural Networks
PG Elective (PG E ) Subjects List
PG E – I
1. Transform Techniques
2. Bio-Medical Signal Processing.
3. RF Circuit Design
PG E – II
1. VLSI Technology and Design
2. Advanced Data Communications
3. Detection and Estimation Theory
PG E – III
1. Adhoc Wireless and Sensor Networks
2. Random Processes and Queuing Theory
3. TCP / IP and ATM Networks
PG E – IV
1. Adaptive Signal Processing
2. Embedded System Design
3. Network Security and Cryptography
PG E – V
1. Image and Video Processing
2. 4G Technologies
3. Multimedia and Signal Coding
PG E – VI
1. Coding Theory and Techniques
2. Software Defined Radio
3. Spread Spectrum Communications
PG E –VII
1. Digital Signal Processors and Architectures
2. Speech and Audio Signal Processing
3. Radar Signal Processing
24

(AUTONOMOUS)
5 Year Integrated Dual Degree Program (IDP)
(B.Tech. + M.Tech. / MBA)
ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
COURSE STRUCTURE FOR MBA

(Applicable from the batch admitted from the Academic Year 2015-16 and onwards)
IV YEAR I SEMESTER
1 PC Microwave Engineering 4 0 0 4
2 PE-III
Professional Elective - III 4 0 0 4
(UG)
3 HS (UG) Management Science 4 0 0 4
4 PGC-I Marketing Management 4 0 0 4
5 PGC-II Human Resource Management 4 0 0 4
6 PGE-I PG Elective-I 4 0 0 4
7 PC (UG) Lab Microwave Engineering Lab 0 0 3 2
8 PGC Lab Soft Skills Lab 0 0 4 2
9 EAC (UG) Industrial Training / Mini Project Evaluation 2
(Summer Program)
Total Credits 30
IV YEAR II SEMESTER
1 PGC-III Research Methodology and Statistical Analysis 4 0 0 4
2 PGC-IV Business Law and Regulation 4 0 0 4
3 PGE-II PG Elective-II 4 0 0 4
4 PGC Lab Statistical Analysis Lab using SPSS / Excel 0 0 4 2
5 PC (UG) Major Project 14
Total Credits 28
V YEAR I SEMESTER
1 PGC-V Strategic Management 4 0 0 4
2 PGE-III PG Elective-III 4 0 0 4
3 PGE-IV PG Elective-IV 4 0 0 4
4 PGE-V PG Elective-V 4 0 0 4
5 PG PG Project Stage – I 12
6 PG Seminar 0 0 3 2
Total Credits 30
V YEAR II SEMESTER
1 PG PG Project Stage-II 18
2 PG Comprehensive Viva 4
Total Credits 22
25
Core & Electives:
Group Marketing/HR/Finance/Systems
PGC-I Marketing Management
PGC-II Human Resource Management
PGE-I Sales and Distribution / Training and Development / Financial Management /
Management Information System
PGC Lab Soft Skills Lab
PGC-III core Research Methodology & Statistical Analysis
PGC-IV core Business Law & Regulation
PGE-II Integrated Marketing Communications / Management of Industrial Relations /

Security Analysis and Portfolio Management / Enterprise Resource Planning
PGC Lab Statistical Analysis Lab using SPSS / Excel
PGC –V Core Strategic Management
PGE-III Retailing Management / Compensation & Reward Management / Strategic

Investment and Financing Decisions/E-Business
PGE-IV Services Marketing / Management of Change / International Financial
Management/Cyber Security
PGE-V International Marketing / Performance Management / Derivatives / Information
System Control and Audit
Students are advised to take prior approval from the Mentor of the Department of
H&SS before selecting and finalizing the Electives.
26
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. /MBA) I Year I-Sem L T P C

4 1 0 4
MATHEMATICS – I
(Common to all Branches)
Pre Requisites: NIL
Course Objectives:
• To train the students thoroughly in mathematical concepts of ordinary differential equations and
their applications.
• To prepare students for lifelong learning and successful careers using mathematical Concepts of
differential and integral calculus, ordinary differential equations and vector calculus.
• To develop the skill pertinent to the practice of the mathematical concepts including the students
abilities to formulate and modeling the problems, to think creatively and to synthesize information.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
• Become familiar with the application of differential and integral calculus, ordinary differential
equations and vector calculus to engineering problems.
• Attain the abilities to use mathematical knowledge to analyze, formulate and solve problems in
engineering applications.
UNIT–I: Differential calculus (12 lectures)

Rolle’s Mean value Theorem – Lagrange’s Mean Value Theorem – Cauchy’s mean value Theorem –
(all theorems without proof but with geometrical interpretations), verification of the Theorems and
testing the applicability of these theorem to the given function.
Curve tracing – Equations given in Cartesian, polar and parametric forms.
Functions of several variables – Functional dependence- Jacobian- Maxima and Minima of functions
of two variables with constraints and without constraints-Method of Lagrange multipliers.
UNIT–II: Improper Integrals, Multiple Integration (12 lectures)

Gamma and Beta Functions –Relation between them, their properties – evaluation of improper
integrals using Gamma / Beta functions.
Multiple integrals – double and triple integrals – change of order of integration- change of variables
(polar, cylindrical and spherical) . Finding the area of a region using Double integration and volume of
a region in space using triple integration.
UNIT–III: Vector Calculus (12 lectures)

Vector Calculus: Scalar point function and vector point function, Gradient- Divergence- Curl and their
related properties, - Laplacian operator, Line integral – Work done – Surface integrals –Volume
integral. Green’s Theorem, Stoke’s theorem and Gauss’s Divergence Theorems (Statement & their
Verification). Solenoidal and irrotational vectors, Finding potential function.
UNIT–IV: First Order Ordinary Differential Equations (10 lectures)

Linear and exact differential equations
Applications of first order differential equations – Newton’s Law of cooling, Law of natural growth and
decay, orthogonal trajectories and electrical circuits
UNIT-V: Higher Order Ordinary Differential Equations (10 lectures)

Linear, homogeneous and non- homogeneous differential equations of second and higher order with
ax n ax n
constant coefficients. Non-homogeneous term of the type e , Sin ax, Cos ax, and x , e V(x), x
V(x). Method of variation of parameters. Applications: Bending of beams, Electrical circuits and
simple harmonic motion.
27
Text books:
1) HIGHER ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS BY B S GREWAL, KHANNA PUBLICATIONS.
2) ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS BY ERWIN KREYSZIG, W IELY PUBLICATIONS.
3) VECTER ANALYSIS BY GHOSG & MAITY, NEW CENTRAL BOOK AGENCY.
References:
1) Engineering Mathematics By Srimantapal & Subodh C. Bhunia, Oxford University Press.
2) ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS BY PETER V O’NEIL, CENGAGE LEARNING.
28

3 0 0 3
ENGLISH
1. INTRODUCTION:
In view of the growing importance of English as a tool for global communication and the consequent
emphasis on training students to acquire communicative competence, the syllabus has been
designed to develop linguistic and communicative competencies of Engineering students. The
prescribed books and the exercises are meant to serve broadly as students’ handbooks.
In the English classes, the focus should be on the skills of reading, writing, listening and speaking and
for this the teachers should use the text prescribed for detailed study. For example, the students
should be encouraged to read the texts/selected paragraphs silently. The teachers can ask
comprehension questions to stimulate discussion and based on the discussions students can be
made to write short paragraphs/essays etc.
The text for non-detailed study is for extensive reading/reading for pleasure. Hence, it is suggested
that they read the topics selected for discussion on their own in the class. The time should be utilized
for working out the exercises given after each section, as also for supplementing the exercises with
authentic materials of a similar kind for example, from newspaper articles, advertisements,
promotional material, etc. However, the stress in this syllabus is on skill development, fostering ideas
and practice of language skills.
2. OBJECTIVES:
• To improve the language proficiency of the students in English with emphasis on LSRW skills.
• To equip the students to study academic subjects more effectively using the theoretical and
practical components of the English syllabus.
• To develop the study skills and communication skills in formal and informal situations.
• To enable students to develop their listening skill so that they may appreciate its role in the
LSWR skills approach to language and improve their pronunciation
• To equip students with necessary training in listening so that they can comprehend the
speech of people of different backgrounds and regions.
• To make students aware of the role of speaking in English and its contribution to their
success.
• To enable students to express themselves fluently and appropriately in social and
professional contexts.
• To develop an awareness in the students about the significance of silent reading and
comprehension.
• To develop the ability of studnts to guess the meanings of words from context and grasp the
overall messages of the text, draw inferences etc.
• To develop an awareness in the students about writing a an exact and formal skill.
• To equip them with the components of different forms of writing, beginning with the lower
order ones.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1. Use of English Language - written and spoken.
2. Enrichment of comprehension and fluency
3. Gaining confidence in using language in verbal situations.
29
SYLLABUS:
Listening Skills:
Objectives
1. To enable students develop their listening skills so that they may appreciate the role in the LSRW
skills approach to language and improve their pronunciation
2. To equip students with necessary training in listening, so that they can comprehend the speech
of people of different backgrounds and regions
Students should be given practice in listening to the sounds of the language, to be able to recognize
them, to distinguish between them, to mark stress and recognize and use the right intonation in
sentences.
• Listening for general content
• Listening to fill up information
• Intensive listening
• Listening for specific information
Speaking Skills:
Objectives
1. To make students aware of the role of speaking in English and its contribution to their success.
2. To enable students express themselves fluently and appropriately in social and professional
contexts.
• Oral practice
• Describing objects/situations/people
• Role play – Individual/Group activities (Using exercises from the five units of the prescribed
text: Skills Annexe–Functional English for Success)
• Just A Minute (JAM) Sessions.
Reading Skills:
Objectives
1. To develop an awareness in the students about the significance of silent reading and
comprehension.
2. To develop the ability of students to guess the meanings of words from context and grasp the
overall message of the text, draw inferences, etc.
• Skimming the text
• Understanding the gist of an argument
• Identifying the topic sentence
• Scanning
• Inferring lexical and contextual meaning
• Understanding discourse features
• Recognizing coherence/sequencing of sentences
NOTE: The students will be trained in reading skills using the prescribed text for detailed study.
They will be examined in reading and answering questions using ‘unseen’ passages which
may be taken from authentic texts, such as magazines/newspaper articles.
Writing Skills:
Objectives
1. To develop an awareness in the students about writing as an exact and formal skill
2. To equip them with the components of different forms of writing, beginning with the lower order
ones.
• Writing sentences
• Use of appropriate vocabulary
• Paragraph writing
• Coherence and cohesiveness
30
• Narration / description
• Note Making
• Formal and informal letter writing
• Describing graphs using expressions of comparison
TEXTBOOKS PRESCRIBED:
In order to improve the proficiency of the student in the acquisition of the four skills
mentioned above, the following texts and course content, divided into Five Units, are prescribed:
For Detailed study: First Textbook: “Skills Annexe -Functional English for Success”, Published
by Orient Black Swan, Hyderabad
For Non-detailed study

Second Textbook “Epitome of Wisdom”, Published by Maruthi Publications, Hyderabad.
• The course content and study material is divided into Five Units.
Unit –I
1. Chapter entitled ‘Wit and Humour’ from ‘Skills Annexe’ -Functional English for Success,
Published by Orient Black Swan, Hyderabad
2. Chapter entitled ‘Mokshagundam Visvesvaraya’ from “Epitome of Wisdom”, Published by
Maruthi Publications, Hyderabad.
L - Listening for Sounds, Stress and Intonation

S - Greeting and Taking Leave, Introducing Oneself and Others (Formal and Informal Situations)
R - Reading for Subject/ Theme- The Palm Islands from Epitome of Wisdom is for Reading
Comprehension
W - Writing Paragraphs
G - Types of Nouns and Pronouns
V - Homonyms, Homophones & Homographs
Unit –II
1. Chapter entitled “Cyber Age” from “Skills Annexe -Functional English for Success”
Published by Orient Black Swan, Hyderabad.
2. Report Writing (First & Second Textbooks)
L - Listening for themes and facts
S - Apologizing, interrupting, requesting and making polite conversation
R- Reading for theme and gist- The 1 Thing Every Business Executive Must Understand about
Social Media by Dave Kerpen from Skills Annexe is for Reading Comprehension
W - Describing people, places, objects, events
G - Verb forms
V - Noun, Verb, Adjective and Adverb
Unit –III
1. Chapter entitled ‘Risk Management’ from “Skills Annexe -Functional English for Success”
2. Chapter entitled ‘Leela’s Friend’ by R.K. Narayan from “Epitome of Wisdom”, Published
by Maruthi Publications, Hyderabad
L - Listening for main points and sub-points for note taking
S - Giving instructions and directions; Speaking of hypothetical situations
R - Reading for details- Sivakasi: Who to Blame for the Frequent Fire Accidents in India’s Largest
Fireworks Industry Hub? by Amrutha Gayathri from Skills Annexe & Forensic Science from
Epitome of Wisdom are for Reading Comprehension
W - Note-making, Information transfer, Punctuation
G - Present tense
V - Synonyms and Antonyms
31
Unit –IV
1. Letter Writing – Writing formal letters, letter of application along with curriculum vitae (First
& Second Textbooks)
2. Chapter entitled ‘The Last Leaf’ from “Epitome of Wisdom”, Published by Maruthi
Publications, Hyderabad
L- Listening for specific details and information
S - Narrating, expressing opinions and telephone interactions
L - Reading for specific details and information- What I Cherish Most by V. S. Srinivasa Sastri from
Skills Annexe & Choose How to Start Your Day from Epitome of Wisdom are for Reading
Comprehension
W - Writing e-mails
G - Past and Future tenses
V - Vocabulary - Idioms and Phrasal verbs
Unit –V
1. Chapter entitled ‘Sports and Health’ from “Skills Annexe -Functional English for Success”
2. Chapter entitled ‘The Convocation Speech’ by N.R. Narayanmurthy’ from “Epitome of
Wisdom”, Published by Maruthi Publications, Hyderabad
L - Critical Listening and Listening for speaker’s tone/ attitude
S - Group discussion and Making presentations
R - Critical reading, reading for reference - Benefits of Physical Activity from Skills Annexe &
What is meant by Entrepreneurship? from Epitome of Wisdom are for Reading
Comprehension
W - Project proposals; Project Reports and Research Papers
G - Adjectives, Prepositions and Concord
V - Collocations and Technical vocabulary, Using words appropriately
Exercises from the texts not prescribed shall be used for classroom tasks.
REFERENCES:
1. Effective Technical Communication, M Ashraf Rizvi, Tata Mc Graw –Hill.
2. Murphy’s English Grammar with CD, Murphy, Cambridge University Press.
3. Contemporary English Grammar Structures and Composition by David Green, MacMillan
Publishers, New Delhi. 2010.
4. Technical Communication, Meenakshi Raman, Oxford University Press
5. Practical English Usage, Michael Swan, Oxford University Press
6. Innovate with English: A Course in English for Engineering Students, edited by T Samson,
Foundation Books.
7. English Grammar Practice, Raj N Bakshi, Orient Longman.
8. Technical Communication by Daniel Riordan. 2011. Cengage Publications. New Delhi.
9. Handbook of English Grammar& Usage, Mark Lester and Larry Beason, Tata Mc Graw –Hill.
10. Spoken English, R.K. Bansal & JB Harrison, Orient Longman.
11. Grammar Games, Renuvolcuri Mario, Cambridge University Press.
12. Everyday Dialogues in English, Robert J. Dixson, Prentice Hall India Pvt Ltd.,
13. ABC of Common Errors Nigel D Turton, Mac Millan Publishers.
14. Basic Vocabulary Edgar Thorpe & Showick Thorpe, Pearson Education
15. An Interactive Grammar of Modern English, Shivendra K. Verma and Hemlatha Nagarajan , Frank
Bros & CO
32

4 1 0 4
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING AND DATA STRUCTURES
Prerequisites:
There are no prerequisites for this course, except that anyone who wants to learn C should have
analytical skills and logical reasoning.
Course Objectives:
• This course starts from the basics of computers and program development.
• It covers various concepts of C programming language
• It introduces searching and sorting algorithms
• It provides an understanding of data structures such as stacks and queues.
Course Outcomes:
• Develop C programs for computing and real life applications using basic elements like control
statements, arrays, functions, pointers and strings; and data structures like stacks, queues
and linked lists.
• Implement searching and sorting algorithms
UNIT - I
Introduction to Computers – Computer Systems, Computing Environments, Computer Languages,
Creating and running programs, Software Development Method, Algorithms, Pseudo code, flow
charts, applying the software development method.
Introduction to C Language – Background, Simple C programs, Identifiers, Basic data types,
Variables, Constants, Input / Output, Operators. Expressions, Precedence and Associatively,
Expression Evaluation, Type conversions, Bit wise operators, Statements, Simple C Programming
examples.
UNIT – II
Statements – if and switch statements, Repetition statements – while, for, do-while statements, Loop
examples, other statements related to looping – break, continue, go to, Simple C Programming
examples.
Designing Structured Programs- Functions, basics, user defined functions, inter function
communication, Scope, Storage classes-auto, register, static, extern, scope rules, type qualifiers,
recursion- recursive functions, Preprocessor commands, example C programs
UNIT – III
Arrays and Strings – Concepts, using arrays in C, inter function communication, array applications,
two – dimensional arrays, multidimensional arrays, C program examples. Concepts, C Strings, String
Input / Output functions, arrays of strings, string manipulation functions, string / data conversion, C
program examples.
Pointers – Introduction (Basic Concepts), Pointers for inter function communication, pointers to
pointers, compatibility, memory allocation functions, array of pointers, programming applications,
pointers to void, pointers to functions, command –line arguments.
UNIT - IV
Derived types – Structures – Declaration, definition and initialization of structures, accessing
structures, nested structures, arrays of structures, structures and functions, pointers to structures, self
referential structures, unions, typedef, bit fields, enumerated types, C programming examples.
33
Input and Output – Concept of a file, streams, standard input / output functions, formatted input /
output functions, text files and binary files, file input / output operations, file status functions (error
handling), C program examples.
UNIT – V
Sorting and Searching selection sort, bubble sort, insertion sort, linear and binary search methods.
Data Structures – Introduction to Data Structures, abstract data types, Linear list – singly linked list
implementation, insertion, deletion and searching operations on linear list, Stacks-Operations, array
and linked representations of stacks, stack applications, Queues-operations, array and linked
representations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. C Programming & Data Structures, B.A.Forouzan and R.F. Gilberg, Third Edition, Cengage
Learning.
2. Problem Solving and Program Design in C, J.R. Hanly and E.B. Koffman, Fifth Edition, Pearson
Education.
3. The C Programming Language, B.W. Kernighan and Dennis M.Ritchie, PHI/Pearson Education
REFERENCES:
1. C & Data structures – P. Padmanabham, Third Edition, B.S. Publications.
2. C Programming with problem solving, J.A. Jones & K. Harrow, dreamtech Press
3 Programming in C – Stephen G. Kochan, III Edition, Pearson Eductaion.
4. C for Engineers and Scientists, H.Cheng, Mc.Graw-Hill International Edition
5. Data Structures using C – A.M.Tanenbaum, Y.Langsam, and M.J. Augenstein, Pearson
Education / PHI
6. C Programming & Data Structures,E.Balagurusamy,TMH.
7. C Programming & Data Structures, P. Dey, M Ghosh R Thereja, Oxford University Press
8. C & Data structures – E V Prasad and N B Venkateswarlu, S.Chand & Co.
34

3 0 3 4
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
Pre-requisites: Nil
Course objectives:
• To provide basic concepts in engineering drawing.
• To impart knowledge about standard principles of orthographic projection of objects.
• To draw sectional views and pictorial views of solids.
Course Outcomes:
• Preparing working drawings to communicate the ideas and information.
• Read, understand and interpret engineering drawings.
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING DRAWING :
Principles of Engineering Graphics and their Significance, Conic Sections including the Rectangular
Hyperbola – General method only. Cycloid, Epicycloid and Hypocycloid,
Involute. Scales – Plain, Diagonal and Vernier Scales.
UNIT- II
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS:
Principles of Orthographic Projections – Conventions – Projections of Points and Lines
Projections of Plane regular geometric figures.—Auxiliary Planes.
UNIT – III
Projections of Regular Solids – Auxiliary Views.
UNIT – IV
Sections or Sectional views of Right Regular Solids – Prism, Cylinder, Pyramid, Cone – Auxiliary
views – Sections of Sphere.
Development of Surfaces of Right Regular Solids – Prism, Cylinder, Pyramid and Cone
UNIT – V
ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS :
Principles of Isometric Projection – Isometric Scale – Isometric Views – Conventions – Isometric
Views of Lines, Plane Figures, Simple and Compound Solids – Isometric Projection of objects having
non- isometric lines. Isometric Projection of Spherical Parts.
Conversion of Isometric Views to Orthographic Views and Vice-versa – Conventions
Auto CAD: Basic principles only
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Engineering Drawing N.D. Bhatt / Charotar
2. Engineering Drawing and Graphics Rane and Shah/ Pearson Edu.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A Text Book of Engineering Drawing / Dhawan R K / S. Chand
2. Engineering Graphics With Auto CAD / James D Bethune / Pearson Edu.
3. Engineering Graphics / K R Mohan / Dhanpat Rai.
4. Text book on Engineering Drawing / KL Narayana/ P Kannaih/ Scitech
35

3 0 0 3
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
Prerequisites : NIL
Objectives:
• Creating the awareness about environmental problems among students.
• Imparting basic knowledge about the environment and its allied problems.
• Developing an attitude of concern for the environment.
• Motivating students to participate in environment protection and environment improvement.
Outcomes:
At the end of the course, it is expected that students will be able to:
• Identify and analyze environmental problems as well as the risks associated with these problems
• Understand what it is to be a steward in the environment
• Studying how to live their lives in a more sustainable manner
UNIT- I
MULTIDISCIPLINARY NATURE OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES:
Definition, Scope and Importance – Need for Public Awareness.
NATURAL RESOURCES : Renewable and non-renewable resources – Natural resources and

associated problems – Forest resources – Use and over – exploitation, deforestation, case studies –
Timber extraction – Mining, dams and other effects on forest and tribal people – Water resources –
Use and over utilization of surface and ground water – Floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams –
benefits and problems - Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting
and using mineral resources, case studies. - Food resources: World food problems, changes caused
by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water
logging, salinity, case studies. - Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non-
renewable energy sources use of alternate energy sources. Case studies. Land resources: Land as a
resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification. Role of an
individual in conservation of natural resources. Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles.
UNIT - II
ECOSYSTEMS : Concept of an ecosystem. - Structure and function of an ecosystem. - Producers,
consumers and decomposers. - Energy flow in the ecosystem - Ecological succession. - Food chains,
food webs and ecological pyramids. - Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and
function of the following ecosystem:
a. Forest ecosystem
b. Grassland ecosystem
c. Desert ecosystem
d. Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries)
UNIT - III
BIODIVERSITY AND ITS CONSERVATION : Introduction - Definition: genetic, species
andecosystem diversity. - Bio-geographical classification of India - Value of biodiversity: consumptive
use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values - . Biodiversity at global, National and
local levels. - . India as a mega-diversity nation - Hot-sports of biodiversity - Threats to biodiversity:
habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts. - Endangered and endemic species of India –
Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.
UNIT - IV
ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION: Definition, Cause, effects and control measures of:
a. Air pollution
b. Water pollution
c. Soil pollution
d. Marine pollution
36
e. Noise pollution
f. Thermal pollution
g. Nuclear hazards
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and
industrial wastes. - Role of an individual in prevention of pollution. - Pollution case
studies. - Disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides.
UNIT - V
SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT : From Unsustainable to Sustainable development -
Urban problems related to energy -Water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed
management -Resettlement and rehabilitation of people; its
problems and concerns. Case Studies -Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions. -Climate
change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust. Case
Studies. -Wasteland reclamation. –Consumerism and waste products. -Environment Protection Act. -
Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act. -Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act -Wildlife
Protection Act -Forest Conservation Act -Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation.
-Public awareness.
HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT: Population growth, variation among nations.
Population explosion - Family Welfare Programme. -Environment and human health. -Human Rights.
-Value Education. -HIV/AIDS. -Women and Child Welfare. -Role of information Technology in
Environment and human health. –Case Studies.
FIELD WORK : Visit to a local area to document environmental assets River /forest
grassland/hill/mountain -Visit to a local polluted site-Urban/Rural/industrial/ Agricultural Study of
common plants, insects, birds. -Study of simple cosystemspond,
river, hill slopes, etc.
TEXT BOOK:
1 Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses by Erach Bharucha for University
Grants Commission.,UniversitiesPress
2 Environmental Studies by R. Rajagopalan, Oxford University Press.
REFERENCE:
1. Textbook of Environmental Sciences and Technology by M. Anji Reddy, BS Publication.
37

0 0 3 2
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING AND DATA STRUCTURES LAB
Week 1:
1. Write a C program to find the sum of individual digits of a positive integer.
2. Fibonacci sequence is defined as follows: the first and second terms in the sequence are 0 and 1.
Subsequent terms are found by adding the preceding two terms in the sequence. Write a C program
to generate the first n terms of the sequence.
3. Write a C program to generate all the prime numbers between 1 and n, where n is a value supplied
by the user.
4. Write a C program to find the roots of a quadratic equation.
Week 2:
5. Write a C program to find the factorial of a given integer.
6. Write a C program to find the GCD (greatest common divisor) of two given integers.
7. Write a C program to solve Towers of Hanoi problem.
8. Write a C program, which takes two integer operands and one operator from the user, performs the
operation and then prints the result. (Consider the operators +,-,*, /, % and use Switch Statement)
Week 3:
9. Write a C program to find both the largest and smallest number in a list of integers.
10. Write a C program that uses functions to perform the following:
i) Addition of Two Matrices
ii) Multiplication of Two Matrices
Week 4:
11.Write a C program that uses functions to perform the following operations:
i) To insert a sub-string in to a given main string from a given position.
ii) To delete n Characters from a given position in a given string.
12. Write a C program to determine if the given string is a palindrome or not
13. Write a C program that displays the position or index in the string S where the string T begins, or –
1 if S doesn’t contain T.
14. Write a C program to count the lines, words and characters in a given text.
Week 5:
15. Write a C program to generate Pascal’s triangle.
16. Write a C program to construct a pyramid of numbers.
17. Write a C program to read in two numbers, x and n, and then compute the sum of this geometric
progression:
1+x+x2+x3+………….+xn
For example: if n is 3 and x is 5, then the program computes 1+5+25+125.
Print x, n, the sum
Perform error checking. For example, the formula does not make sense for negative exponents – if n
is less than 0. Have your program print an error message if n<0, then go back and read in the next
pair of numbers of without computing the sum. Are any values of x also illegal ? If so, test for them
too.
Week 6:
18. 2’s complement of a number is obtained by scanning it from right to left and complementing all the
bits after the first appearance of a 1. Thus 2’s complement of 11100 is 00100. Write a C program to
find the 2’s complement of a binary number.
19.Write a C program to convert a Roman numeral to its decimal equivalent.
Week 7:
20. Write a C program that uses functions to perform the following operations:
38
i) Reading a complex number

ii) Writing a complex number
iii) Addition of two complex numbers
iv) Multiplication of two complex numbers
(Note: represent complex number using a structure.)
Week 8:
21. i) Write a C program which copies one file to another.
ii) Write a C program to reverse the first n characters in a file.
(Note: The file name and n are specified on the command line.)
22. i) Write a C program to display the contents of a file.
ii) Write a C program to merge two files into a third file (i.e., the contents of the first file followed
by those of the second are put in the third file)
Week 9:
23. Write a C program that uses functions to perform the following operations on singly linked list.:
i) Creation ii) Insertion iii) Deletion iv) Traversal
Week 10:
24. Write C programs that implement stack (its operations) using
i) Arrays ii) Pointers
25. Write C programs that implement Queue (its operations) using
i) Arrays ii) Pointers
Week 11:
26. Write a C program that implements the following sorting methods to sort a given list of integers in
ascending order
i) Bubble sort ii) Selection sort
Week 12:
27. Write C programs that use both recursive and non recursive functions to perform the following
searching operations for a Key value in a given list of integers:
i) Linear search ii) Binary search
39

0 0 3 2
ENGLISH LANGUAGE COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB
The Language Lab focuses on the production and practice of sounds of language and familiarises
the students with the use of English in everyday situations and contexts.
Objectives
• To facilitate computer-aided multi-media instruction enabling individualized and independent
language learning
• To sensitise the students to the nuances of English speech sounds, word accent, intonation
and rhythm
• To bring about a consistent accent and intelligibility in their pronunciation of English by
providing an opportunity for practice in speaking
• To improve the fluency in spoken English and neutralize mother tongue influence
• To train students to use language appropriately for interviews, group discussion and public
speaking
Learning Outcomes
• Better Understanding of nuances of language through audio- visual experience and group
activities
• Neutralization of accent for intelligibility
• Speaking with clarity and confidence thereby enhancing employability skills of the students
SYLLABUS
English Language Communication Skills Lab shall have two parts:

a. Computer Assisted Language Learning (CALL) Lab
b. Interactive Communication Skills (ICS) Lab
The following course content is prescribed for the English Language Communication Skills Lab
Exercise – I
CALL Lab: Introduction to Phonetics – Speech Sounds – Vowels and Consonants
ICS Lab: Ice-Breaking activity and JAM session
Articles, Prepositions, Word formation- Prefixes & Suffixes, Synonyms & Antonyms
Exercise – II
CALL Lab: Structure of Syllables - Past Tense Marker and Plural Marker – Weak Forms and Strong
Forms - Consonant Clusters.
ICS Lab: Situational Dialogues – Role-Play- Expressions in Various Situations – Self-introduction and
Introducing Others – Greetings – Apologies – Requests – Social and Professional Etiquette -
Telephone Etiquette.
Concord (Subject in agreement with verb) and Words often misspelt- confused/misused
Exercise - III
CALL Lab: Minimal Pairs- Word accent and Stress Shifts- Listening Comprehension.
ICS Lab: Descriptions- Narrations- Giving Directions and guidelines.
Sequence of Tenses, Question Tags and One word substitutes.
Exercise – IV
CALL Lab: Intonation and Common errors in Pronunciation.
ICS Lab: Extempore- Public Speaking
Active and Passive Voice, –Common Errors in English, Idioms and Phrases
40
Exercise – V
CALL Lab: Neutralization of Mother Tongue Influence and Conversation Practice
ICS Lab: Information Transfer- Oral Presentation Skills
Reading Comprehension and Job Application with Resume preparation.
Minimum Requirement of infrastructural facilities for ELCS Lab:
1. Computer Assisted Language Learning (CALL) Lab:

The Computer aided Language Lab for 40 students with 40 systems, one master console, LAN
facility and English language software for self- study by learners.
System Requirement (Hardware component):

Computer network with Lan with minimum 60 multimedia systems with the following specifications:
i) P – IV Processor
a) Speed – 2.8 GHZ
b) RAM – 512 MB Minimum
c) Hard Disk – 80 GB
ii) Headphones of High quality
2. Interactive Communication Skills (ICS) Lab :

The Interactive Communication Skills Lab: A Spacious room with movable chairs and audio-visual
aids with a Public Address System, a T. V., a digital stereo –audio & video system and camcorder etc.
Suggested Software:
• Cambridge Advanced Learners’ English Dictionary with CD.

• Grammar Made Easy by Darling Kindersley
• Punctuation Made Easy by Darling Kindersley
• Clarity Pronunciation Power – Part I
• Clarity Pronunciation Power – part II
th
• Oxford Advanced Learner’s Compass, 8 Edition
• DELTA’s key to the Next Generation TOEFL Test: Advanced Skill Practice.
• Lingua TOEFL CBT Insider, by Dreamtech
• TOEFL & GRE (KAPLAN, AARCO & BARRONS, USA, Cracking GRE by CLIFFS)
• English in Mind (Series 1-4), Herbert Puchta and Jeff Stranks with Meredith Levy,
Cambridge
• English Pronunciation in Use (Elementary, Intermediate, Advanced) Cambridge University
Press
• Raman, M & Sharma, S. 2011. Technical Communication, OUP
• Sanjay Kumar & Pushp Lata. 2011. Communication Skills, OUP
SUGGESTED READING:
1. Rama Krishna Rao, A. et al. English Language Communication Skills – A Reader cum Lab
Manual Course Content and Practice. Chennai: Anuradha Publishers
2. Suresh Kumar, E. & Sreehari, P. 2009. A Handbook for English Language Laboratories. New
Delhi: Foundation
nd
3. Speaking English Effectively 2 Edition by Krishna Mohan and N. P. Singh, 2011. Macmillan
Publishers India Ltd. Delhi.
4. Sasi Kumar, V & Dhamija, P.V. How to Prepare for Group Discussion and Interviews. Tata
McGraw Hill
5. Spoken English: A Manual of Speech and Phonetics by R. K. Bansal & J. B. Harrison. 2013.
Orient Blackswan. Hyderabad.
6. English Pronunciation in Use. (Elementary, Intermediate & Advance). Cambridge: CUP
nd
7. Chris Redston, Gillie Cunningham, Jan Bell. Face to Face (2 Edition). Cambridge University
Press
8. Nambiar, K.C. 2011. Speaking Accurately. A Course in International Communication. New Delhi :
Foundation
41
9. Soundararaj, Francis. 2012. Basics of Communication in English. New Delhi: Macmillan

10. A textbook of English Phonetics for Indian Students by T. Balasubramanian (Macmillan)
DISTRIBUTION AND WEIGHTAGE OF MARKS
English Language Laboratory Practical Examination:

1. The practical examinations for the English Language Laboratory shall be conducted as per the
University norms prescribed for the core engineering practical sessions.
2. For the Language lab sessions, there shall be a continuous evaluation during the year for 30
sessional marks and 70 semester-end Examination marks. Of the 30 marks, 20 marks shall be
awarded for day-to-day work and 10 marks to be awarded by conducting Internal Lab Test(s). The
year- end Examination shall be conducted by the teacher concerned with the help of another
member of the staff of the same department of the same institution.
*****
42

0 0 3 2
ENGINEERING WORKSHOP
Pre-requisites: Practical skill
Objectives:
• To Study of different hand operated power tools, uses and their demonstration.
• To gain a good basic working knowledge required for the production of various engineering
products.
• To provide hands on experience about use of different engineering materials, tools, equipments
and processes those are common in the engineering field.
• To develop a right attitude, team working, precision and safety at work place.
• It explains the construction, function, use and application of different working tools, equipment
and machines.
• To study commonly used carpentry joints.
• To have practical exposure to various welding and joining processes.
• Identify and use marking out tools, hand tools, measuring equipment and to work to prescribed
tolerances.
• To understanding the computer hardware and practice the Assembly of computer parts.
• To practice the process of Installation of operating system windows.
Outcomes:

• Better understanding the process of assembly of computer parts and installation of different
software’s.
• Study and practice on machine tools and their operations
• Practice on manufacturing of components using workshop trades including pluming, fitting,
carpentry, foundry, house wiring and welding.
• Identify and apply suitable tools for different trades of Engineering processes including drilling,
material removing, measuring, chiseling.
• Apply basic electrical engineering knowledge for house wiring practice.
I. TRADES FOR EXERCISES :
(Any six trades from the following with minimum of two exercises in each trade)
1. Carpentry
2. Fitting
3. Tin-Smithy
4. Black Smithy
5. House-wiring
6. Foundry
7. Plumbing
II. Trades for Demonstration & Exposure

1. Demonstration of power tools & wiring
2. Welding
3. Machine Shop
III. IT Workshop I: Computer hardware, identification of parts, Disassembly, Assembly of

computer to working condition, simple diagnostic exercises.
IT Workshop II: Installation of operating system windows and linux simple diagnostic
exercises.
43
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. /MBA) I Year II-Sem L T P C

3 1 0 3
MATHEMATICS – II
Pre Requisites: NIL
Course Objectives:
• Our emphasis will be more on conceptual understanding and application of Fourier series,
Fourier, Z and Laplace transforms and solution of partial differential equations.
Course Outcomes:
• gains the knowledge to tackle the engineering problems using the concepts of Fourier series,
various transforms and partial differential equations.
UNIT–I: Linear ODE with variable coefficients and series solutions (8 lectures)
Equations reducible to constant coefficients-Cauchy’s and Legendre’s differential equations.
Motivation for series solutions, Ordinary point and Regular singular point of a differential equation,
Transformation of non-zero singular point to zero singular point. Series solutions to differential
equations around zero, Frobenius Method about zero.
Unit-II: Special Functions (8 lectures)

Bessel’s Differential equation, Bessel functions properties: – Recurrence relations, Orthogonality,
Generating function, Trigonometric expansions involving Bessel functions.
UNIT–III: Laplace Transform (8 lectures)

Definition of Integral transform. Domain of the function and Kernel for the Laplace transforms, Laplace
transform of standard functions, first shifting Theorem, Laplace transform of functions when they are
multiplied or divided by “t”. Laplace transforms of derivatives and integrals of functions. – Unit step
function – second shifting theorem – Dirac’s delta function, Periodic function – Inverse Laplace
transform by Partial fractions( Heaviside method) Inverse Laplace transforms of functions when they
are multiplied or divided by ”s”, Inverse Laplace Transforms of derivatives and integrals of functions,
Convolution theorem-solving differential equations by Laplace transforms
UNIT – IV: Fourier series and Fourier Transforms (8 lectures)

Definition of periodic function. Fourier expansion of periodic functions in a given interval of length, 2π ,
Determination of Fourier coefficients – Fourier series of even and odd functions – Fourier series in an
arbitrary interval – even and odd periodic continuation – Half-range Fourier sine and cosine
expansions.
Fourier integral theorem – Fourier sine and cosine integrals. Fourier transforms – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – properties – inverse transforms – Finite Fourier transforms.
UNIT-V: Partial Differential Equations (10 lectures)

Introduction and Formation of partial differential equation by elimination of arbitrary constants and
arbitrary functions, solutions of first order linear (Lagrange) equation and non-linear equations
(Charpit’s method).
Method of separation of variables for second order equations. Applications of Partial differential
equations- one dimensional wave equation., Heat equation.
Text books:
1) HIGHER ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS BY B S GREWAL, KHANNA PUBLICATIONS.
2) ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS BY ERWIN KREYSZIG, WIELY PUBLICATIONS
References:
1) ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS BY SRIMANTAPAL & SUBODH C. BHUNIA, OXFORD
UNIVERSITY PRESS.
2) ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS BY PETER V O’NEIL, CENGAGE LEARNING
44

4 0 0 4
BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
Pre-requisite: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To introduce the concept of electrical circuits and its components.
• To introduce the characteristics of various electronic devices.
• To impart the knowledge of various configurations, characteristics and applications of electrical &
electronic components.
Course Outcomes:
• To analyze and solve electrical circuits using network laws and theorems.
• To design & analyse various circuits using electronic components viz. diodes, transistors & other
special purpose devices.
UNIT- I ELECTRICAL and SINGLE PHASE AC CIRCUITS

Electrical Circuits: R-L-C Parameters, Voltage and Current, Independent and Dependent Sources,
Source Transformation – V-I relationship for passive elements, Kirchoff’s Laws, Network reduction
techniques – series, parallel, series-parallel, star-to-delta, delta-to-star transformation, Nodal Analysis,
Single Phase AC Circuits: R.M.S. and Average values, Form Factor, steady state analysis of series,
parallel and series-parallel combinations of R, L and C with sinusoidal excitation, concept of
reactance, impedance, susceptance and admittance – phase and phase difference, Concept of power
factor, j-notation, complex and polar forms of representation.
UNIT- II RESONANCE and NETWORK THEOREMS

Resonance: Series resonance and Parallel resonance circuits, concept of bandwidth and Q factor,
Locus Diagrams for RL, RC and RLC Combinations for Various Parameters.
Network Theorems: Thevenin’s, Norton’s, Maximum Power Transfer, Superposition, Reciprocity,
Tellegen’s, Millman’s and Compensation theorems for DC and AC excitations.
UNIT- III P-N JUNCTION DIODE & DIODE CIRCUITS

P-N Junction Diode: Diode equation, Energy Band diagram, Volt-Ampere characteristics,
Temperature dependence, Ideal versus practical, Static and dynamic resistances, Equivalent circuit,
Load line analysis, Diffusion and Transition Capacitances.
Rectifiers and Filters: P-N junction as a rectifier - Half Wave Rectifier, Ripple Factor - Full Wave
Rectifier, Bridge Rectifier, Harmonic components in Rectifier Circuits, Filters – Inductor Filters,
Capacitor Filters, L- section Filters, π- section Filters.
UNIT- IV BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR

Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT): Construction, Principle of Operation, Symbol, Amplifying Action,
Common Emitter, Common Base and Common Collector configurations.
Transistor Biasing And Stabilization - Operating point, DC & AC load lines, Biasing - Fixed Bias,
Emitter Feedback Bias, Collector to Emitter feedback bias, Voltage divider bias, Bias stability,
Stabilization against variations in VBE and β, Bias Compensation using Diodes and Transistors.
Transistor Configurations: BJT modeling, Hybrid model, Determination of h-parameters from
transistor characteristics, Analysis of CE, CB and CC configurations using h-parameters, Comparison
of CE, CB and CC configurations.
UNIT- V JUNCTION FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR & SPECIAL PURPOSE DEVICES

Junction Field Effect Transistor: Construction, Principle of Operation, Symbol, Pinch-Off Voltage,
Volt-Ampere Characteristic, Comparison of BJT and FET, Small Signal Model, Biasing FET.
45
Special Purpose Devices: Breakdown Mechanisms in Semi-Conductor Diodes, Zener diode

characteristics, Use of Zener diode as simple regulator, Principle of operation and Characteristics of
Tunnel Diode (With help of Energy band diagram) and Varactor Diode, Principle of Operation of SCR.
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. Electronic Devices and Circuits – R.L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, PEI/PHI, 9 Ed, 2006.
2. Millman’s Electronic Devices and Circuits – J.Millman and C.C.Halkias, Satyabratajit, TMH, 2/e,
1998.
3. Engineering circuit analysis- by William Hayt and Jack E. Kemmerly, Mc Graw Hill Company, 6th
edition.
REFERENCES:
1. Introduction to Electronic Devices and Circuits-Rober T. Paynter,
Pearson Education.
nd
2. Electronic Devices and Circuits - K. Lal Kishore, B.S. Publications, 2 Edition, 2005.
3. Electronic Devices and Circuits – Anil K. Maini, Varsha Agarwal –
4. Wiley India Pvt. Ltd. 1/e 2009.
nd
5. Linear circuit analysis (time domain phasor and Laplace transform approaches)- 2 edition by
Raymond A. DeCarlo and Pen-Min-Lin, Oxford University Press-2004.
6. Network Theory by N.C.Jagan & C.Lakshminarayana, B.S. Publications.
7. Network Theory by Sudhakar, Shyam Mohan Palli, TMH.
nd
8. Electronic Devices and Circuits – 2 Edition by Muhammad H.Rashid, Cengage Learning.
46

3 1 0 3
APPLIED PHYSICS
Prerequisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
The course primarily aims at understanding the behavior of matter in the condensed state and tries to
explore the causes with reference to micro level mechanism of the solid matter. The objective of the
first chapter is to study the micro level behavior of the quantum particles of the matter and their nature
as wave and particle and hence to estimate the statistics of the phenomenon arising out of their
nature of existence. The second chapter aims at to assess the draw backs of the free electron theory
leading to the introduction of the Band Theory of Solids. In the third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh and
tenth chapters the different natures of the solid matter are taken as the main task discuss. In the
eighth chapter, it is expected to understand the basic principles behind the coherent artificial light
source (LASER) with reference to their construction, mechanism, operation and classification etc. The
nineth chapter is explicitly aimed at to study an advanced communication system presently ruling the
world throughout i.e. Fiber Optic communication system.
Course Outcomes:
The understanding of properties of matter is an essential part to utilize them in various applications in
different walks of life. In most of the cases, the behavior of matter as solid material body purely
depends upon the internal micro level nature, structure and characters. By studying first few chapters
the students as graduates can acquire the knowledge of the connection between the micro level
behavior of the matter as fundamental particles and the macro level real time characters of the
material bodies. The quantum mechanism in phenomena can best be understood and analyzed by
estimating the statistics of the phenomena. The study of chapters on Laser and fiber optics forms
basis for understanding an advanced communication system. Other chapters establish a strong
foundation on the different kinds of characters of several materials and pave a way for them to use in
at various technical and engineering applications.
UNIT-I
1.Principles of Quantum & Statistical Mechanics: Waves and Particles, De Broglie Hypothesis,
Matter Waves, Davisson and Germer’s Experiment, G.P. Thomson Experiment, Heisenberg’s
Uncertainty principle, Schrodinger’s Time -Independent Wave Equation, Physical Significance of the
Wave Function, Particle in One Dimensional Potential Box. Maxwell-Boltzmann, Bose-Einstein and
Fermi-Dirac statistics (Qualitative).
2. Electron theory of Metals: Introduction, Classical Free Electron Theory of metals, Root Mean
Square (RMS )velocity, Mean Free Path, Mean collision Time, Drift Velocity, Relaxation Time,
Electrical Resistivity, Draw backs of Classical Free Electron Theory, Density of States, Calculation of
Fermi energy, Quantum Free Electron Theory, Electron in a periodic Potential, Kronig-Penny Model
(Qualitative Treatment), Origin of Energy Band Formation in Solids, Classification of Materials into
Conductors, Semiconductors and insulators, Concept of Effective Mass of an Electron.
UNIT-II
3. Semiconductor Physics: Position of Fermi Level, Estimation of Carrier concentration in Intrinsic
and Extrinsic (p-type & n-type) Semiconductors, Equation of Continuity, Direct and Indirect Band gap
Semiconductors, Hall Effect.
4. Physics of Semiconductor Devices: Formation of PN Junction, Energy band Diagram and I-V
Characteristics of PN Junction Diode, Diode Equation, LED, LCD and Photo Diodes, Solar Cells.
UNIT-III
5. Dielectric Properties: Basic definitions, Electronic, Ionic (Quantitative) and Orientation
Polarizations(Qualitative) and Calculation of Polarizabilities - Internal Fields in Solids, Clausius -
Mossotti Equation, Piezo-electricity, Pyro- electricity and Ferro - electricity.
47
6. Magnetic Properties: Basic definitions , Origin of Magnetic Moment, Bohr Magneton,

Classification of Dia, Para and Ferro Magnetic Materials on the basis of Magnetic Moment, Domain
Theory of Ferro magnetism on the basis of Hysteresis Curve , Soft and Hard Magnetic Materials,
Properties of Anti – Ferro and Ferri Magnetic Materials.
7. Superconductivity: Introduction to Superconductivity, Properties of Superconductors, Meissner
Effect, BCS theory, Type-I and Type –II Superconductors, Magnetic Levitation and Applications of
Superconductors.
UNIT-IV
8. Lasers: Characteristics of Lasers, Spontaneous and stimulated Emission of Radiation, Meta-
Stable state, Population Inversion, Lasing Action, Einstein’s Coefficients and Relation between them,
Ruby Laser, Helium- Neon Laser, Semiconductor Diode Laser and Applications of Lasers.
9. Fiber Optics: Principle & construction (structure) of an Optical Fiber, Acceptance Angle, Numerical
Aperture, Types of Optical Fibers, Losses in Optical Fibers and Applications of Optical Fibers in
communication.
UNIT-V
10. Nanotechnology: Origin of Nanotechnology, Nano Scale, Surface to Volume Ratio, Quantum
Confinement, Bottom-up Fabrication: Sol-Gel, Precipitation, Combustion Methods; Top-Down
Fabrication: Chemical Vapor Deposition, Physical Vapor Deposition, Characterization
Techniques(XRD, SEM &TEM) and Applications of Nanotechnology.
Text books:
1. Principles of Physics by Halliday, Resnick, Walker, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 9th Edition.
2. Introduction to Solid State Physics by Charles Kittel, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 7th Edition
3. Engineering Physics by R.K.GAUR & S.L.GUPTA, Dhanpat Rai Publications.
4. Solid State Physics by A J Dekker, MACMILLAN INDIA LTD.
References:
1. Modern Engineering Physics by Dr.K.Vijaya Kumar, Dr. S. Chandralingam, S.CHAND &
COMPANY LTD
2. Applied Physics by P.K.Mittal, I K International Publishers
3. Applied Physics by P.K. Palanisamy :Scitech publishers
4. Introduction to Nanotechnology by Charles P.Poole, Jr.Frank J ownes, John Wiley & sons
5. Applied Physics for Engineers by P. Madusudana Rao, Academic Publishing Company
6. Engineering Physics by Sanjay D Jain, Girish G Sahasrbudha: University Press.
48

3 1 0 3
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
Prerequisites: Nil
Course objectives:
• To inculcate the basic concepts of Chemistry required to make the student to develop the
innovative materials for the development of technological arena.
• The latest techniques and skills for the treatment of raw water, facing the endanger of
corrosion of structures and producing the polymers in varied applications.
Course Outcomes:
• Gain knowledge of various skills to control the corrosion of huge structures. The analysis of
raw water and its treatment to provide soft water. The technologies to result polymers with
multiple applications are understood. The principles of electrochemistry and batteries are
clearly understood by the students.
Unit-I: Water and its treatment

Introduction – hardness of water – causes of hardness – types of hardness : temporary and
permanent – expression and units of hardness – Estimation of hardness of water by complexometric
method. Potable water and its specifications. Steps involved in treatment of potable water -
Disinfection of potable water by chlorination and Ozonization. Boiler feed water and its treatment –
Calgon conditioning – Phosphate conditioning - Colloidal conditioning – External treatment of water –
ion-exchange processes. Desalination of water – Reverse osmosis. Numerical problems – Sewage
water - COD, BOD definitions and their significance. Treatment of sewage- Steps involved ( Primary,
secondary & tertiary treatments).
Unit-II: Electrochemistry and corrosion

Electrochemistry: Conductance - Specific, equivalent and molar conductance and their
interrelationship . Ionic mobilities – Relationship between ionic conductance and ionic mobilities.
Electro Chemical cells - electrode potential, standard electrode potential, types of electrodes –
Standard hydrogen electrode, calomel and glass electrode. Nernst equation - electrochemical series
and its applications.– Concept of concentration cell –Numerical problems.
Corrosion- Causes and effects of corrosion – theories of chemical and electrochemical corrosion -
mechanism of electrochemical corrosion. Types of corrosion : Galvanic, water-line and pitting
corrosion. Factors affecting rate of corrosion. Corrosion control methods – Cathodic protection -
sacrificial anode and impressed current cathodic methods. Surface coatings – metallic coatings –
methods of application of metallic coatings – Hot dipping , cementation, electroplating of copper,
electro less plating of Nickel - Organic coatings: Paints – their constituents and functions.
Unit-III: High Polymers

Definition – Classification of polymers with examples – Types of polymerisation – Chain growth (free
radical addition mechanism), step growth polymerization, Plastics, fibres and elastomers - definition
and characteristics. Plastics – thermoplastic and thermosetting plastics, compounding of plastics.
Fibre reinforced plastics. Preparation, properties and Engineering applications of PVC, Teflon,
Bakelite, Nylon 6:6 and terylene (Dacron); Rubber – Natural rubber , its processing and vulcanization.
Elastomers: Preparation, properties and applications of Styrene butadiene, butyl and thiokol rubbers.
Conducting polymers – Classification with examples; mechanism of conduction in trans-polyacetylene
and applications of conducting polymers. Biodegradable polymers – concept and advantages -
Polylactic acid and its applications.
Unit-IV: Chemistry of Energy sources

Fuels :Classification of fuels - characteristics of a good fuel . Solid fuels: Coal – Analysis of coal by
proximate and ultimate methods. Liquid fuels- Petroleum and its refining. Characteristics and uses of
49
petrol, diesel and kerosene. Synthetic petrol- Fischer-Tropsch’s process. Cracking – thermal cracking
and catalytic cracking. Fluid bed catalytic cracking, Knocking - octane and cetane numbers.
Gaseous fuels – Composition, properties and uses of Natural gas, LPG and CNG .
Combustion – Definition, calorific value, HCV and LCV. Calculation of air quantity required for
combustion of a fuel - Numerical problems.
Alternate Energy sources :Biodiesel - trans-esterification - advantages of biodiesel, fuel cells (H2-O2
and Methanol –O2 fuel cell).
Unit-V : Batteries and Materials

Batteries : Cell and battery - Primary battery (dry cell, alkaline cell and Lithium cell). Secondary
battery ( lead acid, Ni-Cd and lithium ion cell)
Liquid crystal polymers : classification, characteristics and applications.
Insulators- Characteristics and applications of thermal and electrical insulators.
Nanomaterials : Introduction. Preparation of nanomaterials by top down and bottom up approaches.
Carbon nano fibres, and fullerenes - Applications of nanomaterials.
Text Books:
1. Engineering Chemistry by P.C.Jain & M.Jain; Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P) Ltd., New
th
Delhi, (15 Edition, 2005).
2. Engineering Chemistry by B.Rama Devi & Ch.Venkata Ramana Reddy ; Cengage Learning,
2012.
Reference Books:
1. A Text Book of Engineering Chemistry by Shashi Chawla, Dhanpat Rai & Co., New Delhi.(3rd
Edition, 2003).
2. Engineering Chemistry by Y. Bharathi Kumari and C. Jyotsna, VGS Booklinks, 2012.
3. Text book of Engineering Chemistry by C P Murthy, C V Agarwal and A. Naidu; B.S.Publications,
2006.
4. Engineering Chemistry by M. Thirumala Chary and E. Lakshminarayana, Sci tech. Publications
Pvt. Ltd., Chennai 2012.
5. Engineering Chemistry by B.Sivasankar, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi
2008.
th
6. A Text Book of Engineering Chemistry by S.S. Dara, S.Chand Publications, (10 Edition ,2007).
50

3 1 0 3
ENGINEEERING MECHANICS
Prerequisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
During this course, students should develop the ability to:
• Work comfortably with basic engineering mechanics concepts required for analyzing static
structures
• Identify an appropriate structural system to studying a given problem and isolate it from its
environment.
• Model the problem using good free-body diagrams and accurate equilibrium equations
• Identify and model various types of loading and support conditions that act on structural systems.
• Apply pertinate mathematical, physical and engineering mechanical principles to the system to
solve and analyze the problem.
• Understand the meaning of centers of gravity (mass)/centroids and moments of Inertia using
integration methods.
• Communicate the solution to all problems in an organized and coherent manner and elucidate the
meaning of the solution in the context of the problem.
Course Outcomes:
• solve problems dealing with forces in a plane or in space and equivalent force Systems.
• solve beam and cable problems and understand distributed force systems.
• solve friction problems and determine moments of Inertia and centroid using intergration methods.
• understand and know how to solve three-dimension force and moment problems.
• understand and know how to use vector terminology.
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION OF ENGINEERING. MECHANICS – Basic concepts System of Forces- Coplanar
Forces – Components in Space – Resultant- Moment of Forces and its Application – Couples and
Resultant of Force System - Equilibrium of System of Forces- Free body diagrams-Direction of Force
Equations of Equilibrium of Coplanar Systems and Spatial Systems – Vector cross product- Support
reactions different beams for different types of loading – concentrated, uniformly distributed and
uniformly varying loading .
UNIT – II
FRICTION: Types of friction – Limiting friction – Laws of Friction – static and Dynamic Frictions –
Angle of Friction –Cone of limiting friction– Friction of wedge, block and Ladder – Screw jack –
Differential screw jack - Motion of Bodies.
UNIT – III
CENTROID AND CENTER OF GRAVITY: Centrods – Theorem of Pappus- Centroids of Composite
figures – Centre of Gravity of Bodies - Area moment of Inertia: – polar Moment of Inertia – Transfer –
Theorems - Moments of Inertia of Composite Figures.
MOMENT OF INERTIA: Moment of Inertia of Areas and Masses - Transfer Formula for Moments of
Inertia - Moment of inertia of composite areas and masses.
UNIT – IV
KINEMATICS: Introduction – Rectilinear motion – Motion with uniform and variable acceleration –
Curvilinear motion – Components of motion – Circular motion – Projectiles- Instantaneous centre.
51
UNIT – V
KINETICS: Kinetics of a particle – D’Alembert’s principle – Motion in a curved path – work, energy
and power. Principle of conservation of energy – Kinetics of a rigid body in translation, rotation – work
done – Principle of work-energy – Impulse-momentum.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Engineering Mechanics by shames & Rao - Pearson Education.
2. Engineering Mechanics by M.V. Seshagiri rao and Durgaih; University Press.
3. Engineering Mechanics – B. Bhattacharya - Oxford University Publications.
REFERENCES:
1. Engineering Mechanics (Statics and Dynamics) by Hibbler; Pearson Education.
2. Engineering Mechanics by Fedrinand L. Singer – Harper Collings Publishers.
3. Engineering Mechanics by A. K. Tayal, Umesh Publication.
4. Engineering Mechanics – G. S. Sawhney, Printice Hall of India.
5. A text book of engineering mechanics by R. K. Bansal; Laxmi publications.
6. Engineering Mechanics by R. S. Khurmi ; S. Chand & Co.
52

2 0 0 2
COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS
Pre Requisites: NIL
Course Objectives:
• This course aims at providing the student with the concepts of matrices, numerical techniques
and curve fitting.
Course Outcomes:
• analyze engineering problems using the concepts of Matrices and Numerical Methods.
UNIT-I: Matrices and Linear Transformations (8 lectures)

Real matrices – Symmetric, skew – symmetric, orthogonal. Complex matrices: Hermitian, Skew-
Hermitian and Unitary Matrices. Idempotent matrix, Finding rank of a matrix by reducing to Echelon
and Normal forms. Consistency of system of linear equations (homogeneous and non- homogeneous)
using the rank of a matrix.
Cayley-Hamilton Theorem (without Proof) – Verification. Finding inverse of a matrix and powers of a
matrix by Cayley-Hamilton theorem, Linear dependence and Independence of Vectors. Linear
Transformation – Orthogonal Transformation. Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a matrix. Properties
of Eigen values and Eigen vectors of matrices. Diagonolization of matrix – Quadratic forms upto three
variables- Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form, Rank – Positive definite, negative definite –
semi definite – index – signature of quadratic form.
UNIT–II: Interpolation and Curve fitting (5 lectures)

Interpolation: Introduction- Errors in Polynomial Interpolation – Finite differences- Forward
Differences- Backward differences –Central differences – Symbolic relations and separation of
symbols- Difference Equations – Differences of a polynomial-Newton’s formulae for interpolation –
Interpolation with unevenly spaced points-Lagrange’s Interpolation formula. Curve fitting: Fitting a
straight line –Second degree curve-exponential curve-power curve by method of least squares.
UNIT–III: Numerical techniques (5 lectures)

Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations and Linear system of equations.
Introduction – Graphical interpretation of solution of equations .The Bisection Method – The Method
of False Position – The Iteration Method – Newton-Raphson Method .
Solving system of non-homogeneous equations by L-U Decomposition method(Crout’s
Method)Jacobi’s and Gauss-Seidel Iteration method
UNIT- IV: Numerical Differentiation, Integration: (5 lectures)

Numerical differentiation, Numerical integration – Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3rd and 3/8 Rule ,
Generalized Quadrature.
UNIT – V: Numerical solutions of First order differential equations (5 lectures)

Numerical solution of Ordinary Differential equations: Solution by Taylor’s series method –Picard’s
Method of successive Approximation- single step methods-Euler’s Method-Euler’s modified method,
Runge-Kutta Methods.
Text Books:
1) Introductory Methods Of Numerical Analysis By Ss Sastry
2) Numerical And Statistical Methods With Programming In C By Sujatha Sinha And Subhabrada
Dinda, Scitec Publishers.
3) Numerical Methods, Principles, Analysis And Algorithms By Srimantapal & Subodh C. Bhunia,
Oxford University Press.
53
References:
1) Advanced Engineering Mathematics By Alan Jeffery
2) Applied Numerical Methods Using Matlab By Rao.V.Dukkipati, New Age Publishers
3) Numerical Methods In Science And Engineering –Apractical Approach By S.Rajasekharan,
S.Chand Publications
54

0 0 3 2
BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING LAB
PART A: ELECTRONIC WORKSHOP PRACTICE (in 3 lab sessions):
• Identification, Specifications, Testing of R, L, C Components (Color Codes), Potentiometers,

Switches (SPDT, DPDT, and DIP), Coils, Gang Condensers, Relays, Bread Boards, PCB’s
• Identification, Specifications and Testing of Active Devices, Diodes, BJT’s, Low power
JFET’s, MOSFET’s, Power Transistors, LED’s, LCD’s, SCR, UJT.
Study and operation of

• Multimeters (Analog and Digital)
• Function Generator
• Regulated Power Supplies
• CRO.
PART B: (For Laboratory examination – Minimum of 09 experiments to be conducted)
1. PN Junction diode characteristics A) Forward bias B) Reverse bias.

2. Zener diode characteristics and Zener as voltage Regulator
3. Input & Output characteristics of Transistor in CB / CE configuration
4. Full Wave Rectifier with & without filters
5. Input and Output characteristics of FET in CS configuration
6. Measurement of h-parameters of transistor in CB, CE, CC configurations
7. SCR Characteristics.
8. Verification of KVL and KCL.
9. Serial and Parallel Resonance – Timing, Resonant frequency, Bandwidth and Q-factor
determination for RLC network.
10. Verification of Superposition and Reciprocity theorems.
11. Verification of maximum power transfer theorem. Verification on DC, verification on AC with
Resistive and Reactive loads.
12. Experimental determination of Thevenin’s and Norton’s equivalent circuits and verification by
direct test.
55

0 0 3 2
APPLIED PHYSICS LAB
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Study of characteristics of LED and LASER sources.

2. Magnetic field along the axis of current carrying coil-Stewart and Gee’s method.
3. Study of characteristics of p-i-n diode detectors.
4. Determination of frequency of A.C Mains-Sonometer.
5. Torsional pendulum.
6. Energy gap of material of PN- junction.
7. Bending Losses of Fibers & Evaluation of numerical aperture of given fiber.
8. L-C-R circuit.
9. Time constant of an R-C Circuit.
10. Characteristics of solar cell
56

0 0 3 2
COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS LAB

UNIT- I: Interpolation
Programming Tasks:
A) Write a program to determine y for a given x, if two arrays of x and y of same size are given
(using Newton’s interpolation both forward and backward)
B) Write a program to determine y for a given x, if two arrays of x and y of same size are given.(using
Lagrange ’s interpolation)
C) Write a program to determine y for a given x, if two arrays of x and y of same size are given.(using
Gauss interpolation)
(Selection criteria of the interpolation formula are important.)
UNIT- II: Curve fitting

Programming Tasks:
A) Write a program to find a line of best fit from the given two arrays of x and y of same size.
B) Write a program to find a curve of the form y = Ae Bx from the given two arrays of x and y of same
size.
C) Write a program to find a curve of the form y = Ax B from the given two arrays of x and y of same
size.
D) Write a program to find a curve of the form y = Ax 2 + Bx + C from the given two arrays of x and y
of same size.
UNIT- III: Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations

Programming Tasks:
A) Write a program to find the root of a given equation using bisection method.
(Write this program such that the initial values given to the system are not usable, then the
system should ask us to give new set of initial values).
B) Write a program to find the root of a given equation using method of false position(regula false
position).
C) Write a program to find the root of a given equation using iteration method.
D) Write a program to find the root of a given equation using Newton Rophson method.
UNIT- IV: Linear system of equations

Programming Tasks:
A) Write a program to find the solution of given system of linear equations using L- U decomposition
method.
B) Write a program to find the solution of given system of linear equations using jacobi’s method.
C) Write a program to find the solution of given system of equations using Gauss sidel iteration
method.
D) Write a program to find the solution of given system of equations using Gauss Jordan elimination
method.
UNIT-V:Numerical Differentiation, Integration and Numerical solutions of First order differential

equations
Programming Tasks:
A) Write a program to evaluate definite integral using trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3rd rule and 3/8th
rule.
B) Write a program to solve a given differential equation using Taylor’s series.
C) Write a program to solve a given differential equation Euler’s and modified Eulers method.
D) Write a program to solve a given differential equation using Ruge-Kutta method.
57
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. /MBA) II Year I-Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
MATHEMATICS – III
Pre Requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
• To enable the students to understand the concepts of probability distributions, statistical
Inferences, and testing of hypothesis.
• To enable the students to understand the key concepts of Complex functions and the calculus
of complex functions.
Course Outcomes:
• The student achieves the knowledge to testing the hypothesis and form the probability
distributions to make inferences.
• The students can study some problems of engineering using the concepts of residue
theorem, Laurent series of functions of complex variables.
UNIT-I: Single Random variables and probability distributions.

Random variables – Discrete and continuous. Probability distributions, mass function/ density function
of a probability distribution. Mathematical Expectation, Moment about origin, Central moments
Moment generating function of probability distribution.
Binomial , Poisson & normal distributions and their properties . Moment generating functions of the
above three distributions. and hence finding the mean and variance.
UNIT-II: Multiple Random variables, Correlation & Regression

Joint probability distributions- Joint probability mass / density function, Marginal probability mass /
density functions, Covariance of two random variables, Correlation -Coefficient of correlation, The
rank correlation.
Regression- Regression Coefficient, The lines of regression and multiple correlation & regression.
UNIT-III: Sampling Distributions and Testing of Hypothesis

Sampling: Definitions of population, sampling, statistic, parameter. Types of sampling, Expected
values of Sample mean and varience, sampling distribution, Standard error, Sampling distribution of
means and sampling distribution of varience.
Parameter estimations – likelihood estimate, interval estimations .
Testing of hypothesis: Null hypothesis, Alternate hypothesis, type I, & type II errors – critical region,
confidence interval, Level of significance. One sided test, Two sided test,
Large sample tests:

(i) Test of Equality of means of two samples equality of sample mean and population mean
(cases of known varience & unknown varience, equal and unequal variances)
(ii) Tests of significance of difference between sample S.D and population S.D.
(iii) Tests of significance difference between sample proportion and population proportion &
difference between two sample proportions.
Small sample tests:
Student t-distribution,its properties; Test of significance difference between sample mean and
population mean; difference between means of two small samples
Snedecor’s F- distribution and it’s properties. Test of equality of two population variences
Chi-square distribution , it’s properties, Chi-square test of goodness of fit.
UNIT-IV: Functions of Complex Variables

Complex functions and its representation on Argand plane, Concepts of limit Continuity,
Differentiability, Analyticity, Cauchy-Riemann conditions, Harmonic functions – Milne – Thompson
method.
58
Line integral – Evaluation along a path and by indefinite integration – Cauchy’s integral theorem –
Cauchy’s integral formula – Generalized integral formula.
Radius of convergence – Expansion in Taylor’s series, Maclaurin’s series and Laurent series. Singular
point –Isolated singular point – pole of order m – essential singularity
UNIT – V: Contour Integration

Residue – Evaluation of residue by formula and by Laurent series – Residue theorem.
Evaluation of integrals of the type
∞ c + 2π
(a) Improper real integrals ∫
−∞
f ( x)dx (b) ∫
c
f (cos θ , sin θ )dθ
Conformal mapping.
Transformation of z-plane to w-plane by a function, Conformal transformation. Standard
transformations- Translation; Magnification and rotation; inversion and reflection, Transformations like
e z , log z, z2, and Bilinear transformation. Properties of Bilinear transformation, determination of
bilinear transformation when mappings of 3 points are given .
Text Books:
1) Fundamentals of mathematical statistics by s c gupta and v.k.kapoor
2) Probability and statistics for engineers and scientists by sheldon m.ross,academic press
3) Probability and statistics for engineering and the sciencec by jay l.devore.
4) Higher engineering mathematics by b s grewal.
5) Advanced engineering mathematics by peter v o’neil, cengage learning
th
6) Engineering mathematics by erwin kreyszig,10 edition wiely publications
References:
1) Mathematics for engineers series –probability statistics and stochastic process by k.b.datta and
m.a s.srinivas,cengage publications
2) Probability, statistics and stochastic process by prof.a r k prasad., wiely india
3) Advanced engineering mathematics by sahanaz bathul, phi publication
4) Probability and statistics by t.k.v.iyengar &b.krishna gandhi etel
5) Mathematics for engineers series- advanced mathematics for engineers by k.b.datta and m.a
s.srinivas, cengage publications
6) Advanced engineering mathematics for engineers by prof.a r k prasad., wiely india
59

4 1 0 4
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
Prerequisite: Mathematics – II
Course Objectives:
• This gives the basics of Signals and Systems required for all Electrical Engineering related
courses.
• This gives concepts of Signals and Systems and its analysis using different transform
techniques.
• This gives basic understanding of random process which is essential for random signals and
systems encountered in Communications and Signal Processing areas.
Course Outcomes:
Upon completing his course, the student will be able to
• Represent any arbitrary analog or Digital time domain signal in frequency domain.
• Understand the importance of sampling, sampling theorem and its effects.
• Understand the characteristics of linear time invariant systems.
• Determine the conditions for distortion less transmission through a system.
• Understand the concepts of Random Process and its Characteristics.
• Understand the response of linear time Invariant system for a Random Processes.
UNIT-I: Signal Analysis

Signal Analysis:
Analogy between Vectors and Signals, Orthogonal Signal Space, Signal approximation using
Orthogonal functions, Mean Square Error, Closed or complete set of Orthogonal functions,
Orthogonality in Complex functions, Exponential and Sinusoidal signals, Concepts of Impulse
function, Unit Step function, Signum function.
Fourier Series:
Representation of Fourier series, Continuous time periodic signals, Properties of Fourier Series,
Dirichlet’s conditions, Trigonometric Fourier Series and Exponential Fourier Series, Complex Fourier
spectrum.
UNIT -II: Fourier Transforms and Sampling

Fourier Transforms:
Deriving Fourier Transform from Fourier Series, Fourier Transform of arbitrary signal, Fourier
Transform of standard signals, Fourier Transform of Periodic Signals, Properties of Fourier Transform,
Fourier Transforms involving Impulse function and Signum function.
Sampling:
Sampling theorem – Graphical and analytical proof for Band Limited Signals, Reconstruction of signal
from its samples, Effect of under sampling – Aliasing.
UNIT -III: Laplace Transforms and Z-Transforms

Laplace Transforms:
Review of Laplace Transforms (L.T), Partial fraction expansion, Inverse Laplace Transform, Concept
of Region of Convergence (ROC) for Laplace Transforms, Constraints on ROC for various classes of
signals, Properties of L.T, Relation between L.T and F.T of a signal, Laplace Transform of certain
signals using waveform synthesis.
Z–Transforms:
Fundamental difference between Continuous and Discrete time signals, Discrete time signal
representation using Complex exponential and Sinusoidal components, Periodicity of Discrete time
signal using complex exponential signal, Concept of Z- Transform of a Discrete Sequence, Distinction
between Laplace, Fourier and Z Transforms, Region of Convergence in Z-Transform, Constraints on
ROC for various classes of signals, Inverse Z-transform, Properties of Z-transforms.
60
UNIT -IV: Signal Transmission Through Linear Systems

Linear System, Impulse response, Response of a Linear System, Linear Time Invariant (LTI) System,
Linear Time Variant (LTV) System, Transfer function of a LTI system, Filter characteristics of Linear
Systems, Distortion less transmission through a system, Signal bandwidth, System bandwidth, Ideal
LPF, HPF and BPF characteristics, Causality and Paley-Wiener criterion for physical realization,
Relationship between Bandwidth and Rise time. Concept of convolution in Time domain and
Frequency domain, Graphical representation of Convolution, Convolution property of Fourier
Transforms
UNIT- V : RANDOM PROCESSES – TEMPORAL CHARACTERISTICS: The Random Process

Concept, Classification of Processes, Deterministic and Nondeterministic Processes, Distribution and
Density Functions, concept of Stationarity and Statistical Independence. First-Order Stationary
Processes, Second- Order and Wide-Sense Stationarity, (N-Order) and Strict-Sense Stationarity,
Time Averages and Ergodicity, Autocorrelation Function and Its Properties, Cross-Correlation
Function and Its Properties, Covariance Functions, Gaussian Random Processes, Poisson Random
Process. Random Signal , Mean and Mean-squared Value of System Response, autocorrelation
Function of Response, Cross-Correlation Functions of Input and Output.
RANDOM PROCESSES – SPECTRAL CHARACTERISTICS: The Power Spectrum: Properties,

Relationship between Power Spectrum and Autocorrelation Function,The Cross-Power Density
Spectrum, Properties, Relationship between Cross-Power Spectrum and Cross-Correlation Function.
Spectral Characteristics of System Response: Power Density Spectrum of Response, Cross-Power
Density Spectrums of Input and Output.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Signals, Systems & Communications - B.P. Lathi, 2013, BSP.
2. Signals and Systems - A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H. Nawab, 2 Ed., PHI.
3. Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal Principles - Peyton Z. Peebles, TMH, 4th Edition,
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Signals & Systems - Simon Haykin and Van Veen,Wiley, 2 Ed.
2. Signals and Signals – Iyer and K. Satya Prasad, Cengage Learning
3. Signals and Systems – A.Rama Krishna Rao – 2008, TMH.
4. Introduction to Signal and System Analysis – K.Gopalan 2009, Cengage Learning.
5. Fundamentals of Signals and Systems - Michel J. Robert, 2008, MGH International Edition.
6. Signals, Systems and Transforms - C. L. Philips, J.M.Parr and Eve A.Riskin, 3 Ed., 2004, PE.
61

4 0 0 4
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
Pre-requisite: None
Course Objectives: Objectives of this course are
• To Know the basic principle of DC Generators and motors.
• To Know the basic principle of Single Phase Transformers.
• To Understand the basic principle of three-phase induction motor and alternators.
• To understand the basic principle of special motors and electrical instruments.
Course OUTCOMES: After this course, the student
• To analyze the performance of DC generators and motors.

• To analyze the performance of Transformers.
• To learn the in-depth knowledge on three phase induction motors.
• To analyze the performance of special motors and electrical instruments in real time
applications.
UNIT I
D.C Generators and DC Motors: Principle of operation of DC Machines- EMF equation – Types of
generators – Magnetization and load characteristics of DC generators, DC Motors – Types of DC
Motors – Characteristics of DC motors – 3-point starters for DC shunt motor – Losses and efficiency –
Swinburne’s test – Speed control of DC shunt motor – Flux and Armature voltage control methods.
UNIT II
Transformers & Performance: Principle of operation of single phase transformer – types –
Constructional features – Phasor diagram on No Load and Load – Equivalent circuit, Losses and
Efficiency of transformer and Regulation – OC and SC tests – Predetermination of efficiency and
regulation (Simple Problems).
UNIT III
Three Phase Induction Motor: Principle of operation of three-phase induction motors –Slip ring and
Squirrel cage motors – Slip-Torque characteristics – Efficiency calculation – Starting methods.
UNIT IV
Alternators: Alternators – Constructional features – Principle of operation – Types - EMF Equation –
Distribution and Coil span factors – Predetermination of regulation by Synchronous Impedance
Method – OC and SC tests.
UNIT V
Special Motors & Electrical Instruments : Principle of operation - Shaded pole motors – Capacitor
motors, AC servomotor, AC tachometers, Synchros, Stepper Motors – Characteristics,Basic
Principles of indicating instruments – Moving Coil and Moving iron Instruments (Ammeters and
Voltmeters).
TEXT BOOKS
1. Introduction to Electrical Engineering – M.S Naidu and S. Kamakshaiah, TMH Publ.
2. Basic Electrical Engineering - T.K. Nagasarkar and M.S.Sukhija, Oxford University Press, 2005
REFERENCES
1. Principles of Electrical Engineering - V.K Mehta, S.Chand Publications.
2. Theory and Problems of basic electrical engineering - I.J. Nagarath amd D.P Kothari, PHI
Publications
3. Essentials of Electrical and Computer Engineering - David V. Kerns, JR. J. David Irwin
62

4 0 0 4
ANALOG ELECTRONICS
Pre Requisites: Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
Course Objectives:
• To introduce circuit realizations with components such as diodes, BJTs and transistors
studied earlier.
• To give understanding of various types of amplifier circuits such as small signal, cascaded,
large signal and tuned amplifiers.
• To familiarize the Concept of feedback in amplifiers so as to differentiate between negative
and positive feedback.
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the Course, the students will be able to :
• Design and analyze small signal amplifier circuits applying the biasing techniques learnt
earlier.
• Cascade different amplifier configurations to obtain the required overall specifications like
Gain, Bandwidth, Input and Output interfacing Impedances.
• Design and realize different classes of Power Amplifiers and tuned amplifiers useable for
audio and Radio applications.
• Utilize the Concepts of negative feedback to improve the stability of amplifiers and positive
feedback to generate sustained oscillations.
UNIT – I:
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF SMALL SIGNAL LOW FREQUENCY BJT AMPLIFIERS
Classification of Amplifiers – Distortion in amplifiers, Analysis of CE, CC, and CB Amplifiers and CE
Amplifier with emitter resistance, low frequency response of BJT Amplifiers, effect of coupling and
bypass capacitors, Design of single stage RC coupled amplifier Different coupling schemes used in
amplifiers, Analysis of Cascaded RC Coupled amplifiers, Cascode amplifier, Darlington pair,
Frequency response of BJT amplifier – Analysis at low and high frequencies, The Hybrid- pi ( π ) –
Common Emitter transistor model, CE short circuit current gain, current gain with resistive load, single
stage CE transistor amplifier response, Gain-bandwidth product
UNIT – II: FET AMPLIFIERS

Analysis of JFET Amplifiers, Analysis of CS, CD, CG JFET Amplifiers, comparison of performance
with BJT Amplifiers, Basic Concepts of MOS Amplifiers, –MOSFET – MOSFET Characteristics in
Enhancement and Depletion mode – MOS Small signal model, Common source amplifier with
resistive, Diode connected and Current source loads, Source follower, Common Gate Stage, Cascode
and Folded Cascode Amplifier – frequency response.
UNIT –III: POSITIVE & NEGATIVE FEEDBACK IN AMPLIFIERS

Classification of amplifiers, Concepts of feedback – Classification of feedback amplifiers – General
characteristics of negative feedback amplifiers – Effect of Feedback on Amplifier characteristics –
Voltage series, Voltage shunt, Current series and Current shunt Feedback configurations – Simple
problems.
Condition for oscillations. RC and LC type Oscillators – Frequency and amplitude stability of
oscillators – Generalized analysis of LC oscillators, Quartz, Hartley, and Colpitts Oscillators – RC-
phase shift and Wien-bridge oscillators.
UNIT – IV:
LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS
Class A Power Amplifier, Maximum Value of Efficiency of Class – A Amplifier, Transformer Coupled
Amplifier, Push Pull and Complimentary Symmetry Class B and Class AB Power Amplifiers –
Principle of operation of class –C Amplifier, Transistor Power Dissipation, Heat Sinks.
63
UNIT – V:
TUNED AMPLIFIERS
Introduction, Q-Factor, Small Signal Tuned Amplifiers, Effect of Cascading single Tuned amplifiers on
Bandwidth, Effect of Cascading Double Tuned amplifiers on Bandwidth, Stagger Tuned Amplifiers,
Stability of Tuned amplifiers
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Electronic Devices and Circuits, David A. Bell – 5th Edition, Oxford.
2. Electronic Devices and Circuits, S. Salivahanan, N.Suresh Kumar, A Vallvaraj, 2nd Edition, TMH.
REFERENCES:
1. Integrated Electronics, Jacob Millman, Christos C Halkias, TMH
2. Introductory Electronic Devices and Circuits (Conventional flow version) – Robert T. Paynter, 7th
Edition, 2009, PEI.
th
3. Microelectronic Circuits – Sedra / Smith – 5 Edition – Oxford, 2009
4. Electronic Circuit Analysis – K. Lal Kishore, BS Publications, 2004.
5. Electronic Devices and Circuits, Anil.K. Maini, Varsha Agrawal, 1st Edition, WILEY.
th
6. Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory, Robert L.Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, 9 Edition, Pearson
Education.
64

4 1 0 4
NETWORK ANALYSIS
Pre-requisite: Basic Electrical & Electronics Engineering

Course Objectives: Objectives of this course are
• To understand the basic concepts on RLC circuits.
• To know the behavior of the steady states and transients states in RLC circuits.
• To know the basic Laplace Transforms techniques in periods waveforms.
• To understand the two port network parameters.
• To understand the properties of LC networks and filters.
Course OUTCOMES: After this course
• Gains the knowledge on Basic network elements.
• Learns and analyze the RLC circuits behavior in detaile.
• Analyze the performance of periodic waveforms.
• Learns and gain the knowledge in characteristics of two port network paramenters ( Z,Y,
ABCD, h & g).
• To analyze the filter design concepts in real world applications.
UNIT -I
Review of R, L,C, RC, RL, RLC circuits, Netrwork Topology, Terminology, Basic cutest and tieset
matrices for planar networks, Illustrative Problems, Magnetic Circuits, Self and Mutual inductances,
dot convention, impedance, reactance concept, Impedance transformation and coupled circuits, co-
efficient of coupling, equivalent T for Magnetically coupled circuits, Ideal Transformer.
UNIT -II
Steady state and transient analysis of RC, RL and RLC Circuits, Circuits with switches, step
response, 2nd order series and parallel RLC Circuits, Root locus, damping factor, over damped, under
damped, critically damped cases, quality factor and bandwidth for series and parallel resonance,
resonance curves
UNIT -III
Network Analysis using Laplace transform techniques, step, impulse and exponential excitation,
response due to periodic excitation, RMS and average value of periodic waveforms.
UNIT -IV
Two port network parameters, Z, Y, ABCD, h and g parameters, Characteristic impedance, Image
transfer constant, image and iterative impedance, network function, driving point and transfer
functions – using transformed (S) variables, Poles and Zeros.
UNIT V
Standard T, π, L Sections, Characteristic impedance, image transfer constants, Design of
Attenuators, impedance matching network, T and π Conversion, LC Networks and Filters: Properties
of LC Networks, Foster’s Reactance theorem, design of constant K, LP, HP and BP Filters,
Composite filter design.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Network Analysis – ME Van Valkenburg, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd Edition, 2000.
2. Networks, Lines and Fields - JD Ryder, PHI, 2nd Edition, 1999.
REFERENCES
1. Engineering Circuit Analysis – William Hayt and Jack E Kemmerly, MGH, 5th Edition, 1993.
2. Network Analysis and Synthesis – N.C.Jagan and C.Lakshminarayana, B.S. Publications, 2004.
3. Electric Circuits – J.Edminister and M.Nahvi – Schaum’s Outlines, TMH, 1999.
4. Network Theory – Sudarshan and Shyam Mohan, TMH.
5. Communication Engineering Networks – Everitt and Anner.
65

- - - -
GENDER SENSITIZATION LAB
(Common to All Branches)
(An Activity-based Course)
Objectives of the Course:
• To develop students’ sensibility with regard to issues of gender in contemporary India.
• To provide a critical perspective on the socialization of men and women.
• To introduce students to information about some key biological aspects of genders.
• To expose the students to debates on the politics and economics of work.
• To help students reflect critically on gender violence.
• To expose students to more egalitarian interactions between men and women.
Learning Outcomes:
Students will have developed a better understanding of important issues related to gender in
contemporary India.
Students will be sensitized to basic dimensions of the biological, sociological, psychological and
legal aspects of gender. This will be achieved through discussion of materials derived from
research, facts, everyday life, literature and film.
Students will attain a finer grasp of how gender discrimination works in our society and how to
counter it.
Students will acquire insight into the gendered division of labour and its relation to politics and
economics.
Men and women students and professionals will be better equipped to work and live together as
equals.
Students will develop a sense of appreciation of women in all walks of life.
Through providing accounts of studies and movements as well as the new laws that provide
protection and relief to women, the textbook will empower students to understand and respond to
gender violence.
Unit-I: UNDERSTANDING GENDER

Gender: Why Should We Study It? (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -1)
Socialization: Making Women, Making Men (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -2)
Introduction. Preparing for Womanhood. Growing up Male. First lessons in Caste. Different
Masculinities.
Unit-II: GENDER AND BIOLOGY
Missing Women: Sex Selection and Its Consequences (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -4)
Declining Sex Ratio. Demographic Consequences.
Gender Spectrum: Beyond the Binary (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -10)
Two or Many? Struggles with Discrimination.
Unit-III: GENDER AND LABOUR
Housework: the Invisible Labour (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -3)
“My Mother doesn’t Work.” “Share the Load.”
Women’s Work: Its Politics and Economics (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -7)
Fact and Fiction. Unrecognized and Unaccounted work. Additional Reading: Wages and Conditions of
Work.
Unit – IV: ISSUES OF VIOLENCE
Sexual Harassment: Say No! (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -6)
Sexual Harassment, not Eve-teasing- Coping with Everyday Harassment- Further Reading:
“Chupulu”.
Domestic Violence: Speaking Out (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -8)
Is Home a Safe Place? -When Women Unite [Film]. Rebuilding Lives. Additional Reading: New
Forums for Justice.
Thinking about Sexual Violence (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -11)
Blaming the Victim-“I Fought for my Life….” - Additional Reading: The Caste Face of Violence.
66
Unit – V: GENDER : CO-EXISTENCE

Just Relationships: Being Together as Equals (Towards a World of Equals: Unit -12)
Mary Kom and Onler. Love and Acid just do not Mix. Love Letters. Mothers and Fathers. Additional
Reading: Rosa Parks-The Brave Heart.
Essential Reading: All the Units in the Textbook, “Towards a World of Equals: A Bilingual
Textbook on Gender” written by A.Suneetha, Uma Bhrugubanda, Duggirala Vasanta, Rama
Melkote, Vasudha Nagaraj, Asma Rasheed, Gogu Shyamala, Deepa Sreenivas and Susie Tharu.
Note: Since it is Interdisciplinary Course, Resource Persons can be drawn from the fields of
English Literature or Sociology or Political Science or any other qualified faculty who has
expertise in this field from engineering departments.
Reference Books:
1. Sen, Amartya. “More than One Million Women are Missing.” New York Review of Books 37.20 (20
December 1990). Print. ‘We Were Making History…’ Life Stories of Women in the Telangana
People’s Struggle. New Delhi: Kali for Women, 1989.
2. Tripti Lahiri. “By the Numbers: Where Indian Women Work.” Women’s Studies Journal (14
November 2012) Available online at: http:// blogs.wsj.com/ India real time/2012/11/14/by –the-
numbers-where-Indan-women-work/>
3. K. Satyanarayana and Susie Tharu (Ed.) Steel Nibs Are Sprouting: New Dalit Writing From South
India, Dossier 2: Telugu And Kannada http://harpercollins.co.in/BookDetail.asp?Book_Code=3732
4. Vimala. “Vantillu (The Kitchen)”. Women Writing in India: 600 BC to the Present. Volume II: The
th
20 Century. Ed. Susie Tharu and K. Lalita. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1995. 599-601.
5. Shatrughna, Veena et al. Women’s Work and its Impact on Child Health and Nutrition, Hyderabad,
National Institute of Nutrition, Indian Council of Medical Research. 1993.
6. Stree Shakti Sanghatana. “We Were Making History ….’ Life Stories of Women in the Telangana
People’s Struggle. New Delhi: Kali for Women, 1989.
7. Menon, Nivedita. Seeing like a Feminist. New Delhi: Zubaan-Penguin Books, 2012
8. Jayaprabha, A. “Chupulu (Stares)”. Women Writing in India: 600BC to the Present. Volume II: The
th
20 Century Ed. Susie Tharu and K. Lalita. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1995. 596-597.
9. Javeed, Shayan and Anupam Manuhaar. “Women and Wage Discrimination in India: A Critical
Analysis.” International Journal of Humanities and Social Science Invention 2.4(2013)
10. Gautam, Liela and Gita Ramaswamy. “A ‘conversation’ between a Daughter and a Mother.”
Broadsheet on Contemporary Politics. Special Issue on Sexuality and Harassment: Gender Politics
on Campus Today. Ed. Madhumeeta Sinha and Asma Rasheed. Hyderabad: Anveshi Research
Center for Women’s Studies, 2014.
11. Abdulali Sohaila. “I Fought For My Life…and Won.”Available online at:
http://www.thealternative.in/lifestyle/i-fought-for-my-lifeand-won-sohaila-abdulal/
12. Jeganathan Pradeep, Partha Chatterjee (Ed). “Community, Gender and Violence Subaltern
Studies XI”. Permanent Black and Ravi Dayal Publishers, New Delhi, 2000
13. K. Kapadia. The Violence of Development: The Politics of Identity, Gender and Social Inequalities
in India. London: Zed Books, 2002
14. S. Benhabib. Situating the Self: Gender, Community, and Postmodernism in Contemporary
Ethics, London: Routledge, 1992
15. Virginia Woolf. A Room of One’s Own. Oxford: Black Swan. 1992.
16. T. Banuri and M. Mahmood, Just Development: Beyond Adjustment with a Human Face, Karachi:
Oxford University Press, 1997
67

0 0 3 1
ANALOG ELECTRONICS LAB - I
List of Experiments (Twelve experiments to be done):

Design (any six) and Simulation (any Ten) using Multisim or Pspice or Equivalent Simulation
Software:
1. Common Emitter Amplifier
2. Common Base Amplifier
3. Common Source amplifier
4. Two Stage RC Coupled Amplifier
5. Current Shunt and Voltage Series Feedback Amplifier
6. Cascode Amplifier
7. Wien Bridge Oscillator using Transistors
8. RC Phase Shift Oscillator using Transistors
9. Class A Power Amplifier (Transformer less)
10. Class B Complementary Symmetry Amplifier
11. Hartley and Colpitt’s Oscillator
12. Single Tuned Voltage Amplifier
Equipments required for Laboratories:

1. For software simulation of Electronic circuits
i) Computer Systems with latest specifications
ii) Connected in LAN (Optional)
iii) Operating system (Windows XP)
iv) Simulations software (Multisim / TINAPRO) Package
2. For Hardware simulations of Electronic Circuits

i) RPSs
ii) CROs
iii) Functions Generators
iv) Multimeters
v) Components
68

0 0 3 2
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY LAB
PART – A
1. Serial and Parallel Resonance – Timing, Resonant frequency, Bandwidth and Q-factor
determination for RLC network.
2. Time response of first order RC/RL network for periodic non-sinusoidal inputs – time constant and
steady state error determination.
3. Two port network parameters – Z-Y Parameters, chain matrix and analytical verification.
4. Verification of Superposition and Reciprocity theorems.
5. Verification of maximum power transfer theorem. Verification on DC, verification on AC with
Resistive and Reactive loads.
6. Experimental determination of Thevenin’s and Norton’s equivalent circuits and verification by
direct test.
PART – B
1. Magnetization characteristics of D.C. Shunt generator. Determination of critical field resistance.

2. Swinburne’s Test on DC shunt machine (Predetermination of efficiency of a given DC Shunt
machine working as motor and generator).
3. Brake test on DC shunt motor. Determination of performance characteristics.
4. OC & SC tests on Single-phase transformer (Predetermination of efficiency and regulation at
given power factors and determination of equivalent circuit).
5. Brake test on 3-phase Induction motor (performance characteristics).
6. Regulation of alternator by synchronous impedance method.
Note: Any TEN of the above experiments are to be conducted
69

0 0 3 1
BASIC SIMULATION LAB

Note:
• All the experiments are to be simulated using MATLAB or equivalent software
• Minimum of 15 experiment are to be completed
List of Experiments:
1. Basic Operations on Matrices.
2. Generation of Various Signals and Sequences (Periodic and Aperiodic), such as Unit Impulse,
Unit Step, Square, Saw tooth, Triangular, Sinusoidal, Ramp, Sinc.
3. Operations on Signals and Sequences such as Addition, Multiplication, Scaling, Shifting, Folding,
Computation of Energy and Average Power.
4. Finding the Even and Odd parts of Signal/Sequence and Real and Imaginary parts of Signal.
5. Convolution for Signals and sequences.
6. Auto Correlation and Cross Correlation for Signals and Sequences.
7. Verification of Linearity and Time Invariance Properties of a given Continuous/Discrete System.
8. Computation of Unit sample, Unit step and Sinusoidal responses of the given LTI system and
verifying its physical realiazability and stability properties.
9. Gibbs Phenomenon Simulation.
10. Finding the Fourier Transform of a given signal and plotting its magnitude and phase spectrum.
11. Waveform Synthesis using Laplace Transform.
12. Locating the Zeros and Poles and plotting the Pole-Zero maps in S-plane and Z-Plane for the
given transfer function.
13. Generation of Gaussian noise ( Real and Complex), Computation of its mean, M.S. Value and its
Skew, Kurtosis, and PSD, Probability Distribution Function.
14. Sampling Theorem Verification.
15. Removal of noise by Autocorrelation / Cross correlation.
16. Extraction of Periodic Signal masked by noise using Correlation.
17. Verification of Weiner-Khinchine Relations.
18. Checking a Random Process for Stationarity in Wide sense.
70
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. /MBA) II Year II-Sem L T P C

3 1 0 3
SWITCHING THEORY AND LOGIC DESIGN
Prerequisite : Nil
Course Objectives:
This course provides in-depth knowledge of switching theory and the design techniques of digital
circuits, which is the basis for design of any digital circuit. The main objectives are:
• To learn basic techniques for the design of digital circuits and fundamental concepts used in
the design of digital systems.
• To understand common forms of number representation in digital electronic circuits and to be
able to convert between different representations.
• To implement simple logical operations using combinational logic circuits
• To design combinational logic circuits, sequential logic circuits.
• To impart to student the concepts of sequential circuits, enabling them to analyze sequential
systems in terms of state machines.
• To implement synchronous state machines using flip-flops.
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, students should possess the following skills:
• Be able to manipulate numeric information in different forms, e.g. different bases, signed
integers, various codes such as ASCII, Gray and BCD.
• Be able to manipulate simple Boolean expressions using the theorems and postulates of
Boolean algebra and to minimize combinational functions.
• Be able to design and analyze small combinational circuits and to use standard combinational
functions/building blocks to build larger more complex circuits.
• Be able to design and analyze small sequential circuits and devices and to use standard
sequential functions/building blocks to build larger more complex circuits.
UNIT-I:
Number System and Boolean Algebra And Switching Functions: Review of number systems,
Complements of Numbers, Codes- Binary Codes, Binary Coded Decimal Code and its Properties,
Unit Distance Codes, Error Detecting and Correcting Codes.
Boolean Algebra: Basic Theorems and Properties, Switching Functions, Canonical and Standard
Form, Algebraic Simplification of Digital Logic Gates, Properties of XOR Gates, Universal Gates,
Multilevel NAND/NOR realizations.
UNIT-II:
Minimization and Design of Combinational Circuits:
Introduction, The Minimization of switching function using theorem, The Karnaaugh Map Method-Up
to Five Variable Maps, Don’t Care Map Entries, Tabular Method, Design of Combinational Logic:
Adders, Subtractors, comparators, Multiplexers, Demultiplexers, Decoders, Encoders and Code
converters, Hazards and Hazard Free Relations.
UNIT-III:
Sequential Machines Fundamentals and Applications:
Introduction: Basic Architectural Distinctions between Combinational and Sequential circuits, The
Binary Cell, Fundamentals of Sequential Machine Operation, Latches, Flip Flops: SR, JK, Race
Around Condition in JK, JK Master Slave, D and T Type Flip Flops, Excitation Table of all Flip Flops,
Design of a Clocked Flip-Flop , Timing and Triggering Consideration, Clock Skew, Conversion from
one type of Flip-Flop to another.
Registers and Counters: Shift Registers, Data Transmission in Shift Registers, Operation of Shift
Registers, Shift Register Configuration, Bidirectional Shift Registers, Applications of Shift Registers,
Design and Operation of Ring and Twisted Ring Counter, Operation Of Asynchronous And
Synchronous Counters.
71
UNIT-IV:
Sequential Circuits-I:
Introduction, State Diagram, Analysis of Synchronous Sequential Circuits, Approaches to the Design
of Synchronous Sequential Finite State Machines, Synthesis of Synchronous Sequential Circuits,
Serial Binary Adder, Sequence Detector, Parity-bit Generator, Design of Asynchronous Counters,
Design of Synchronous Modulo N –Counters.
UNIT-V:
Sequential Circuits-II:
Finite state machine-capabilities and limitations, Mealy and Moore models-minimization of completely
specified and incompletely specified sequential machines, Partition techniques and Merger chart
methods-concept of minimal cover table.
Algorithmic State Machines: Salient features of the ASM chart-Simple examples-System design
using data path and control subsystems-control implementations-examples of Weighing machine and
Binary multiplier.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Switching and Finite Automata Theory- Zvi Kohavi & Niraj K. Jha, 3rdEdition, Cambridge.
2. Switching Theory and Logic Design – A Anand Kumar, PHI,2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Digital Design- Morris Mano, PHI, 3rd Edition.
2. Introduction to Switching Theory and Logic Design – Fredriac J. Hill, Gerald R. Peterson, 3rd
Ed,John Wiley & Sons Inc.
3. Digital Fundamentals – A Systems Approach – Thomas L. Floyd, Pearson, 2013.
4. Digital Logic Design - Ye Brian and HoldsWorth, Elsevier
5. Fundamentals of Logic Design- Charles H. Roth, Cengage LEanring, 5th, Edition, 2004.
6. DigitalLogic Applications and Design- John M. Yarbrough, Thomson Publications, 2006.
7. Digital Logic and State Machine Design – Comer, 3rd, Oxford, 2013.
72

3 1 0 3
PULSE AND DIGITAL CIRCUITS
Prerequisite : Analog Electronics
Course Objectives:
• To explain the complete response of R-C and R-L-C transient circuits.
• To explain clippers, clampers, switching characteristics of transistors and sampling gates.
• To construct various multivibrators using transistors, design of sweep circuits and sampling
gates.
• To discuss and realize logic gates using diodes and transistors.
Course Outcomes:
• Understand the applications of diode as integrator, differentiator, clippers, clampler circuits..
• Learn various switching devices such as diode, transistor, SCR. Difference between logic
gates and sampling gates
• Design mutivibrators for various applications, synchronization techniques and sweep circuits.
• Realizing logic gates using diodes and transistors.
• Understanding of time and frequency domain aspects.
• Importance of clock pulse and its generating techniques.
UNIT-I:
Linear Wave Shaping: High pass and low pass RC circuits and their response for Sinusoidal, Step,
Pulse, Square, & Ramp inputs, High pass RC network as Differentiator, Low pass RC circuit as an
Integrator, Attenuators and its application as a CRO Probe, RL and RLC Circuits and their response
for Step Input ,Ringing Circuit.
UNIT-II:
Non-Linear Wave Shaping: Diode clippers, Transistor clippers, Clipping at two independent levels,
Comparators, Applications of Voltage comparators. Clamping Operation, Clamping circuit taking
Source and Diode resistances into account, Clamping Circuit Theorem, Practical Clamping Circuits,
Effect of Diode Characteristics on Clamping Voltage, Synchronized Clamping.
UNIT-III:
Switching Characteristics of Devices: Diode as a Switch, Piecewise Linear Diode Characteristics,
Diode Switching times, Transistor as a Switch, Break down voltages, Transistor in Saturation,
Temperature variation of Saturation Parameters, Transistor-switching times, Silicon-controlled-switch
circuits.
Sampling Gates: Basic operating principles of Sampling Gates, Unidirectional and Bi-directional
Sampling Gates, Four Diode Sampling Gate, Reduction of pedestal in Gate Circuits
UNIT–IV:
Multivibrators: Analysis and Design of Bistable, Monostable, Astable Multivibrators and Schmitt
trigger using Transistors.
Time Base Generators: General features of a Time base Signal, Methods of Generating Time Base
Waveform, Transistor Miller Time Base generator, Transistor Bootstrap Time Base Generator,
Transistor Current Time Base Generators, Methods of Linearity improvement.
UNIT-V:
Synchronization and Frequency Division: Pulse Synchronization of Relaxation Devices, Frequency
division in Sweep Circuits, Stability of Relaxation Devices, Astable Relaxation Circuits, Monostable
Relaxation Circuits, Synchronization of a Sweep Circuit with Symmetrical Signals, Sine wave
frequency division with a Sweep Circuit, A Sinusoidal Divider using Regeneration and Modulation.
73
Realization of Logic Gates Using Diodes & Transistors: AND, OR and NOT Gates using Diodes
and Transistors, DCTL, RTL, DTL, TTL and CML Logic Families and its Comparison.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Millman’s Pulse, Digital and Switching Waveforms –J. Millman, H. Taub and Mothiki S. Prakash
Rao, 2 Ed., 2008, TMH.
2. Solid State Pulse Circuits –David A. Bell, 4 Ed., 2002 PHI.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pulse and Digital Circuits – A. Anand Kumar, 2005, PHI.
2. Fundamentals of Pulse and Digital Circuits- Ronald J. Tocci, 3 Ed., 2008.
3. Pulse and Digital Circuits – Motheki S. Prakash Rao, 2006, TMH.
4. Wave Generation and Shaping - L. Strauss.
th
5. Pulse, Switching and Digital Circuits – 5 Edition, David A. Bell, Oxford, 2015.
74

4 0 0 4
ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY AND TRANSMISSION LINES
Prerequisite : Nil
Course Objectives:
This is a structured foundation course, dealing with concepts, formulations and applications of
Electromagnetic Theory and Transmission Lines, and is the basic primer for all electronic
communication engineering subjects. The main objectives of the course are …
• To learn the Basic Laws, Concepts and proofs related to Electrostatic Fields and
Magnetostatic Fields, and apply them to solve physics and engineering problems.
• To distinguish between static and time-varying fields, and understand the significance
and utility of Maxwell’s Equations and Boundary Conditions, and gain ability to provide
solutions to communication engineering problems.
• To analyze the characteristics of Uniform Plane Waves (UPW), determine their
propagation parameters and estimate the same for dielectric and dissipative media.
• To conceptually understand the UPW Polarization features and Poynting Theorem, and
apply them for practical problems.
• To determine the basic Transmission Line Equations and telephone line parameters and
estimate the distortions present.
• To understand the concepts of RF Lines and their characteristics, Smith Chart and its
applications, acquire knowledge to configure circuit elements, QWTs and HWTs, and
to apply the same for practical problems.
Course Outcomes : Having gone through this foundation course, the students would be able
to …
• Distinguish between the static and time-varying fields, establish the corresponding sets of
Maxwell’s Equations and Boundary Conditions, and use them for solving engineering
problems.
• Analyze the Wave Equations for good conductors and good dielectrics, and evaluate the
UPW Characteristics for several practical media of interest.
• Establish the proof and estimate the polarization features, reflection and transmission
coefficients for UPW propagation, distinguish between Brewster and Critical Angles, and
acquire knowledge of their applications.
• Determine the Transmission Line parameters for different lines, characterize the distortions
and estimate the characteristics for different lines.
• Analyze the RF Line features and configure them as SC, OC Lines, QWTs and HWTs,
and design the same for effective impedance transformation.
• Study the Smith Chart profile and stub matching features, and gain ability to practically
use the same for solving practical problems.
UNIT–I:
Electrostatics: Coulomb’s Law, Electric Field Intensity – Fields due to Different Charge Distributions,
Electric Flux Density, Gauss Law and Applications, Electric Potential, Relations Between E and V,
Maxwell’s Two Equations for Electrostatic Fields, Energy Density, Illustrative Problems. Convection
and Conduction Currents, Dielectric Constant, Isotropic and Homogeneous Dielectrics, Continuity
Equation, Relaxation Time, Poisson’s and Laplace’s Equations; Capacitance – Parallel Plate, Coaxial,
Spherical Capacitors, Illustrative Problems.
UNIT–II:
Magnetostatics: Biot-Savart’s Law, Ampere’s Circuital Law and Applications, Magnetic Flux Density,
Maxwell’s Two Equations for Magnetostatic Fields, Magnetic Scalar and Vector Potentials, Forces
due to Magnetic Fields, Ampere’s Force Law, Illustrative Problems.
Maxwell’s Equations (Time Varying Fields): Faraday’s Law and Transformer EMF, Inconsistency of
Ampere’s Law and Displacement Current Density, Maxwell’s Equations in Different Final Forms and
75
Word Statements, Conditions at a Boundary Surface : Dielectric-Dielectric and Dielectric-Conductor

Interfaces, Illustrative Problems .
UNIT–III:
EM Wave Characteristics - I: Wave Equations for Conducting and Perfect Dielectric Media, Uniform
Plane Waves – Definition, All Relations Between E & H, Sinusoidal Variations, Wave Propagation in
Lossless and Conducting Media, Conductors & Dielectrics – Characterization, Wave Propagation in
Good Conductors and Good Dielectrics, Polarization, Illustrative Problems.
EM Wave Characteristics – II: Reflection and Refraction of Plane Waves – Normal and Oblique
Incidences for both Perfect Conductor and Perfect Dielectrics, Brewster Angle, Critical Angle and
Total Internal Reflection, Surface Impedance, Poynting Vector and Poynting Theorem – Applications,
Illustrative Problems.
UNIT–IV:
Transmission Lines - I: Types, Parameters, Transmission Line Equations, Primary & Secondary
Constants, Expressions for Characteristic Impedance, Propagation Constant, Phase and Group
Velocities, Infinite Line Concepts, Losslessness/Low Loss Characterization, Distortion – Condition for
Distortionlessness and Minimum Attenuation, Loading - Types of Loading, Illustrative Problems.
UNIT–V:
Transmission Lines – II: Input Impedance Relations, SC and OC Lines, Reflection Coefficient,
VSWR. UHF Lines as Circuit Elements; λ/4, λ/2, λ/8 Lines – Impedance Transformations, Significance
of Zmin and Zmax , Smith Chart – Configuration and Applications, Single Matching, Illustrative
Problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Principles of Electromagnetics – Matthew N.O. sadiku and S.V. Kulkarni, 6th Ed., Oxford
University Press, Aisan Edition, 2015.
2. Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems – E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, 2ndEd., 2000,
PHI.
3. Transmission Lines and Networks – Umesh Sinha, Satya Prakashan, 2001, (Tech. India
Publications), New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Engineering Electromagnetics – Nathan Ida, 2ndEd., 2005, Springer (India) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Networks, Lines and Fields – John D. Ryder, 2ndEd., 1999, PHI.
3. Engineering Electromagnetics – William H. Hayt Jr. and John A. Buck, 7thEd., 2006, TMH.
76

3 1 0 3
ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS
Prerequisite : Signals and Systems
Course Objectives:
• To develop ability to analyze system requirements of analog communication systems.
• To understand the need for modulation
• To understand the generation, detection of various analog modulation techniques and also
perform the mathematical analysis associated with these techniques.
• To acquire knowledge to analyze the noise performance of analog modulation techniques.
• To acquire theoretical knowledge of each block in AM and FM receivers.
• To understand the pulse modulation techniques.
Course Outcomes:
• Able to analyze and design various modulation and demodulation analog systems.
• Understand the characteristics of noise present in analog systems.
• Study of signal to Noise Ration (SNR) performance, of various Analog Communication
systems.
• Analyze and design the various Pulse Modulation Systems.
• Understand the concepts of Multiplexing : Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) and Frequency
Division Multiplexing (FDM).
UNIT I
AMPLITUDE MODULATION
Introduction to communication system, Need for modulation, Frequency Division Multiplexing ,
Amplitude Modulation, Definition, Time domain and frequency domain description, single tone
modulation, power relations in AM waves, Generation of AM waves, square law Modulator, Switching
modulator, Detection of AM Waves; Square law detector, Envelope detector, Double side band
suppressed carrier modulators, time domain and frequency domain description, Generation of DSBSC
Waves, Balanced Modulators, Ring Modulator, Coherent detection of DSB-SC Modulated waves,
COSTAS Loop.
UNIT II
SSB MODULATION
Introduction to Hilbert Transform, Frequency domain description, Frequency discrimination method for
generation of AM SSB Modulated Wave, Time domain description, Phase discrimination method for
generating AM SSB Modulated waves. Demodulation of SSB Waves, Vestigial side band modulation:
Frequency description, Generation of VSB Modulated wave, Time domain description, Envelope
detection of a VSB Wave pulse Carrier, Comparison of AM Techniques, Applications of different AM
Systems.
UNIT III
ANGLE MODULATION
Basic concepts, Frequency Modulation: Single tone frequency modulation, Spectrum Analysis of
Sinusoidal FM Wave, Narrow band FM, Wide band FM, Constant Average Power, Transmission
bandwidth of FM Wave - Generation of FM Waves, Direct FM, Detection of FM Waves: Balanced
Frequency discriminator, Zero crossing detector, Phase locked loop, Comparison of FM and AM.
UNIT IV
NOISE
Resistive Noise Source (Thermal), Arbitrary Noise Sources, Effective Noise Temperature, Average
Noise Figures, Average Noise Figure of cascaded networks, Narrow Band noise, Quadrature
representation of narrow band noise & its properties
77
Noise in Analog communication System, Noise in DSB and SSB System Noise in AM System, Noise
in Angle Modulation System, Threshold effect in Angle Modulation System, Pre-emphasis and de-
emphasis.
UNIT V
RECEIVERS
Radio Receiver - Receiver Types - Tuned radio frequency receiver, Superhetrodyne receiver, RF
section and Characteristics - Frequency changing and tracking, Intermediate frequency, AGC, FM
Receiver, Comparison with AM Receiver, Amplitude limiting.
PULSE MODULATION
Types of Pulse modulation, PAM (Single polarity, double polarity) PWM: Generation and
demodulation of PWM, PPM, Generation and demodulation of PPM, Time Divison Multiplexing.
TEXTBOOKS
1. Communication Systems by Simon Haykins John Wiley & Sons , 4th Edition.
2. Electronic Communications – Dennis Roddy and John Coolean , 4th Edition , PEA, 2004
3. Communication Systems – B.P. Lathi, BS Publication , 2004.
4. Electronics & Communication System – George Kennedy and Bernard Davis , TMH 2004.
REFERENCES
nd
1. Electronic Communication Systems – Modulation and Transmission - Robert J. Schoenbeck, 2
Edition, PHI.
2. Analog and Digital Communications – Simon Haykin, John Wiley, 2005.
3. Analog and Digital Communication – K. Sam Shanmugam, Willey ,2005
th
4. Electronics Communication Systems-Fundamentals through Advanced-Wayne Tomasi, 5
Edition,2009,PHI.
78

3 1 0 3
CONTROL SYSTEMS
Pre-requisite: Network Analysis
Course Objectives:
Objectives of course are
• To introduce the principles and applications of control systems in everyday life
• To introduce the basic concepts of block diagram reduction, time domain analysis solutions to
time invariant systems
• To understand different aspects of stability analysis of systems in frequency domain and time
domain.
Course Outcomes: After this course, the student gets a thorough knowledge of
• Open loop and closed loop control systems.
• Modeling and transfer function derivations of translational and rotational systems.
• Represent transfer functions through block diagrams and signal flow graphs.
• Design a control systems using time domain and frequency domain techniques.
• Time response analysis, stability analysis, frequency response analysis of different ordered
systems through their characteristic equation and time-domain specifications.
• Applications of concepts to electrical and electronics problems.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION:
Concepts of Control Systems- Open Loop and closed loop control systems and their differences-
Different examples of control systems- Classification of control systems, Feed-Back Characteristics,
Effects of feedback.
Mathematical models – Differential equations, Impulse Response and transfer functions -
Translational and Rotational mechanical systems.
TRANSFER FUNCTION EPRESENTATION:

Transfer Function of DC Servo motor - AC Servo motor- Synchro transmitter and Receiver, Block
diagram representation of systems considering electrical systems as examples -Block diagram
algebra – Representation by Signal flow graph - Reduction using mason’s gain formula.
UNIT-II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS:

Standard test signals - Time response of first order systems – Characteristic Equation of Feedback
control systems, Transient response of second order systems - Time domain specifications – Steady
state response - Steady state errors and error constants – Effects of proportional derivative,
proportional integral systems.
UNIT – III STABILITY ANALYSIS:

The concept of stability - Routh stability criterion – qualitative stability and conditional stability.
Root Locus Technique:
The root locus concept - construction of root loci-effects of adding poles and zeros to G(s) H(s) on the
root loci.
Frequency Response Analysis:
Introduction, Frequency domain specifications-Bode diagrams-Determination of Frequency domain
specifications and transfer function from the Bode Diagram-Phase margin and Gain margin-Stability
Analysis from Bode Plots.
UNIT-IV STABILITY ANALYSIS IN FREQUENCY DOMAIN:

Polar Plots, Nyquist Plots and applications of Nyquist criterion to find the stability –Effects of adding
poles and zeros to G(s)H(s) on the shape of the Nyquist diagrams.
79
Classical Control Design Techniques:

Compensation techniques – Lag, Lead, and Lead-Lag Controllers design in frequency Domain, PID
Controllers.
UNIT – V STATE SPACE ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS:

Concepts of state, state variables and state model, derivation of state models from block diagrams,
Diagonalization- Solving the Time invariant state Equations- State Transition Matrix and its Properties.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Control Systems Engineering – by I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, New Age International (P) Limited,
Publishers, 2nd edition.
2. Modern Control Engineering – by Katsuhiko Ogata – Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 3rd edition,
1998.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Control Systems by N.K.Sinha, New Age International (P) Limited Publishers, 3rd Edition, 1998.
2. Automatic Control Systems 8th edition– by B. C. Kuo 2003– John wiley and son’s.,
rd
3. Control Systems Engg. by NISE 3 Edition – John wiley
4. Control Systems by S.Kesavan , Hitech Publications.
5. “Modeling & Control Of Dynamic Systems” by Narciso F. Macia George J. Thaler, Thomson
Publishers.
80

0 0 3 2
ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS LAB
Note:
• Minimum 12 experiments should be conducted:
• All these experiments are to be simulated first either using MATLAB, Comsim or any other
simulation package and then to be realized in hardware
1. Amplitude modulation and demodulation.

2. DSB-SC Modulator & Detector
3. SSB-SC Modulator & Detector (Phase Shift Method)
4. Frequency modulation and demodulation.
5. Study of spectrum analyzer and analysis of AM and FM Signals
6. Pre-emphasis & de-emphasis.
7. Time Division Multiplexing & De multiplexing
8. Frequency Division Multiplexing & De multiplexing
9. Verification of Sampling Theorem
10. Pulse Amplitude Modulation & Demodulation
11. Pulse Width Modulation & Demodulation
12. Pulse Position Modulation & Demodulation
13. Frequency Synthesizer.
14. AGC Characteristics.
15. PLL as FM Demodulator
81

0 0 3 2
PULSE AND DIGITAL CIRCUITS LAB
Minimum Twelve experiments to be conducted:
1. Linearwave Shaping
a. RC Low Pass Circuit for different time constants
b. RC High Pass Circuit for different time constants
2. Non-linear wave shaping

a. Transfer characteristics and response of Clippers:
i) Positive and Negative Clippers
ii) Clipping at two independent levels
b. The steady state output waveform of clampers for a square wave input
i) Positive and Negative Clampers
ii) Clamping at different reference voltage
3. Comparison Operation of different types of Comparators

4. Switching characteristics of a transistor
5. Design a Bistable Multivibrator and draw its waveforms
6. Design an Astable Multivibrator and draw its waveforms
7. Design a Monostable Multivibrator and draw its waveforms
8. Response of Schmitt Trigger circuit for loop gain less than and greater than one
9. UJT relaxation oscillator
10. The output- voltage waveform of Boot strap sweep circuit
11. The output- voltage waveform of Miller sweep circuit
12. Pulse Synchronization of An Astable circuit
13. Response of a transistor Current sweep circuit
14. Sampling gates
a. Response of Unidirectional gate
b. Response of Bidirectional gate using transistors
15. Study of logic gates
82

0 0 3 2
ANALOG ELECTRONICS LAB - II
List of Experiments (Twelve experiments to be done):
Hardware Testing in Laboratory:
Part A: Minimum of 6 out of the 10 experiments listed on breadboard.

1. Current Shunt Feedback amplifier
2. Voltage Series Feedback amplifier
3. Cascode amplifier
4. Darlington Pair
5. RC Phase shift Oscillator
6. Hartley and Colpitt’s Oscillators
7. Class A power amplifier
8. Class B Complementary symmetry amplifier
Part B: Testing of any 2 circuits designed and simulated out of the 4 experiments listed.
1. Common Emitter Amplifier

2. Common Source Amplifier
3. Two Stage RC Coupled Amplifier
4. Wien Bridge Oscillator using Transistors
Part C:
1. Introduction to PCB fabrication methods
2. Translation of any tested/designed and tested circuits on a PCB.
83

2 0 0 2
HUMAN VALUES AND PROFESSIONAL ETHICS
Prerequisite: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To introduce the basic concepts of universal human values
2. To familiarize the students with desirable business and professional ethics, rights and
responsibilities
3. To prepare students against possible gaps and unethical practices in contemporary times
4. To sensitize the students so that they can protect themselves and the organization from the
possible professional crime malpractices
Course Outcomes:
1. The students learn about diverse ethical issues rooted in society, trade, business, and
environment on local as well as a global platform.
2. The students appreciate their role as a responsible citizen, professional, and as managers,
advisors, experts and consultants.
3. The students will reflect and learn major values and ethics from their observations of a spiritual
discourse and a visit to a business organization as a practical part of this course.
Unit 1 Human Values: Morals, values, ethics – integrity – work ethics –service learning –civic virtue –
respect for others- living peacefully - Caring –sharing –honesty – courage –valuing time – cooperation
– commitment –empathy – self-confidence –spirituality – character- Mini-Cases
Unit II Professional Ethics: Profession- and professionalism - Two models of professionalism –

Professional etiquette -Three types of Ethics or morality Responsibility in Engineering – Engineering
standards –Engineering Ethics – Positive and Negative Faces. Professional Codes and Code of
conduct of Institute of Engineers. Mini-cases.
Unit III Professional Responsibilities: Ethical standards Vs Professional Conduct – Zero Tolerance
for Culpable Mistakes – Hazards and Risks- Risk benefit analysis– congeniality, collegiality and
loyalty. Respect for authority – conflicts of interest –Mini-Cases.
Unit IV Professional Rights: professional rights and employee rights communicating risk and public
policy – Whistle blowing - Professionals /engineers as managers, advisors, experts, witnesses and
consultants – moral leadership- Regulatory compliances, Monitoring and control- Mini-Cases
Unit V Ethics in global context: Global issues in MNCs- Problems of bribery, extortion, and grease
payments – Problem of nepotism, excessive gifts – paternalism – different business practices –
negotiating taxes. Mini-Cases.
Mini-projects
Project 1: The student of this course should invariably attend (or watch on internet/any TV
channel/youtube/social media) two speeches of 30 minutes duration each dealing with spiritual
discourse and submit a report on the contents of the lecture proceedings.
Project 2: Visit any organization (including shops/ hotels or shopping malls in your region) of your
choice and observe how the professionals perform the given job with a focus on professional ethics
and human values.
References
1. Aryasri, Human Values and Professional Ethics, Maruthi Publications.
2. S B George, Human Values and Professional Ethics, Vikas Publishing.
3. KR Govindan & Saenthil Kumar:Professional Ethics and Human Values, Anuradha Publications.
4. S K Chakraborthy & D.Chakraborthy: Human Values and Ethics, Himalaya.
5. M. Govindarajan, S. Natarajan, & V.S. Senthilkumar: Engineering Ethics(Includes Human
Values), HI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi – 110001
84
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. /MBA) III Year I-Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
LINEAR AND DIGITAL IC APPLICATIONS
Prerequisite: Pulse and Digital Circuits
Course Objectives:
The main objectives of the course are:
1. To introduce the basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits.
2. To teach the linear and non - linear applications of operational amplifiers.
3. To introduce the theory and applications of analog multipliers and PLL.
4. To teach the theory of ADC and DAC.
5. To introduce the concepts of waveform generation and introduce some special function ICs.
6. To understand and implement the working of basic digital circuits
Course Outcomes:
On completion of this course, the students will have:
1. A thorough understanding of operational amplifiers with linear integrated circuits.
2. Understanding of the different families of digital integrated circuits and their characteristics.
3. Also students will be able to design circuits using operational amplifiers for various applications.
UNIT -I:
Operational Amplifier
Ideal and Practical Op-Amp, Op-Amp Characteristics, DC and AC Characteristics, Features of 741
Op-Amp, Modes of Operation - Inverting, Non-Inverting, Differential, Instrumentation Amplifier, AC
Amplifier, Differentiators and Integrators, Comparators, Schmitt Trigger, Introduction to Voltage
Regulators, Features of 723 Regulator, Three Terminal Voltage Regulators.
UNIT -II:
Op-Amp, IC-555 & IC 565 Applications
Introduction to Active Filters, Characteristics of Band pass, Band reject and All Pass Filters, Analysis
of 1st order LPF & HPF Butterworth Filters, Waveform Generators – Triangular, Sawtooth, Square
Wave,IC555 Timer - Functional Diagram, Monostable and Astable Operations, Applications, IC565
PLL - Block Schematic, Description of Individual Blocks, Applications.
UNIT -III:
Data Converters
Introduction, Basic DAC techniques, Different types of DACs-Weighted resistor DAC, R-2R ladder
DAC, Inverted R-2R DAC, Different Types of ADCs - Parallel Comparator Type ADC, Counter Type
ADC, Successive Approximation ADC and Dual Slope ADC, DAC and ADC Specifications.
UNIT -IV:
Digital Integrated Circuits
Classification of Integrated Circuits, Comparison of Various Logic Families, CMOS Transmission
Gate, IC interfacing- TTL Driving CMOS & CMOS Driving TTL, Combinational Logic ICs –
Specifications and Applications of TTL-74XX & CMOS 40XX Series ICs - Code Converters, Decoders,
Demultiplexers, LED & LCD Decoders with Drivers, Encoders, Priority Encoders, Multiplexers,
Demultiplexers, Priority Generators/Checkers, Parallel Binary Adder/Subtractor, Magnitude
Comparators.
UNIT -V:
Sequential Logic IC’s and Memories
Familiarity with commonly available 74XX & CMOS 40XX Series ICs – All Types of Flip-flops,
Synchronous Counters, Decade Counters, Shift Registers.
Memories - ROM Architecture, Types of ROMS & Applications, RAM Architecture, Static & Dynamic
RAMs.
85
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Op-Amps & Linear ICs – Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, PHI, 2003.
nd
2. Linear Integrated Circuits –D. Roy Chowdhury, New Age International (p) Ltd, 2 Ed., 2003.
th
3. Digital Fundamentals – Floyd and Jain, Pearson Education, 8 Edition, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Op Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits-Concepts and Applications James M. Fiore, Cengage
Learning/ Jaico, 2009.
2. Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits by K.Lal Kishore – Pearson, 2009.
3. Linear Integrated Circuits and Applications – Salivahana, TMH.
4. Modern Digital Electronics – RP Jain – 4/e – TMH, 2010.
5. Digital Design Principles and Practices – John. F. Wakerly 3/e, 2005.
6. Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits, 4/e William D.Stanley, Pearson Education
India, 2009.
86

4 0 0 4
ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION
Prerequisite : Electromagnetic Theory and Transmission Lines
Course Objectives:This can be termed a middle level course in the electronic communication
engineering domain. The course deals with antenna basics, different types of antennas, some
design features, antenna measurements and wave propagation, and has the following main
objectives …
• To understand the concept of radiation, antenna definitions and significance of

antenna parameters, to derive and analyze the radiation characteristics of thin wire
dipole antennas and solve numerical problems.
• To distinguish between UHF, VHF and Microwave Antennas, their requirements,
specifications, characteristics and design relations.
• To analyze the characteristics of yagi-uda antennas, helical antennas, pyramidal horns,
microstrip patch antennas and parabolic reflectors and identify the requirements to
facilitate their design.
• To identify the antenna array requirements, to determine the characteristics of ULAs
and estimate the patterns of BSA, EFA, and Binomial Arrays.
• To understand the concepts and set-up requirements for microwave measurements,
and familiarize with the procedure to enable antenna measurements.
• To define and distinguish between different phenomenon of wave propagation (ground
wave, space wave and sky wave), their frequency dependence, and estimate their
characteristics, identifying their profiles and parameters involved.
Course Outcomes:
Having gone through this course on Antenna Theory and Techniques, and Wave
Propagation, the students would be able to
• Explain the mechanism of radiation, distinguish between different antenna characteristic
parameters, establish their mathematical relations, estimate them for different practical
cases.
• Distinguish between short dipoles, half-wave dipoles, quarter-wave monopoles and small
loops, configure their current distributions, derive their far fields and radiation
characteristics and sketch their patterns.
• Characterize the antennas based on frequency, configure the geometry and establish
the radiation patterns of folded dipole, Yagi-Uda Antenna, Helical Antennas, Horn
Antennas, and to acquire the knowledge of their analysis, design and development.
• Analyse a microstrip rectangular patch antenna and a parabolic reflector antenna,
identify the requirements and relevant feed structure, carry out the design and establish
their patterns.
• Specify the requirements for microwave measurements and arrange a setup to carry
out the antenna far zone pattern and gain measurements in the laboratory.
• Carry out the Linear Array Analysis, estimate the array factor and characteristics and
sketch the pattern for 2-element array, N-element BSA, EFA, modified EFA, Binomial
Arrays.
• Classify the different wave propagation mechanisms, identify their frequency ranges,
determine the characteristic features of ground wave, ionospheric wave, space wave,
duct and tropospheric propagations, and estimate the parameters involved.
UNIT -I:
Antenna Basics: Introduction, Basic Antenna Parameters – Patterns, Beam Area, Radiation
Intensity, Beam Efficiency, Directivity-Gain-Resolution, Antenna Apertures, Effective Height,
87
Fields from Oscillating Dipole, Field Zones, Front - to-back Ratio, Antenna Theorems, Radiation,
Retarded Potentials – Helmholtz Theorem
Thin Linear Wire Antennas – Radiation from Small Electric Dipole, Quarter Wave Monopole and
Half Wave Dipole – Current Distributions, Field Components, Radiated Power, Radiation Resistance,
Beam Width, Directivity, Effective Area and Effective Height, Natural Current Distributions, Far Fields
and Patterns of Thin Linear Centre-fed Antennas of Different Lengths, Illustrative Problems. Loop
Antennas - Introduction, Small Loop, Comparison of Far Fields of Small Loop and Short Dipole,
Radiation Resistances and Directivities of Small Loops (Qualitative Treatment).
UNIT -II:
VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas - I : Arrays with Parasitic Elements, Yagi-Uda Array, Folded
Dipoles and their Characteristics, Helical Antennas – Helical Geometry, Helix Modes, Practical Design
Considerations for Monofilar Helical Antenna in Axial and Normal Modes, Horn Antennas – Types,
Fermat’s Principle, Optimum Horns, Design Considerations of Pyramidal Horns, Illustrative Problems.
UNIT -III:
VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas - II: Microstrip Antennas – Introduction, Features, Advantages
and Limitations, Rectangular Patch Antennas – Geometry and Parameters, Characteristics of
Microstrip Antennas. Reflector Antennas – Introduction, Flar Sheet and Corner Reflectors,
Paraboloidal Reflectors – Geometry, Pattern Characteristics, Feed Methods, Reflector Types –
Related Features, Illustrative Problems.
UNIT -IV:
Antenna Arrays: Point Sources – Definition, Patterns, arrays of 2 Isotropic Sources - Different
Cases, Principle of Pattern Multiplication, Uniform Linear Arrays – Broadside Arrays, Endfire Arrays,
EFA with Increased Directivity, Derivation of their Characteristics and Comparison, BSAs with Non-
uniform Amplitude Distributions – General Considerations and Binomial Arrays, Illustrative Problems.
Antenna Measurements: Introduction, Concepts - Reciprocity, Near and Far Fields, Coordinate
System, Sources of Errors. Patterns to be Measured, Directivity Measurement, Gain Measurements
(by Comparison, Absolute and 3-Antenna Methods)
UNIT -V:
Wave Propagation – I: Introduction, Definitions, Categorizations and General Classifications,
Different Modes of Wave Propagation, Ray/Mode Concepts, Ground Wave Propagation (Qualitative
Treatment) – Introduction, Plane Earth Reflections, Space and Surface Waves, Wave Tilt, Curved
Earth Reflections. Space Wave Propagation – Introduction, Field Strength Variation with Distance
and Height, Effect of Earth’s Curvature, Absorption, Super Refraction, M-Curves and Duct
Propagation, Scattering Phenomena, Tropospheric Propagation.
Wave Propagation – II: Sky Wave Propagation – Introduction, Structure of Ionosphere, Refraction
and Reflection of Sky Waves by Ionosphere, Ray Path, Critical Frequency, MUF, LUF, OF, Virtual
Height and Skip Distance, Relation between MUF and Skip Distance, Multi-hop Propagation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Antennas and Wave Propagation – J.D. Kraus, R.J. Marhefka and Ahmad S. Khan, TMH, New
Delhi, 4th ed., (Special Indian Edition), 2010.
2. Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems – E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, PHI, 2nd ed.,
2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1. Antenna Theory - C.A. Balanis, John Wiley & Sons, 3 Ed., 2005.
2. Antennas and Wave Propagation – K.D. Prasad, Satya Prakashan, Tech India Publications, New
Delhi, 2001.
88

3 1 0 3
DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
Prerequisite : Analog Communications
Course Objectives:
• To understand the functional block diagram of Digital communication system.
• To understand the need for source and channel coding.
• To study various source and channel coding techniques.
• To understand a mathematical model of digital communication system for bit error rate
analysis of different digital communication systems.
Course Outcomes:
• Understand basic components of Digital Communication Systems.
• Design optimum receiver for Digital Modulation techniques.
• Analyze the error performance of Digital Modulation Techniques.
• Understand the redundancy present in Digital Communication by using various source coding
techniques.
• Know about different error detecting and error correction codes like block codes, cyclic codes
and convolution codes.
UNIT I:
Elements of Digital Communication Systems: Model of Digital Communication Systems, Digital
Representation of Analog Signal, Certain Issues in Digital Transmission, Advantages of Digital
Communication Systems, Sampling Theorem, Types of Sampling – Impulse Sampling , Natural
Sampling , Flat – Top Sampling. Introduction to Baseband Sampling.
Pulse Code Modulation: PCM Generation and Reconstruction, Quantization Noise, Non Uniform
Quantization and Companding, DPCM, Adaptive DPCM, DM and Adaptive DM, Noise in PCM and
DM.
UNIT II:
Digital Modulation Techniques: Introduction, ASK, ASK Modulator, Coherent ASK Detector, Non-
Coherent ASK Detector, FSK, Bandwidth and Frequency Spectrum of FSK, Non Coherent FSK
Detector, Coherent FSK Detector, FSK Detection using PLL, BPSK, Coherent PSK Detection, QPSK,
Differential PSK.
UNIT III:
Baseband Transmission and Optimal Reception of Digital Signal: A Baseband Signal Receiver,
Probability of Error, Optimum Receiver, Coherent Reception, Signal Space Representation and
Probability of Error, Eye Diagrams, Cross Talk.
UNIT IV:
Entropy, Information rate, Source coding: Huffman coding, Shannon Fano coding, Mutual information,
Channel capacity of discrete channel, Shannon-Hartley law; Trade -off between bandwidth and SNR.
UNIT V:
Error Control Codes
Linear Block Codes: Matrix Description of Linear Block Codes, Error Detection and Error Correction
Capabilities of Linear Block Codes.
Cyclic Codes: Algebraic Structure, Encoding, Syndrome Calculation, Decoding.
Convolution Codes: Encoding, Decoding using State, Tree and Trellis Diagrams, Decoding using
Viterbi Algorithm, Comparison of Error Rates in Coded and Uncoded Transmission.
89
TEXT BOOKS:
rd
1. Principles of Communication Systems - Herbert Taub, Donald L Schiling, Goutam Saha, 3
Edition, Mcgraw-Hill, 2008.
2. Digital and Analog Communication Systems – Sam Shanmugam, John Wiley, 2005.
REFERENCES:
th
1. Digital Communications – John G. Proakis , Masoud Salehi – 5 Edition, Mcgraw-Hill, 2008.
2. Digital Communication – Simon Haykin, Jon Wiley, 2005.
3. Digital Communications – Ian A. Glover, Peter M. Grant, 2nd Edition, Pearson Edu., 2008.
4. Communication Systems – B.P. Lathi, BS Publication, 2006.
90

4 0 0 4
MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ANALYSIS
Prerequisite : Nil.
Course Objective:
• To understand the concepts and importance of economics in managerial problems
• To understand the basic financial management concepts including the principles of financial
analysis
Course Outcomes:
• Students will be able to apply the principles of economics for managerial decisions.
• The students will be able to analyze the financial position of a company with the techniques
of financial accounting and ratio analysis
Unit I Introduction & Demand Analysis: Nature and Scope of Managerial Economics. Demand
Analysis: Demand Determinants, Law of Demand and its exceptions. Elasticity of Demand: Types,
Measurement and Significance of Elasticity of Demand. Demand Forecasting- methods of demand
forecasting.
Unit II Production & Cost Analysis: Production Function – Isoquants and Isocosts, MRTS, Least
Cost Combination of Inputs, Laws of Returns, Internal and External Economies of Scale. Break-even
Analysis (BEA)-Determination of Break-Even Point (simple problems) - Managerial Significance.
Unit III Markets & Forms of Business Organisations: Types of competition and Markets, Features
of Perfect competition and Monopoly. Price-Output Determination in case of Perfect Competition and
Monopoly. Pricing: Objectives and Policies of Pricing. Methods of Pricing. Business: Features and
evaluation of different forms of Business Organisation: Sole Proprietorship, Partnership, Limited
companies.
Unit IV Capital Budgeting: Methods and sources of raising capital - Capital Budgeting: Methods of
Capital Budgeting: Payback Method, Accounting Rate of Return (ARR) and Net Present Value
Method (simple problems).
Unit V Introduction to Financial Accounting & Financial Analysis: Accounting concepts and
Conventions -Double-Entry Book Keeping, Journal, Ledger, Trial Balance- Final Accounts (Trading
Account, Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet with simple adjustments). Financial Analysis:
Analysis and Interpretation of Liquidity Ratios, Activity Ratios, and Capital structure Ratios and
Profitability ratios.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Aryasri: Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, TMH,.
2. Vijay Kumar & Appa Rao Managerial Ecoconomics & Financial Analysis, Cengage.
3. J. V. Prabhakar Rao & P.V. Rao Managerial Ecoconomics & Financial Analysis, Maruthi
Publishers,
REFERENCES:
1. Ambrish Gupta, Financial Accounting for Management, Pearson Education, New Delhi.
2. H. Craig Peterson & W. Cris Lewis, Managerial Economics, Pearson,
3. Lipsey & Chrystel, Economics, Oxford University Press, Domnick Salvatore: Managerial
Economics In a Global Economy, Thomson,.
4. Narayanaswamy: Financial Accounting—A Managerial Perspective, PHI, 2012.
91

0 0 3 2
LINEAR IC APPLICATIONS LAB
Note:
• Verify the functionality of the IC in the given application.
Design and Implementation of :

1. Inverting and Non-inverting Amplifiers using Op Amps.
2. Adder and Subtractor using Op Amp.
3. Comparators using Op Amp.
4. Integrator Circuit using IC 741.
5. Differentiator circuit using Op Amp.
6. Active Filter Applications – LPF, HPF (first order)
7. IC 741 Waveform Generators – Sine, Square wave and Triangular waves.
8. Mono-stable Multivibrator using IC 555.
9. Astable Multivibrator using IC 555.
10. Schmitt Trigger Circuits – using IC 741.
11. IC 565 – PLL Applications.
12. Voltage Regulator using IC 723.
13. Three Terminal Voltage Regulators –7805, 7809, 7912.
92

0 0 3 2
DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS LAB
Design the following:
1. PCM Generation and Detection

2. Differential Pulse Code Modulation
3. Delta Modulation
4. Time Division Multiplexing of 2 Band Limited Signals
5. Frequency Shift Keying: Generation and Detection
6. Phase Shift Keying: Generation and Detection
7. Amplitude Shift Keying: Generation and Detection
8. Study of the spectral characteristics of PAM,
9. Study of the spectral characteristics of QAM.
10. DPSK :Generation and Detection
11. QPSK : Generation and Detection
12. OFDM: Generation and Detection
93

0 0 3 2
DESIGN LAB
Design and Implementation of the following experiments using Integrated Circuits ( ICs) :
1. Design a 16 x 4 priority encoder using two 8 x 3 priority encoder.

2. Design an 16 bit comparator using 4 bit Comparators.
3. Design a model to 53 counter using two decade counters.
4. Design a 450 KHz clock using NAND / NOR gates.
5. Design a 4 bit pseudo random sequence generator using 4 – bit ring counter.
6. Design a 16 x 1 multiplexer using 8 x 1 multiplexer.
7. Design a 16 bit Adder / Subtractor using 4 – bit Adder / Subtractor IC’s
8. Plot the transform Characteristics of 74H,LS,HS series IC’s.
9. Design a 4 – bit gray to Binary and Binary to Gray Converter.
10. Design a two Digit 7 segment display unit using this display the Mod counter output of
experiment 3.
11. Design an 8 bit parallel load and serial out shift register using two 4 bit shift register.
12. Design a 4 digit hex Counter using synchronous and Asynchronous one digit hex counters.
Compute the display between Asynchronous counter and Synchronous counter.
94
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. /MBA) III Year II-Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
CELLULAR AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS

(PE-I)
Prerequisite : Digital Communications
Course Objectives:
The course objectives are:
• To provide the student with an understanding of the Cellular concept, Frequency reuse,
Hand-off strategies.
• To enable the student to analyze and understand wireless and mobile cellular communication
systems over a stochastic fading channel.
• To provide the student with an understanding of Co-channel and Non-Co-channel
interferences.
• To give the student an understanding of cell coverage for signal and traffic, diversity
techniques and mobile antennas.
• To give the student an understanding of frequency management, Channel assignment and
types of handoff.
Course Outcomes:
By the end of the course,
• The student will be able to analyze and design wireless and mobile cellular systems.
• The student will be able to understand impairments due to multipath fading channel.
• The student will be able understand the fundamental techniques to overcome the different
fading effects.
• The student will be able to understand Co-channel and Non Co-channel interferences
• The student will be able to familiar with cell coverage for signal and traffic, diversity
techniques and mobile antennas.
• The student will have an understanding of frequency management, Channel assignment and
types of handoff.
UNIT-I:
Introduction to Cellular Mobile Radio Systems:
Limitations of Conventional Mobile Telephone Systems, Basic Cellular Mobile System, First, Second,
Third and Fourth Generation Cellular Wireless Systems, Uniqueness of Mobile Radio Environment-
Fading -Time Dispersion Parameters, Coherence Bandwidth, Doppler Spread and Coherence Time.
Fundamentals of Cellular Radio System Design:
Concept of Frequency Reuse, Co-Channel Interference, Co-Channel Interference Reduction Factor,
Desired C/I From a Normal Case in a Omni Directional Antenna System, System Capacity, Trunking
and Grade of Service, Improving Coverage and Capacity in Cellular Systems- Cell Splitting,
Sectoring, Microcell Zone Concept.
UNIT-II:
Co-Channel Interference:
Measurement Of Real Time Co-Channel Interference, Design of Antenna System, Antenna
Parameters and Their Effects, Diversity Techniques-Space Diversity, Polarization Diversity,
Frequency Diversity, Time Diversity.
Non-Co-Channel Interference:
Adjacent Channel Interference, Near End Far End Interference, Cross Talk, Effects on Coverage and
Interference by Power Decrease, Antenna Height Decrease, Effects of Cell Site Components.
UNIT-III:
Cell Coverage for Signal and Traffic:
Signal Reflections in Flat And Hilly Terrain, Effect of Human Made Structures, Phase Difference
Between Direct and Reflected Paths, Constant Standard Deviation, Straight Line Path Loss Slope,
95
General Formula for Mobile Propagation Over Water and Flat Open Area, Near and Long Distance
Propagation, Path Loss From a Point to Point Prediction Model in Different Conditions, Merits of Lee
Model.
Cell Site and Mobile Antennas:
Space Diversity Antennas, Umbrella Pattern Antennas, Minimum Separation of Cell Site Antennas,
Mobile Antennas.
UNIT-IV:
Frequency Management and Channel Assignment:
Numbering And Grouping, Setup Access And Paging Channels, Channel Assignments to Cell Sites
and Mobile Units, Channel Sharing and Borrowing, Sectorization, Overlaid Cells, Non Fixed Channel
Assignment.
UNIT-V:
Handoffs and Dropped Calls:
Handoff Initiation, Types of Handoff, Delaying Handoff, Advantages of Handoff, Power Difference
Handoff, Forced Handoff, Mobile Assisted and Soft Handoff, Intersystem Handoff, Introduction to
Dropped Call Rates and their Evaluation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mobile Cellular Telecommunications – W.C.Y. Lee, Mc Graw Hill, 2nd Edn., 1989.
nd
2. Wireless Communications - Theodore. S. Rapport, Pearson Education, 2 Edn., 2002.
3. Mobile Cellular Communication - Gottapu sashibhushana Rao, Pearson, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. Principles of Mobile Communications – Gordon L. Stuber, Springer International, 2 Edn., 2001.
2. Modern Wireless Communications-Simon Haykin, Michael Moher, Pearson Eduction, 2005.
3. Wireless Communications Theory and Techniques, Asrar U. H .Sheikh, Springer, 2004.
4. Wireless Communications and Networking, Vijay Garg, Elsevier Publications, 2007.
5. Wireless Communications – Andrea Goldsmith, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
96

4 0 0 4
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND OPERATING SYSTEMS

(PE-I)
Prerequisite : Nil
Course Objectives:
• To have a thorough understanding of the basic structure and operation of a digital computer.
• To discuss in detail the operation of the arithmetic unit including the algorithms &
implementation of fixed-point and floating-point addition, subtraction, multiplication & division.
• To study the different ways of communicating with I/O devices and standard I/O interfaces.
• To study the hierarchical memory system including cache memories and virtual memory.
• To demonstrate the knowledge of functions of operating system memory management
scheduling, file system and interface, distributed systems, security and dead locks.
• To implement a significant portion of an Operating System.
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, students will have thorough knowledge about:
• Basic structure of a digital computer
• Arithmetic operations of binary number system
• The organization of the Control unit, Arithmetic and Logical unit, Memory unit and the I/O unit.
• Operating system functions, types, system calls.
• Memory management techniques and dead lock avoidance operating systems' file system
implementation and its interface.
UNIT-I:
Basic Structure of Computers: Computer Types, Functional UNIT, Basic OPERATIONAL Concepts,
Bus Structures, Software, Performance, Multiprocessors and Multi Computers, Data Representation,
Fixed Point Representation, Floating – Point Representation.
Register Transfer Language and Micro Operations: Register Transfer
Language, Register Transfer Bus and Memory Transfers, Arithmetic Micro Operations, Logic Micro
Operations, Shift Micro Operations, Arithmetic Logic Shift Unit, Instruction Codes, Computer Registers
Computer Instructions– Instruction Cycle.
Memory – Reference Instructions, Input – Output and Interrupt, STACK
Organization, Instruction Formats, Addressing Modes, DATA Transfer and Manipulation, Program
Control, Reduced Instruction Set Computer.
UNIT -II:
Micro Programmed Control: Control Memory, Address Sequencing,
Microprogram Examples, Design of Control Unit, Hard Wired Control,
Microprogrammed Control.
The Memory System: Basic Concepts of Semiconductor RAM Memories, Read-Only Memories,
Cache Memories Performance Considerations, Virtual99 Memories Secondary Storage, Introduction
to RAID.
UNIT -III:
Input-Output Organization: Peripheral Devices, Input-Output Interface,
Asynchronous Data Transfer Modes, Priority Interrupt, Direct Memory Access, Input –Output
Processor (IOP), Serial Communication; Introduction to Peripheral Components, Interconnect (PCI)
Bus, Introduction to Standard Serial Communication Protocols like RS232, USB, IEEE1394.
UNIT -IV:
97
Operating Systems Overview: Overview of Computer Operating Systems Functions, Protection and
Security, Distributed Systems, Special Purpose Systems, Operating Systems Structures-Operating
System Services and Systems Calls, System Programs, Operating Systems Generation.
Memory Management: Swapping, Contiguous Memory Allocation, Paging, Structure of The Page
Table, Segmentation, Virtual Memory, Demand Paging, Page-Replacement Algorithms, Allocation of
Frames, Thrashing Case Studies - UNIX, Linux, Windows
Principles of Deadlock: System Model, Deadlock Characterization,
Deadlock Prevention, Detection and Avoidance, Recovery from Deadlock.
UNIT -V:
File System Interface: The Concept of a File, Access Methods, Directory Structure, File System
Mounting, File Sharing, Protection.
File System Implementation: File System Structure, File System
Implementation, Directory Implementation, Allocation Methods, Free-Space Management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Computer Organization – Carl Hamacher, Zvonks Vranesic, SafeaZaky, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill.
2. Computer Systems Architecture – M.Moris Mano, 3rd Edition, Pearson
3. Operating System Concepts- Abraham Silberchatz, Peter B. Galvin,Greg Gagne, 8th Edition, John
Wiley.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Computer Organization and Architecture – William Stallings 6th Edition, Pearson
2. Structured Computer Organization – Andrew S. Tanenbaum, 4th Edition PHI
3. Fundamentals of Computer Organization and Design – Sivaraama Dandamudi Springer Int.
Edition.
4. Operating Systems – Internals and Design Principles, Stallings, 6th Edition–2009, Pearson
Education.
5. Modern Operating Systems, Andrew S Tanenbaum 2nd Edition, PHI.
6. Principles of Operating Systems, B.L.Stuart, Cengage Learning, India Edition.
98

4 0 0 4
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

(PE-I)
Course Objectives:
• To comprehend the relation between human visual system and machine perception and
processing of digital images.
• To provide a detailed approach towards image processing applications like enhancement,
segmentation and compression.
Course Outcomes:
• Exploration of the limitations of the computational methods on digital images.
• Expected to implement the spatial and frequency domain image transforms on enhancement
and restoration of images.
• Elaborate understanding on image enhancement techniques.
• Expected to define the need for compression and evaluate the basic compression algorithms.
UNIT-I:
Digital Image Fundamentals & Image Transforms: Digital Image Fundamentals, Sampling and
Quantization, Relationship between Pixels.
Image Transforms: 2-D FFT, Properties, Walsh Transform, Hadamard Transform, Discrete Cosine
Transform, Haar Transform, Slant Transform, Hotelling Transform.
UNIT-II:
Image Enhancement (Spatial Domain): Introduction, Image Enhancement in Spatial Domain,
Enhancement Through Point Processing, Types of Point Processing, Histogram Manipulation, Linear
and Non – Linear Gray Level Transformation, Local or Neighborhood creterion, Median Filter, Spatial
Domain High-Pass Filtering.
Image Enhancement (Frequency Domain): Filtering in Frequency Domain, Low Pass (Smoothing)
and High Pass (Sharpening) Filters in Frequency Domain.
UNIT -III:
Image Restoration: Degradation Model, Algebraic Approach to Restoration, Inverse Filtering, Least
Mean Square Filters, Constrained Least Squares Restoration, Interactive Restoration.
UNIT -IV:
Image Segmentation: Detection of Discontinuities, Edge Linking And Boundary Detection,
thresholding, Region Oriented Segmentation.
Morphological Image Processing: Dilation and Erosion: Dilation, Structuring Element
Decomposition, Erosion, Combining Dilation and Erosion, Opening and Closing, Hit or Miss
Transformation.
UNIT -V:
Image Compression: Redundancies and their Removal Methods, Fidelity Criteria, Image
Compression Models, Huffman and Arithmetic Coding, Error Free Compression, Lossy Compression,
Lossy and Lossless Predictive Coding, Transform Based Compression, JPEG 2000 Standards.
TEXT BOOKS:
rd
1. Digital Image Processing - Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, 3 Edition, Pearson, 2008
2. Digital Image Processing- S Jayaraman, S Esakkirajan, T Veerakumar- TMH, 2010.
99
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Digital Image Processing and Analysis-Human and Computer Vision Application with using CVIP
nd
Tools - Scotte Umbaugh, 2 Ed, CRC Press, 2011
2. Digital Image Processing using MATLAB – Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E Woods and Steven L.
Eddings, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2010.
3. Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing – A.K.Jain , PHI, 1989
4. Digital Image Processing and Computer Vision – Somka, Hlavac, Boyle- Cengage Learning
(Indian edition) 2008.
5. Introductory Computer Vision Imaging Techniques and Solutions- Adrian low, 2008, 2nd Edition
6. Introduction to Image Processing & Analysis – John C. Russ, J. Christian Russ, CRC Press,
2010.
7. Digital Image Processing with MATLAB & Labview – Vipula Singh, Elsevier.
100

4 0 0 4
TELEVISION ENGINEERING
(PE-I)
Prerequisite : Nil
Course Objectives:
• Study the different camera and picture tubes.
• Know about various standard TV channels.
• Study about TV receiver, sync separation, detector etc.,
• Study about color signal encoding ,decoding and receiver.
Course Outcomes:
• Expected to understand the concept of TV transmission and reception.
• Acquired knowledge about complete TV receiver.
• Expected to learn about color separation, color coding etc.,
UNIT–I:
Introduction:
TV transmitter and receivers, synchronization. Geometric form and aspect ratio, image continuity,
interlaced scanning, picture resolution, Composite video signal, TV standards. Camera tubes: image
Orthicon, Plumbicon, vidicon, silicon Diode Array vidicon, Comparison of camera tubes, Monochrome
TV camera,
TV Signal Transmission and Propagation:
Picture Signal transmission, positive and negative modulation, VSB transmission, sound signal
transmission, standard channel BW,TV transmitter, TV signal propagation, interference, TV broadcast
channels, TV transmission Antennas.
UNIT –II:
Monochrome TV Receiver:
RF tuner, IF subsystem, video amplifier, sound section, sync separation and processing, deflection
circuits, scanning circuits, AGC, noise cancellation, video and inter carrier sound signal detection,
vision IF subsystem of Black and White receivers, Receiver sound system: FM detection, FM Sound
detectors, and typical applications.
UNIT –III:
Sync Separation and Detection:
TV Receiver Tuners, Tuner operation, VHF and UHF tuners, digital tuning techniques, remote control
of receiver functions. Sync Separation, AFC and Deflection Oscillators: Synchronous separation, k
noise in sync pulses, separation of frame and line sync pulses. AFC, single ended AFC circuit,
Deflection Oscillators, deflection drive Ics, Receiver Antennas, Picture Tubes.
UNIT–IV:
Color Television:
Colour signal generation, additive colour mixing, video signals for colours, colour difference signals,
encoding, Perception of brightness and colours luminance signal, Encoding of colour difference
signals, formation of chrominance signals, color cameras, Colour picture tubes.
Color Signal Encoding and Decoding:

NTSC colour system PAL colour system, PAL encoder, PAL-D Decoder, chrome signal amplifiers,
separation of U and V signals, colour burst separation, Burst phase discriminator, ACC amplifier,
Reference oscillator, Indent and colour killer circuits, U& V demodulators.
UNIT –V:
Color Receiver:
Introduction to colour receiver, Electron tuners, IF subsystem, Y-signal channel, Chroma decoder,
Separation of U & V Color, Phasors, synchronous demodulators, Sub carrier generation, raster
circuits.
101
Digital TV:
Introduction to Digital TV, Digital Satellite TV, Direct to Home Satellite TV, Digital TV Transmitter,
Digital TV Receiver, Digital Terrestrial TV, LCD TV, LED TV, CCD Image Sensors, HDTV.
TEXT BOOKS:
nd
1. Television and Video Engineering- A.M.Dhake, 2 Edition.
2. Modern Television Practice – Principles, Technology and Service- R.R.Gallatin, New Age
International Publication, 2002.
3. Monochrome and Colour TV- R.R. Gulati, New Age International Publication, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Colour Television Theory and Practice-S.P.Bali, TMH, 1994.
2. Basic Television and Video Systems-B.Grob and C.E.Herndon, McGraw Hill, 1999.
102

4 0 0 4
COMPUTER NETWORKS
(PE-II)
Prerequisite : Digital Communications
Course Objectives:
• To introduce the fundamental various types of computer networks.
• To demonstrate the TCP/IP and OSI models with merits and demerits.
• To explore the various layers of OSI Model.
• To introduce UDP and TCP Models.
• To have the concept of different routing techniques for data communications.
Course Outcomes:
• Students should understand and explore the basics of Computer Networks and Various
Protocols. He/She will be in a position to understand the World Wide Web concepts.
• Students will be in a position to administrate a network and flow of information further he/she
can understand easily the concepts of network security, Mobile and ad hoc networks.
UNIT I:
Introduction to Networks: Internet, Protocols and Standards, The OSI Model, Layers in OSI Model,
TCP/IP Suite, Addressing.
Physical Layer: Multiplexing, Transmission Media, Circuit Switched Networks, Datagram Networks,
Virtual Circuit Networks.
UNIT II:
Data Link Layer: Introduction, Checksum, Framing, Flow and Error Control, Noiseless Channels,
Noisy Channels, Random Access Controlled Access, Channelization, IEEE Standards, Ethernet,
Giga-Bit Ethernet, Wireless LANs, SONET-SDH, Frame Relay and ATM.
UNIT III:
Network Layer: Logical Addressing, Internetworking, Tunneling, Address Mapping, ICMP, IGMP,
Forwarding, Routing-Flooding, Bellman& Ford, Disjkstra’s routing protocols, RIP, OSPF, BGP,- and
Multicast Routing Protocols. Connecting Devices-Passive Hubs, Repeaters, Active Hubs, Bridges,
Routers.
UNIT IV:
Transport Layer: Process to Process Delivery, UDP, TCP and SCTP Protocols, Congestion,
Congestion Control, Quality of Service.
Application Layer: Domain Name Space, DNS in Internet, Electronic Mail, File Transfer Protocol,
WWW, HTTP, SNMP, Multi-Media.
UNIT V:
Network Security: Security services, mechanisms and attacks, IPSec, SSL, VPN, Firewall.
Bluetooth, Zigbee, IPv4, IPv6.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Data Communications and Networking – Behrouz A. Forouzan, Fourth Edition TMH, 2006.
2. Computer Networks -- Andrew S Tanenbaum, 4th Edition, Pearson Education.
REFERENCES:
1. An Engineering Approach to Computer Networks-S.Keshav, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education
2. Understanding Communications and Networks, 3rd Edition, W.A.Shay, Cengage Learning.
3. Computer and Communication Networks, Nader F. Mir, Pearson Education
4. Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet, James F.Kurose, K.W.Ross,
3rd Edition, Pearson Education.
5. Data and Computer Communications, G.S.Hura and M.Singhal, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis
Group.
6. Data Communications and Computer Networks, P.C.Gupta, PHI.
103

4 0 0 4
DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN

(PE-II)
Prerequisite : Switching Theory and Logic Design
Course Objectives:
• To provide extended knowledge of digital logic circuits in the form of state model approach.
• To provide an overview of system design approach using programmable logic devices.
• To provide and understand of fault models and test methods.
Course Outcomes:
• To understands the minimization of Finite state machine.
• To exposes the design approaches using ROM’s, PAL’s and PLA’s.
• To provide in depth understanding of Fault models.
• To understands test pattern generation techniques for fault detection.
• To design fault diagnosis in sequential circuits.
UNIT- I: Minimization and Transformation of Sequential Machines

The Finite State Model – Capabilities and limitations of FSM – State equivalence and machine
minimization – Simplification of incompletely specified machines.
Fundamental mode model – Flow table – State reduction – Minimal closed covers – Races, Cycles
and Hazards.
UNIT- II: Digital Design

Digital Design Using ROMs, PALs and PLAs , BCD Adder, 32 – bit adder, State graphs for control
circuits, Scoreboard and Controller, A shift and add multiplier, Array multiplier, Keypad Scanner,
Binary divider.
UNIT - III: SM Charts

State machine charts, Derivation of SM Charts, Realization of SM Chart, Implementation of Binary
Multiplier, dice game controller.
UNIT- IV: Fault Modeling & Test Pattern Generation

Logic Fault model – Fault detection & Redundancy- Fault equivalence and fault location –Fault
dominance – Single stuck at fault model – Multiple stuck at fault models –Bridging fault model.
Fault diagnosis of combinational circuits by conventional methods – Path sensitization techniques,
Boolean Difference method – Kohavi algorithm – Test algorithms – D algorithm, PODEM, Random
testing, Transition count testing, Signature analysis and test bridging faults.
UNIT- V: Fault Diagnosis in Sequential Circuits

Circuit Test Approach, Transition Check Approach – State identification and fault detection
experiment, Machine identification, Design of fault detection experiment
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals of Logic Design – Charles H. Roth, 5th ed., Cengage Learning.
2. Digital Systems Testing and Testable Design – Miron Abramovici, Melvin A. Breuer and Arthur D.
Friedman- John Wiley & Sons Inc.
3. Logic Design Theory – N. N. Biswas, PHI
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1. Switching and Finite Automata Theory – Z. Kohavi , 2 ed., 2001, TMH
th
2. Digital Design – Morris Mano, M.D.Ciletti, 4 Edition, PHI.
3. Digital Circuits and Logic Design – Samuel C. Lee , PHI
104

4 0 0 4
ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION

(PE-II)
Prerequisite : Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Course Objectives:
• It provides an understanding of various measuring systems functioning and metrics for
performance analysis.
• Provides understanding of principle of operation, working of different electronic instruments
viz. signal generators, signal analyzers, recorders and measuring equipment.
• Provides understanding of use of various measuring techniques for measurement of different
physical parameters using different classes of transducers.
Course Outcomes:
On completion of this course student can be able to
• Identify the various electronic instruments based on their specifications for carrying out a
particular task of measurement.
• Measure various physical parameters by appropriately selecting the transducers.
• Use various types of signal generators, signal analyzers for generating and analyzing various
real-time signals.
UNIT I:
Block Schematics of Measuring Systems: Performance Characteristics, Static Characteristics,
Accuracy, Precision, Resolution, Types of Errors, Gaussian Error, Root Sum Squares formula,
Dynamic Characteristics, Repeatability, Reproducibility, Fidelity, Lag ;Measuring Instruments: DC
Voltmeters, D’ Arsonval Movement, DC Current Meters, AC Voltmeters and Current Meters,
Ohmmeters, Multimeters, Meter Protection, Extension of Range, True RMS Responding Voltmeters,
Specifications of Instruments.
UNIT II:
Signal Analyzers: AF, HF Wave Analyzers, Harmonic Distortion, Heterodyne wave Analyzers,
Spectrum Analyzers, Power Analyzers, Capacitance-Voltage Meters, Oscillators. Signal Generators:
AF, RF Signal Generators, Sweep Frequency Generators, Pulse and Square wave Generators,
Function Generators, Arbitrary Waveform Generator, Video Signal Generators, and Specifications
UNIT III:
Oscilloscopes: CRT, Block Schematic of CRO, Time Base Circuits, Lissajous Figures, CRO Probes,
High Frequency CRO Considerations, Delay lines, Applications: Measurement of Time, Period and
Frequency Specifications.
Special Purpose Oscilloscopes: Dual Trace, Dual Beam CROs, Sampling Oscilloscopes, Storage
Oscilloscopes, Digital Storage CROs.
UNIT IV:
Transducers: Classification, Strain Gauges, Bounded, unbounded; Force and Displacement
Transducers, Resistance Thermometers, Hotwire Anemometers, LVDT, Thermocouples, Synchros,
Special Resistance Thermometers, Digital Temperature sensing system, Piezoelectric Transducers,
Variable Capacitance Transducers, Magneto Strictive Transducers.
UNIT V:
Bridges: Wheat Stone Bridge, Kelvin Bridge, and Maxwell Bridge.
Measurement of Physical Parameters: Flow Measurement, Displacement Meters, Liquid level
Measurement, Measurement of Humidity and Moisture, Velocity, Force, Pressure – High Pressure,
Vacuum level, Temperature -Measurements, Data Acquisition Systems.
105
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation – K. Lal Kishore, Pearson Education 2010.
nd
2. Electronic Instrumentation: H.S.Kalsi – TMH, 2 Edition 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements – David A. Bell, Oxford Univ. Press, 1997.
2. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques: A.D. Helbincs, W.D. Cooper:
PHI 5th Edition 2003.
3. Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation: B.M. Oliver, J.M. Cage TMH Reprint 2009.
4. Industrial Instrumentation: T.R. Padmanabham Springer 2009.
106

4 0 0 4
SCRIPTING LANGUAGES
(PE-II)
Prerequisite : Nil
Course Objectives: The goal of the course is to study:
• The principles of scripting languages.
• Motivation for and applications of scripting.
• Difference between scripting languages and non- scripting languages.
• Types of scripting languages.
• Scripting languages such as PERL, TCL/TK, python and BASH.
• Creation of programs in the Linux environment.
• Usage of scripting languages in IC design flow.
Course Outcomes:
Upon learning the course, the student will have the:
• Ability to create and run scripts using PERL/TCl/Python in IC design flow.

• Ability to use Linux environment and write programs for automation of scripts in VLSI tool
design flow.
Unit – 1 : Linux Basics
Introduction to Linux , File System of the Linux, General usage of Linux kernel & basic commands,
Linux users and group, Permissions for file, directory and users, searching a file & directory, zipping
and unzipping concepts.
Unit – 2 : Linux Networking
Introduction to Networking in Linux, Network basics & Tools, File Transfer Protocol in Linux, Network
file system, Domain Naming Services, Dynamic hosting configuration Protocol & Network information
Services.
Unit – 3 : Perl Scripting.
Introduction to Perl Scripting, working with simple values, Lists and Hashes, Loops and Decisions,
Regular Expressions, Files and Data in Perl Scripting, References & Subroutines, Running and
Debugging Perl, Modules, Object – Oriented Perl.
Unit – 4 : Tcl / Tk Scripting
Tcl Fundamentals, String and Pattern Matching, Tcl Data Structures, Control Flow Commands,
Procedures and Scope, Evel, Working with Unix, Reflection and Debugging, Script Libraries, Tk
Fundamentals, Tk by examples, The Pack Geometry Manager, Binding Commands to X Events,
Buttons and Menus, Simple Tk Widgets, Entry and List box Widgets Focus, Grabs and Dialogs.
Unit – 5 : Python Scripting.
Introduction to Python, using the Python Interpreter, More Control Flow Tools, Data Structures,
Modules, Input and Output, Errors and Exceptions, Classes, Brief Tour of the Standard Library.
Text Books:
1. Python Tutorial by Guido Van Rossum, Fred L. Drake Jr. editor , Release 2.6.4
2. Practical Programming in Tcl and Tk by Brent Welch, Updated for Tcl 7.4 and Tk 4.0.
3. Teach Yorself Perl in 21 days by David Till.
4. Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 : System Administration Guide Copyright, 2005 Red Hat Inc.
Reference Books:
nd
1. Learning Python – 2 Ed., Mark Lutz and David Ascher, 2003, O’Reilly.
rd
2. Perl in 24 Hours – 3 Ed., Clinton Pierce, 2005, Sams Publishing.
3. Learning Perl – 4th Ed. Randal Schwartz, Tom Phoenix and Brain d foy. 2005.
4. Jython Essentials – Samuele Pedroni and Noel Pappin.2002. O’Reilly.
rd
5. Programming Perl – Larry Wall, Tom Christiansen and John Orwant, 3 Edition, O’Reilly, 2000.
(ISBN 0596000278)
107

4 0 0 4
MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS
Prerequisite : Computer Organization and Operating Systems

Course Objectives:
• To develop an understanding of the operations of microprocessors and micro controllers;
machine language programming and interfacing techniques.
Course Outcomes:
• Understands the internal architecture and organization of 8086, 8051 and ARM
processors/controllers.
• Understands the interfacing techniques to 8086 and 8051 and can develop assembly
language programming to design microprocessor/ micro controller based systems.
UNIT -I:
8086 Architecture: 8086 Architecture-Functional diagram, Register Organization, Memory
Segmentation, Programming Model, Memory addresses, Physical Memory Organization, Architecture
of 8086, Signal descriptions of 8086, interrupts of 8086.
Instruction Set and Assembly Language Programming of 8086: Instruction formats, Addressing
modes, Instruction Set, Assembler Directives, Macros, and Simple Programs involving Logical,
Branch and Call Instructions, Sorting, String Manipulations.
UNIT -II:
Introduction to Microcontrollers: Overview of 8051 Microcontroller, Architecture, I/O Ports, Memory
Organization, Addressing Modes and Instruction set of 8051.
8051 Real Time Control: Programming Timer Interrupts, Programming External Hardware Interrupts,
Programming the Serial Communication Interrupts, Programming 8051 Timers and Counters
UNIT –III:
I/O And Memory Interface: LCD, Keyboard, External Memory RAM, ROM Interface, ADC, DAC
Interface to 8051.
Serial Communication and Bus Interface: Serial Communication Standards, Serial Data Transfer
Scheme, On board Communication Interfaces-I2C Bus, SPI Bus, UART; External Communication
Interfaces-RS232,USB.
UNIT –IV:
ARM Architecture: ARM Processor fundamentals, ARM Architecture – Register, CPSR, Pipeline,
exceptions and interrupts interrupt vector table, ARM instruction set – Data processing, Branch
instructions, load store instructions, Software interrupt instructions, Program status register
instructions, loading constants, Conditional execution, Introduction to Thumb instructions.
Unit – V:
Advanced ARM Processors: Introduction to CORTEX Processor and its architecture, OMAP
Processor and its Architecture.
TEXT BOOKS:
nd
1. Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals – A. K. Ray and K.M. Bhurchandani, TMH, 2 Edition
2006.
2. The 8051 Microcontroller, Kenneth. J. Ayala, Cengage Learning, 3rd Ed.
3. ARM System Developers guide, Andrew N SLOSS, Dominic SYMES, Chris WRIGHT, Elsevier,
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Microprocessors and Interfacing, D. V. Hall, TMGH, 2nd Edition 2006.
2. Introduction to Embedded Systems, Shibu K.V, TMH, 2009
3. The 8051Microcontrollers, Architecture and Programming and Applications -K.Uma Rao, Andhe
Pallavi, Pearson, 2009.
4. ARM Reference Manuals
5. Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the OMAP-L138 Experimenter, Donald
Reay,WILEY.
108

4 0 0 4
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Course Objectives:
This course is an essential course that provides design techniques for
processing all type of signals in various fields. The main objectives are:
• To provide background and fundamental material for the analysis and processing of digital
signals.
• To familiarize the relationships between continuous-time and discrete time signals and systems.
• To study fundamentals of time, frequency and Z-plane analysis and to discuss the inter-
relationships of these analytic method.
• To study the designs and structures of digital (IIR and FIR) filters from analysis to synthesis for a
given specifications.
• The impetus is to introduce a few real-world signal processing applications.
• To acquaint in FFT algorithms, Multi-rate signal processing techniques and finite word length
effects.
Course Outcomes:
On completion of this subject, the student should be able to:
• Perform time, frequency and Z -transform analysis on signals and systems.
• Understand the inter-relationship between DFT and various transforms.
• Understand the significance of various filter structures and effects of round off errors.
• Design a digital filter for a given specification.
• Understand the fast computation of DFT and appreciate the FFT processing.
• Understand the tradeoffs between normal and multi rate DSP techniques and finite length word
effects.
Unit I:
Introduction: Introduction to Digital Signal Processing: Discrete Time Signals & Sequences,
conversion of continuous to discrete signal, Normalized Frequency, Linear Shift Invariant Systems,
Stability, and Causality, linear differential equation to difference equation, Linear Constant Coefficient
Difference Equations, Frequency Domain Representation of Discrete Time Signals and Systems
Realization of Digital Filters: Applications of Z – Transforms, Solution of Difference Equations of
Digital Filters, System Function, Stability Criterion, Frequency Response of Stable Systems,
Realization of Digital Filters – Direct, Canonic, Cascade and Parallel Forms.
Unit II:
Discrete Fourier series: Fourier Series, Fourier Transform, Laplace Transform, Z-Transform relation,
DFS Representation of Periodic Sequences, Properties of Discrete Fourier Series, Discrete Fourier
Transforms: Properties of DFT, Linear Convolution of Sequences using DFT, Computation of DFT:
Over-Lap Add Method, Over-Lap Save Method, Relation between DTFT, DFS, DFT and Z-Transform.
Fast Fourier Transforms: Fast Fourier Transforms (FFT) - Radix-2 Decimation-in-Time and
Decimation-in-Frequency FFT Algorithms, Inverse FFT, and FFT with General Radix-N.
Unit III:
IIR Digital Filters: Analog filter approximations – Butterworth and Chebyshev, Design of IIR Digital
Filters from Analog Filters, Step and Impulse Invariant Techniques, Bilinear Transformation Method,
Spectral Transformations.
Unit IV:
FIR Digital Filters: Characteristics of FIR Digital Filters, Frequency Response, Design of FIR Filters:
Fourier Method, Digital Filters using Window Techniques, Frequency Sampling Technique,
Comparison of IIR & FIR filters.
109
Unit V:
Multirate Digital Signal Processing: Introduction, Down Sampling, Decimation, Upsampling,
Interpolation, Sampling Rate Conversion, Conversion of Band Pass Signals, Concept of Resampling.
Finite Word Length Effects: Limit cycles, Overflow Oscillations, Round-off Noise in IIR Digital Filters,
Computational Output Round Off Noise, Methods to Prevent Overflow, Trade Off Between Round Off
and Overflow Noise, Measurement of Coefficient Quantization Effects through Pole-Zero Movement,
Dead Band Effects.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms, and Applications: John G. Proakis, Dimitris G.
Manolakis, Pearson Education / PHI, 2007.
2. Discrete Time Signal Processing – A. V. Oppenheim and R.W. Schaffer, PHI, 2009
3. Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing – Loney Ludeman, John Wiley, 2009
REFERENCES:
1. Digital Signal Processing – Fundamentals and Applications – Li Tan, Elsevier, 2008
2. Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing using MATLAB – Robert J. Schilling, Sandra L. Harris,
Thomson, 2007
3. Digital Signal Processing – S.Salivahanan, A.Vallavaraj and C.Gnanapriya, TMH, 2009
4. Discrete Systems and Digital Signal Processing with MATLAB – Taan S. EIAli, CRC press, 2009.
nd
5. Digital Signal Processing - A Practical approach, Emmanuel C. Ifeachor and Barrie W. Jervis, 2
Edition, Pearson Education, 2009
110

0 0 3 1
ADVANCED ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB
1. Introduction
The introduction of the Advanced Communication Skills Lab is considered essential at 3rd year level.
At this stage, the students need to prepare themselves for their careers which may require them to
listen to, read, speak and write in English both for their professional and interpersonal communication
in the globalised context.
The proposed course should be a laboratory course to enable students to use ‘good’ English and
perform the following:
• Gathering ideas and information to organise ideas relevantly and coherently.
• Engaging in debates.
• Participating in group discussions.
• Facing interviews.
• Writing project/research reports/technical reports.
• Making oral presentations.
• Writing formal letters.
• Transferring information from non-verbal to verbal texts and vice-versa.
• Taking part in social and professional communication.
2. Objectives:
This Lab focuses on using multi-media instruction for language development to meet the following
targets:
• To improve the students’ fluency in English, through a well-developed vocabulary and enable
them to listen to English spoken at normal conversational speed by educated English
speakers and respond appropriately in different socio-cultural and professional contexts.
• Further, they would be required to communicate their ideas relevantly and coherently in
writing.
• To prepare all the students for their placements.
Learning Outcomes
• Accomplishment of sound vocabulary and its proper use contextually.
• Flair in Writing and felicity in written expression.
• Enhanced job prospects.
• Effective Speaking Abilities
3. Syllabus:
The following course content to conduct the activities is prescribed for the Advanced Communication
Skills (ACS) Lab:
1. Activities on Fundamentals of Inter-personal Communication and Building Vocabulary -
Starting a conversation – responding appropriately and relevantly – using the right body
language – Role Play in different situations & Discourse Skills- using visuals - Synonyms and
antonyms, word roots, one-word substitutes, prefixes and suffixes, study of word origin,
business vocabulary, analogy, idioms and phrases, collocations & usage of vocabulary.
2. Activities on Reading Comprehension –General Vs Local comprehension, reading for facts,
guessing meanings from context, scanning, skimming, inferring meaning, critical reading &
effective googling.
3. Activities on Writing Skills – Structure and presentation of different types of writing – letter
writing/Resume writing/ e-correspondence/ Technical report writing/ Portfolio writing – planning
for writing – improving one’s writing.
4. Activities on Presentation Skills – Oral presentations (individual and group) through JAM
sessions/seminars/PPTs and written presentations through posters/projects/reports/ e-
mails/assignments etc.
111
5. Activities on Group Discussion and Interview Skills – Dynamics of group discussion,

intervention, summarizing, modulation of voice, body language, relevance, fluency and
organization of ideas and rubrics for evaluation- Concept and process, pre-interview planning,
opening strategies, answering strategies, interview through tele-conference & video-conference
and Mock Interviews.
4. Minimum Requirement:
The Advanced Communication Skills (ACS) Laboratory shall have the following infra-structural
facilities to accommodate at least 35 students in the lab:
• Spacious room with appropriate acoustics
• Round Tables with movable chairs
• Audio-visual aids
• LCD Projector
• Public Address system
• P – IV Processor, Hard Disk – 80 GB, RAM–512 MB Minimum, Speed – 2.8 GHZ
• T. V, a digital stereo & Camcorder
• Headphones of High quality
5. Prescribed Lab Manual: A book titled A Course Book of Advanced Communication Skills
(ACS) Lab published by Universities Press, Hyderabad.
6. Suggested Software:
The software consisting of the prescribed topics elaborated above should be procured and used.
• Oxford Advanced Learner’s Compass, 8th Edition

• DELTA’s key to the Next Generation TOEFL Test: Advanced Skill Practice.
• Lingua TOEFL CBT Insider, by Dreamtech
• TOEFL & GRE (KAPLAN, AARCO & BARRONS, USA, Cracking GRE by CLIFFS)
• The following software from ‘train2success.com’
Preparing for being Interviewed
Positive Thinking
Interviewing Skills
Telephone Skills
Time Management
7. Books Recommended:
1. Technical Communication by Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta Sharma, Oxford University Press
2009.
2. English Language Communication : A Reader cum Lab Manual Dr A Ramakrishna Rao, Dr G
Natanam & Prof SA Sankaranarayanan, Anuradha Publications, Chennai 2008.
3. Advanced Communication Skills Laboratory Manual by Sudha Rani, D, Pearson Education
2011.
4. Technical Communication by Paul V. Anderson. 2007. Cengage Learning pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
5. Business and Professional Communication: Keys for Workplace Excellence. Kelly M.
Quintanilla & Shawn T. Wahl. Sage South Asia Edition. Sage Publications. 2011.
6. The Basics of Communication: A Relational Perspective. Steve Duck & David T. McMahan.
Sage South Asia Edition. Sage Publications. 2012.
7. English Vocabulary in Use series, Cambridge University Press 2008.
8. Management Shapers Series by Universities Press(India)Pvt Ltd., Himayatnagar, Hyderabad
2008.
9. Handbook for Technical Communication by David A. McMurrey & Joanne Buckley. 2012.
Cengage Learning.
10. Communication Skills by Leena Sen, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
11. Handbook for Technical Writing by David A McMurrey & Joanne Buckely CENGAGE Learning
2008.
12. Job Hunting by Colm Downes, Cambridge University Press 2008.
13. Master Public Speaking by Anne Nicholls, JAICO Publishing House, 2006.
112
14. English for Technical Communication for Engineering Students, Aysha Vishwamohan,
Tata Mc Graw-Hil 2009.
15. Books on TOEFL/GRE/GMAT/CAT/ IELTS by Barron’s/DELTA/Cambridge University Press.
16. International English for Call Centres by Barry Tomalin and Suhashini Thomas, Macmillan
Publishers, 2009.
DISTRIBUTION AND WEIGHTAGE OF MARKS:

Advanced Communication Skills Lab Practicals:
1. The practical examinations for the ACS Laboratory practice shall be conducted as per the
University norms prescribed for the core engineering practical sessions.
2. For the English Language lab sessions, there shall be continuous evaluation during the year
for 25 sessional marks and 50 End Examination marks. Of the 25 marks, 15 marks shall be
awarded for day-to-day work and 10 marks to be awarded by conducting Internal Lab Test(s).
The End Examination shall be conducted by the teacher concerned, by inviting the External
Examiner from outside. In case of the non-availability of the External Examiner, other teacher
of the same department can act as the External Examiner.
Mini Project: As a part of Internal Evaluation

1. Seminar/ Professional Presentation
2. A Report on the same has to be prepared and presented.
* Teachers may use their discretion to choose topics relevant and suitable to the needs
of students.
* Not more than two students to work on each mini project.
* Students may be assessed by their performance both in oral presentation and written
report.
113

0 0 3 2
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB
The Programs shall be implemented in Software (Using MATLAB / Lab View / C Programming/
Equivalent) and Hardware (Using TI / Analog Devices / Motorola / Equivalent DSP processors).
1. Generation of Sinusoidal Waveform / Signal based on Recursive Difference Equations

2. Histogram of White Gaussian Noise and Uniformly Distributed Noise.
3. To find DFT / IDFT of given DT Signal
4. To find Frequency Response of a given System given in Transfer Function/ Differential equation
form.
5. Obtain Fourier series coefficients by formula and using FET and compare for half sine wave.
6. Implementation of FFT of given Sequence
7. Determination of Power Spectrum of a given Signal(s).
8. Implementation of LP FIR Filter for a given Sequence/Signal.
9. Implementation of HP IIR Filter for a given Sequence/Signal
10. Generation of Narrow Band Signal through Filtering
11. Generation of DTMF Signals
12. Implementation of Decimation Process
13. Implementation of Interpolation Process
14. Implementation of I/D Sampling Rate Converters
15. Impulse Response of First order and Second Order Systems.
Note: - Minimum of 12 experiments has to be conducted.
114

0 0 3 2
MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LAB
Cycle 1: Using 8086 Processor Kits and/or Assembler (5 Weeks)
• Assembly Language Programs to 8086 to Perform

1. Arithmetic, Logical, String Operations on 16 Bit and 32 Bit Data.
2. Bit level Logical Operations, Rotate, Shift, Swap and Branch Operations.
Cycle 2: Using 8051 Microcontroller Kit (6 weeks)

• Introduction to Keil IDE
1. Assembly Language Programs to Perform Arithmetic (Both Signed and Unsigned) 16 Bit
Data Operations, Logical Operations (Byte and Bit Level Operations), Rotate, Shift, Swap
and Branch Instructions
2. Time delay Generation Using Timers of 8051.
3. Serial Communication from / to 8051 to / from I/o devices.
4. Program Using Interrupts to Generate Square Wave 10 KHZ Frequency on P2.1 Using
Timer0 8051 in 8bit Auto reload Mode and Connect a 1HZ Pulse to INT1 pin and Display
on Port0.Assume Crystal Frequency as 11.0592MHZ
Cycle 3: Interfacing I/O Devices to 8051(5 Weeks)

1. 7 Segment Display to 8051.
2. Matrix Keypad to 8051.
3. Sequence Generator Using Serial Interface in 8051.
4. 8bit ADC Interface to 8051.
5. Triangular Wave Generator through DAC interfaces to 8051.
BOOKS:
1. Advanced Microprocessors And Peripherals by A K Ray, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
2006
2. The 8051 Microcontrollers: Architecture, Programming & Applications by Dr. K. Uma
Rao,
115
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. /MBA) IV Year I-Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
MICROWAVE ENGINEERING
Prerequisite : Electromagnetic Theory and Transmission Lines ;

Antennas and wave Propagation
Course Objectives:
This is a core course in Microwave Communications domain, and covers contents related to
Microwave Theory and Techniques. The main objectives of the course are ….
• To get familiarized with microwave frequency bands, their applications and to understand
the limitations and losses of conventional tubes at these frequencies.
• To develop the theory related to microwave transmission lines, and to determine the
characteristics of rectangular waveguides, microstrip lines, and different types of waveguide
components and ferrite devices.
• To distinguish between different types of microwave tubes, their structures and principles
of microwave power generation, and to characterize their performance features and
applications - at tube levels as well as with solid state devices.
• To impart the knowledge of Scattering Matrix, its formulation and utility, and establish the
S-Matrix for various types of microwave junctions.
• To understand the concepts of microwave measurements, identify the equipment required
and precautions to be taken, and get familiarized with the methods of measurement of
microwave power and various other microwave parameters.
Course Outcomes :
Having gone through this course covering different aspects of microwave theory and
techniques, the students would be able to
• To analyze completely the rectangular waveguides, their mode characteristics, and design
waveguides for solving practical microwave transmission line problems.
• To distinguish between the different types of waveguide and ferrite components, explain
their functioning and select proper components for engineering applications.
• To distinguish between the methods of power generation at microwave frequencies, derive
the performance characteristics of 2-Cavity and Relfex Klystrons, Magnetrons, TWTs and
estimate their efficiency levels, and solve related numerical problems
• To realize the need for solid state microwave sources, understand the concepts of TEDs,
RWH Theory and explain the salient features of Gunn Diodes and ATT Devices.
• To establish the properties of Scattering Matrix, formulate the S-Matrix for various
microwave junctions, and understand the utility of S-parameters in microwave component
design.
• To set up a microwave bench, establish the measurement procedure and conduct the
experiments in microwave lab for measurement of various microwave parameters.
UNIT I:
Microwave Transmission Lines - I: Introduction, Microwave Spectrum and Bands, Applications of
Microwaves. Rectangular Waveguides – Solution of Wave Equations in Rectangular Coordinates,
TE/TM mode analysis, Expressions for Fields, Characteristic Equation and Cut-off Frequencies, Filter
Characteristics, Dominant and Degenerate Modes, Sketches of TE and TM mode fields in the cross-
section, Mode Characteristics – Phase and Group Velocities, Wavelengths and Impedance Relations,
Rectangular Guides - Power Transmission and Power Losses, Impossibility of TEM Mode. Micro
strip Lines– Introduction, Zo Relations, Effective Dielectric Constant, Losses, Q factor.
UNIT II:
Cavity Resonators– Introduction, Rectangular Cavities, Dominant Modes and Resonant
Frequencies, Q Factor and Coupling Coefficients, Illustrative Problems
116
Waveguide Components and Applications: Coupling Mechanisms – Probe, Loop, Aperture types.
Waveguide Discontinuities – Waveguide Windows, Tuning Screws and Posts, Matched Loads.
Waveguide Attenuators – Different Types, Resistive Card and Rotary Vane Attenuators; Waveguide
Phase Shifters – Types, Dielectric and Rotary Vane Phase Shifters, Waveguide Multiport Junctions –
E plane and H plane Tees, Magic Tee. Directional Couplers – 2 Hole, Bethe Hole types, Illustrative
Problems
Ferrites– Composition and Characteristics, Faraday Rotation, Ferrite Components – Gyrator, Isolator,
Circulator.
UNIT III:
Microwave Tubes: Limitations and Losses of conventional Tubes at Microwave Frequencies,
Microwave Tubes – O Type and M Type Classifications, O-type Tubes : 2 Cavity Klystrons –
Structure, Reentrant Cavities, Velocity Modulation Process and Applegate Diagram, Bunching
Process and Small Signal Theory – Expressions for O/P Power and Efficiency. Reflex Klystrons –
Structure, Velocity Modulation and Applegate Diagram, Mathematical Theory of Bunching, Power
Output, Efficiency, Oscillating Modes and O/P Characteristics, Effect of Repeller Voltage on Power
O/P, Illustrative Problems.
Helix TWTs: Significance, Types and Characteristics of Slow Wave Structures; Structure of TWT and
Amplification Process (qualitative treatment), Suppression of Oscillations, Gain Considerations.
UNIT IV:
M-Type Tubes:
Introduction, Cross-field Effects, Magnetrons – Different Types, Cylindrical Traveling Wave Magnetron
– Hull Cut-off and Hartree Conditions, Modes of Resonance and PI-Mode Operation, Separation of
PI-Mode, o/p characteristics, Illustrative Problems
Microwave Solid State Devices: Introduction, Classification, Applications. TEDs – Introduction,
Gunn Diodes – Principle, RWH Theory, Characteristics, Basic Modes of Operation - Gunn Oscillation
Modes, LSA Mode, Introduction to Avalanche Transit Time Devices.
UNIT V:
Scattering Matrix– Significance, Formulation and Properties, S Matrix Calculations for – 2 port
Junctions, E plane and H plane Tees, Magic Tee, Circulator and Isolator, Illustrative Problems.
Microwave Measurements:
Description of Microwave Bench – Different Blocks and their Features, Errors and Precautions,
Microwave Power Measurement, Bolometers. Measurement of Attenuation, Frequency. Standing
Wave Measurements – Measurement of Low and High VSWR, Cavity Q, Impedance Measurements.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Microwave Devices and Circuits – Samuel Y. Liao, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2003.
2. Microwave Principles – Herbert J. Reich, J.G. Skalnik, P.F. Ordung and H.L. Krauss, CBS
Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Foundations for Microwave Engineering – R.E. Collin, IEEE Press, John Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2002.
2. Microwave Circuits and Passive Devices – M.L. Sisodia and G.S.Raghuvanshi, Wiley Eastern
Ltd., New Age International Publishers Ltd., 1995.
3. Microwave Engineering Passive Circuits – Peter A. Rizzi, PHI, 1999.
4. Electronic and Radio Engineering – F.E. Terman, McGraw-Hill, 4th Ed., 1955.
5. Microwave Engineering – A. Das and S.K. Das, TMH, 2nd Ed., 2009.
117

4 0 0 4
RADAR SYSTEMS
(PE -III)
Prerequisite : Microwave Engineering
Course Objectives:
This is a system oriented course and needs the knowledge of Signal and Systems, EM
Theory and Transmission Lines, Antennas and Wave Propagation, and Microwave Engineering.
The main objectives of this course are …
• To understand the working principle of a radar, identify the frequency bands, and
formulate the complete radar range equation, listing out all the losses to be accounted
for.
• To identify the need for modulation and Doppler effect; to get acquainted with the working
principles of CW radar, FM-CW radar.
• To impart the knowledge of functioning of MTI radar and its variants; to establish the DLC
features and to bring out the MTI radar performance limitations.
• To establish the principle of Tracking Radar and differentiate between different types of
tracking radars, identifying their principle of operation with necessary schematics.
• To explain the concept of a Matched Filter in radar receiver, and to configure its
response characteristics; to impart the working knowledge of different receiver blocks –
duplexers, displays, phased array antennas, their requirements and utilities.
Course Outcomes :
Having gone through this course on Radar Systems, the students would be able to …..
• Explain the working principle of a pulse radar and establish the complete radar range
equation, identifying the significance and choice of all parameters involved, and solve
numerical problems to establish the radar characteristics.
• Account for the need and functioning of CW, FM-CW and MTI radars, identifying the
complete block diagrams and establishing their characteristics.
• Illustrate the DLC characteristics, account for the range gated Doppler filter bank, and
estimate the MTI radar performance characteristics and limitations.
• Distinguish between Sequential Lobing, Conical Scan, Monopulse type of Tracking Radars,
specify their requirements and compare their characteristic features.
• Derive the matched filter response characteristics for radar applications and account for
correlation receivers; to distinguish between different radar displays and duplexers.
• Account for the electronic scanning principle, and implement the same through phased
array antennas, knowing their requirements and utilities.
UNIT–I:
Basics of Radar : Introduction, Maximum Unambiguous Range, Simple form of Radar Equation,
Radar Block Diagram and Operation, Radar Frequencies and Applications. Prediction of Range
Performance, Minimum Detectable Signal, Receiver Noise, Modified Radar Range Equation,
Radar Equation : SNR, Envelope Detector – False Alarm Time and Probability, Integration of Radar
Pulses, Radar Cross Section of Targets , Transmitter Power, PRF and Range Ambiguities, System
Losses (qualitative treatment), Illustrative Problems.
UNIT–II:
CW and Frequency Modulated Radar : Doppler Effect, CW Radar – Block Diagram, Isolation
between Transmitter and Receiver, Non-zero IF Receiver, Receiver Bandwidth Requirements,
Applications of CW radar. Illustrative Problems
118
FM-CW Radar: Range and Doppler Measurement, Block Diagram and Characteristics, FM-CW
altimeter.
UNIT-III:
MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar: Introduction, Principle, MTI Radar with - Power Amplifier Transmitter
and Power Oscillator Transmitter, Delay Line Cancellers – Filter Characteristics, Blind Speeds,
Double Cancellation, Staggered PRFs. Range Gated Doppler Filters. MTI Radar Parameters,
Limitations to MTI Performance, MTI versus Pulse Doppler Radar.
UNIT –IV:
Tracking Radar: Tracking with Radar, Sequential Lobing, Conical Scan, Mono pulse Tracking Radar
– Amplitude Comparison Mono pulse (one- and two- coordinates), Phase Comparison Mono pulse,
Tracking in Range, Acquisition and Scanning Patterns, Comparison of Trackers.
UNIT –V:
Detection of Radar Signals in Noise : Introduction, Matched Filter Receiver – Response
Characteristics and Derivation, Correlation Function and Cross-correlation Receiver, Efficiency of
Non-matched Filters, Matched Filter with Non-white Noise.
Radar Receivers – Noise Figure and Noise Temperature, Displays – types. Duplexers – Branch type
and Balanced type, Circulators as Duplexers. Introduction to Phased Array Antennas – Basic
Concepts, Radiation Pattern, Beam Steering and Beam Width changes, Applications, Advantages
and Limitations.
TEXT BOOKS:
nd
1. Introduction to Radar Systems – Merrill I. Skolnik, TMH Special Indian Edition, 2 Ed., 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Radar: Principles, Technology, Applications – Byron Edde, Pearson Education, 2004.
2. Radar Principles – Peebles, Jr., P.Z., Wiley, New York, 1998.
3. Principles of Modern Radar: Basic Principles – Mark A. Richards, James A. Scheer, William A.
Holm, Yesdee, 2013
rd
4. Introduction to Radar Systems, 3 edition – M.I. Skolnik, TMH Ed., 2005
119

4 0 0 4
OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONS
(PE - III)
Prerequisite Subject: None
Course Objectives:
The objectives of the course are:
1. To realize the significance of optical fibre communications.
2. To understand the construction and characteristics of optical fibre
cable.
3. To develop the knowledge of optical signal sources and power launching.
4. To identify and understand the operation of various optical detectors.
5. To understand the design of optical systems and WDM.
Course Outcomes:
1. At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
2. Understand and analyze the constructional parameters of optical fibres.
3. Be able to design an optical system.
4. Estimate the losses due to attenuation, absorption, scattering and bending.
5. Compare various optical detectors and choose suitable one for
different applications.
UNIT -I:
Overview of Optical Fiber Communication: - Historical development, The general system,
Advantages of Optical Fiber Communications, Optical Fiber Wave Guides- Introduction, Ray Theory
Transmission, Total Internal Reflection, Acceptance Angle, Numerical Aperture, Skew Rays,
Cylindrical Fibers- Modes, Vnumber, Mode Coupling, Step Index Fibers, Graded Index Fibers.
Single Mode Fibers- Cut Off Wavelength, Mode Field Diameter, Effective Refractive Index, Fiber
Materials Glass, Halide, Active Glass, Chalgenide Glass, Plastic Optical Fibers.
UNIT -II:
Signal Distortion in Optical Fibers: Attenuation, Absorption, Scattering and Bending Losses, Core
and Cladding Losses, Information Capacity Determination, Group Delay, Types of Dispersion -
Material Dispersion, Wave-Guide Dispersion, Polarization Mode Dispersion, Intermodal Dispersion,
Pulse Broadening, Optical Fiber Connectors- Connector Types, Single Mode Fiber Connectors,
Connector Return Loss.
UNIT -III:
Fiber Splicing: Splicing Techniques, Splicing Single Mode Fibers, Fiber Alignment and Joint Loss-
Multimode Fiber Joints, Single Mode Fiber Joints.
Optical Sources- LEDs, Structures, Materials, Quantum Efficiency, Power, Modulation, Power
Bandwidth Product, Injection Laser Diodes- Modes, Threshold Conditions, External Quantum
Efficiency, Laser Diode Rate Equations, Resonant Frequencies, Reliability of LED & ILD.
Source to Fiber Power Launching: - Output Patterns, Power Coupling, Power Launching,
Equilibrium Numerical Aperture, Laser Diode to Fiber Coupling.
UNIT -IV:
Optical Detectors: Physical Principles of PIN and APD, Detector Response Time, Temperature
Effect on Avalanche Gain, Comparison of Photo Detectors, Optical Receiver Operation- Fundamental
Receiver Operation, Digital Signal Transmission, Error Sources, Receiver Configuration, Digital
Receiver Performance, Probability of Error, Quantum Limit, Analog Receivers.
UNIT -V:
Optical System Design: Considerations, Component Choice, Multiplexing, Point-to- Point Links,
System Considerations, Link Power Budget with Examples, Overall Fiber Dispersion in Multi-Mode
and Single Mode Fibers, Rise Time Budget with Examples.
120
Transmission Distance, Line Coding in Optical Links, WDM, Necessity, Principles, Types of WDM,
Measurement of Attenuation and Dispersion, Eye Pattern.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Optical Fiber Communications – Gerd Keiser, TMH, 4th Edition, 2008.
rd
2. Optical Fiber Communications – John M. Senior, Pearson Education, 3 Edition, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Fiber Optic Communications – D.K. Mynbaev , S.C. Gupta and Lowell L. Scheiner, Pearson
Education, 2005.
2. Text Book on Optical Fibre Communication and its Applications – S.C.Gupta, PHI, 2005.
3. Fiber Optic Communication Systems – Govind P. Agarwal , John Wiley, 3rd Ediition, 2004.
4. Introduction to Fiber Optics by Donald J.Sterling Jr. – Cengage learning, 2004.
nd
5. Optical Communication Systems – John Gowar, 2 Edition, PHI, 2001.
121

4 0 0 4
SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS
(PE-III)
Prerequisite: Analog Communications and Digital Communications
Course Objectives :
• To prepare students to excel in basic knowledge of satellite communication principles
• To provide students with solid foundation in orbital mechanics and launches for the satellite
communication
• To train the students with a basic knowledge of link design of satellite with a design examples.
• To provide better understanding of multiple access systems and earth station technology
• To prepare students with knowledge in satellite navigation and GPS & and satellite packet
communications.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course,
• Students will understand the historical background, basic concepts and frequency allocations for
satellite communication
• Students will demonstrate orbital mechanics, launch vehicles and launchers
• Students will demonstrate the design of satellite links for specified C/N with system design
examples.
• Students will be able to visualize satellite sub systems like Telemetry, tracking, command and
monitoring power systems etc.
• Students will understand the various multiple access systems for satellite communication systems
and satellite packet communications.
UNIT I:
Introduction: Origin of Satellite Communications, Historical Back-ground, Basic Concepts of Satellite
Communications, Frequency Allocations for Satellite Services, Applications, Future Trends of Satellite
Communications.
Orbital Mechanics and Launchers: Orbital Mechanics, Look Angle determination, Orbital
Perturbations, Orbit determination, Launches and Launch vehicles, Orbital Effects in Communication
Systems Performance.
UNIT II:
Satellite Subsystems: Attitude and Orbit Control System, Telemetry, Tracking, Command And
Monitoring, Power Systems, Communication Subsystems, Satellite Antennas, Equipment Reliability
and Space Qualification.
UNIT III:
Satellite Link Design: Basic Transmission Theory, System Noise Temperature and G/T Ratio,
Design of Down Links, Up Link Design, Design Of Satellite Links For Specified C/N, System Design
Examples.
Multiple Access: Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA), Intermodulation, Calculation of C/N,
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Frame Structure, Examples, Satellite Switched TDMA
Onboard Processing, DAMA, Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Spread Spectrum Transmission
and Reception.
122
Unit IV:
Earth Station Technology: Introduction, Transmitters, Receivers, Antennas, Tracking Systems,
Terrestrial Interface, Primary Power Test Methods.
Unit V:
Low Earth Orbit and Geo-Stationary Satellite Systems: Orbit Considerations, Coverage and
Frequency Consideration, Delay & Throughput Considerations, System Considerations, Operational
NGSO Constellation Designs.
Satellite Navigation & Global Positioning System : Radio and Satellite Navigation, GPS Position
Location Principles, GPS Receivers and Codes, Satellite Signal Acquisition, GPS Navigation
Message, GPS Signal Levels, GPS Receiver Operation, GPS C/A Code Accuracy, Differential GPS.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Satellite Communications – Timothy Pratt, Charles Bostian and Jeremy Allnutt, WSE, Wiley
Publications, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2. Satellite Communications Engineering – Wilbur L. Pritchard, Robert A Nelson and Henri
G.Suyderhoud, 2nd Edition, Pearson Publications, 2003.
REFERENCES:
nd
1. Satellite Communications: Design Principles – M. Richharia, BS Publications, 2 Edition, 2003.
th
2. Satellite Communication - D.C Agarwal, Khanna Publications, 5 Ed.
3. Fundamentals of Satellite Communications – K.N. Raja Rao, PHI, 2004
th
4. Satellite Communications – Dennis Roddy, McGraw Hill, 4 Edition, 2009.
123

4 0 0 4
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS

(PE - III)
Prerequisite Subject: None
Course Objectives:
1. To understand the biological neural network and to model equivalent neuron models.
2. To understand the architecture, learning algorithm and issues of various feed forward and
feedback neural networks.
Course Outcomes:
By completing this course the student will be able to:
1. Create different neural networks of various architectures both feed forward and feed backward.
2. Perform the training of neural networks using various learning rules.
3. Perform the testing of neural networks and do the perform analysis of these networks for various
pattern recognition applications.
UNIT-I:
Introduction: A Neural Network, Human Brain, Models of a Neuron, Neural Networks viewed as
Directed Graphs, Network Architectures, Knowledge Representation, Artificial Intelligence and Neural
Networks
Learning Process: Error Correction Learning, Memory Based Learning, Hebbian Learning,
Competitive, Boltzmann Learning, Credit Assignment Problem, Memory, Adaption, Statistical Nature
of the Learning Process
UNIT-II:
Single Layer Perceptrons: Adaptive Filtering Problem, Unconstrained Organization Techniques,
Linear Least Square Filters, Least Mean Square Algorithm, Learning Curves, Learning Rate
Annealing Techniques, Perceptron –Convergence Theorem, Relation Between Perceptron and Bayes
Classifier for a Gaussian Environment
Multilayer Perceptron: Back Propagation Algorithm XOR Problem, Heuristics, Output
Representation and Decision Rule, Computer Experiment, Feature Detection
UNIT-III:
Back Propagation: Back Propagation and Differentiation, Hessian Matrix, Generalization, Cross
Validation, Network Pruning Techniques, Virtues and Limitations of Back Propagation Learning,
Accelerated Convergence, Supervised Learning
UNIT-IV:
Self-Organization Maps (SOM): Two Basic Feature Mapping Models, Self-Organization Map, SOM
Algorithm, Properties of Feature Map, Computer Simulations, Learning Vector Quantization, Adaptive
Patter Classification
UNIT-V:
Neuro Dynamics: Dynamical Systems, Stability of Equilibrium States, Attractors, Neuro Dynamical
Models, Manipulation of Attractors as a Recurrent Network Paradigm
Hopfield Models – Hopfield Models, Computer Experiment
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Neural Networks a Comprehensive Foundations, Simon Haykin, PHI edition.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Artificial Neural Networks - B. Vegnanarayana Prentice Hall of India P Ltd 2005
2. Neural Networks in Computer Inteligance, Li Min Fu TMH 2003
3. Neural Networks -James A Freeman David M S Kapura Pearson Education 2004.
4. Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems Jacek M. Zurada, JAICO Publishing House Ed. 2006.
124

4 0 0 4
ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

(PGC – I)
Course Objectives :
The objectives of this course are to make the student

1. Understand the design of various types of digital filters and implement them using various
implementation structures and study the advantages & disadvantages of a variety of design
procedures and implementation structures.
2. understand the concept and need for Multirate signal Processing and their applications in
various fields of Communication & Signal Processing
3. understand difference between estimation & Computation of
Power spectrum and the need for Power Spectrum estimation.
4. Study various Parametric & Non parametric methods of Power
spectrum estimation techniques and their advantages &
disadvantages
5. Understand the effects of finite word/register length used in
hardware in implementation of various filters and transforms
using finite precision processors.
Course Outcomes:
On completion of this course student will be able to

1. Design and implement a filter which is optimum for the given specifications.
2. Design a Mutirate system for the needed sampling rate and can implement the same using
Polyphase filter structures of the needed order.
3. Estimate the power spectrum of signal corrupted by noise through a choice of estimation
methods: Parametric or Non Parametric.
4. Can calculate the output Noise power of different filters due to various finite word length
effects viz: ADC Quantization, product quantization, and can calculate the scaling factors
needed to avoid Limit cycles: Zero input, overflow. Also they can decide the stability of the
system by studying the effect due to coefficient quantization while implementing different
filters and transforms.
UNIT –I:
Review of DFT, FFT, IIR Filters and FIR Filters.
nd
Introduction to filter structures (IIR & FIR).Implementation of Digital Filters, specifically 2 Order
st
Narrow Band Filter and 1 Order All Pass Filter. Frequency sampling structures of FIR, Lattice
structures, Forward prediction error, Backward prediction error, Reflection coefficients for lattice
realization, Implementation of lattice structures for IIR filters, Advantages of lattice structures.
UNIT -II:
Non-Parametric Methods:
Estimation of spectra from finite duration observation of signals, Non-parametric Methods: Bartlett,
Welch & Blackman-Tukey methods, Comparison of all Non-Parametric methods
UNIT - III:
Parametric Methods:
Autocorrelation & Its Properties, Relation between auto correlation & model parameters, AR Models -
Yule-Walker & Burg Methods, MA & ARMA models for power spectrum estimation, Finite word length
effect in IIR digital Filters – Finite word-length effects in FFT algorithms.
125
UNIT –IV:
Multi Rate Signal Processing: Introduction, Decimation by a factor D, Interpolation by a factor I,
Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor I/D, Multistage Implementation of Sampling Rate
Conversion, Filter design & Implementation for sampling rate conversion. Examples of up-sampling
using an All Pass Filter.
UNIT –V:
Applications of Multi Rate Signal Processing
Design of Phase Shifters, Interfacing of Digital Systems with Different Sampling Rates,
Implementation of Narrow Band Low Pass Filters, Implementation of Digital Filter Banks, Subband
Coding of Speech Signals, Quadrature Mirror Filters, Transmultiplexers, Over Sampling A/D and D/A
Conversion.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms & Applications - J.G.Proakis& D. G. Manolakis,
4th Ed., PHI.
2. Discrete Time signal processing - Alan V Oppenheim & Ronald W Schaffer, PHI.
3. DSP – A Practical Approach – Emmanuel C. Ifeacher, Barrie. W. Jervis, 2 ed., Pearson
Education.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Modern spectral Estimation: Theory & Application – S. M .Kay, 1988, PHI.
2. Multi Rate Systems and Filter Banks – P.P.Vaidyanathan – Pearson Education.
3. Digital Signal Processing: A Practitioner's Approach, Kaluri V. Rangarao, Ranjan K. Mallik ISBN:
978-0-470-01769-2, 210 pages, November 2006 John Weley.
4. Digital Signal Processing – S.Salivahanan, A.Vallavaraj, C.Gnanapriya, 2000,TMH
126

4 0 0 4
TRANSFORM TECHNIQUES
(PG E - I)
Prerequisite: None
Course Objectives:
1. To learn basics of two dimensional transform.
2. Understand the various two dimensional transform definition, properties and applications.
3. Understand the design of filter Bank structure.
4. To learn the fundamentals of wavelet transform and special wavelets.
Course Outcomes:
1. The student will learn basics of two dimensional transforms.
2. Understand the definition, properties and applications of various two dimensional transform.
3. Understand the basic concepts of wavelet transform.
4. Understand the special topics such as wavelet packets, Bi-orthogonal wavelets e.t.c.
UNIT -I: Fourier Analysis

Vector space, Hilbert spaces, Fourier basis, FT- Limitations of Fourier Analysis, Need for time-
frequency analysis, DFT, 2D-DFT: Definition, Properties and Applications, IDFT, Hilbert Transform,
STFT.
UNIT -II: Transforms

Walsh, Hadamard, Haar and Slant Transforms, DCT, DST, KLT,– definition, properties and
applications
UNIT -III: Continuous Wavelet Transform (CWT)

Short comings of STFT, Need for wavelets, Wavelet Basis- Concept of Scale and its relation with
frequency, Continuous time wavelet Transform Equation- Series Expansion using Wavelets- CWT-
Tiling of time scale plane for CWT. Important Wavelets: Haar, Mexican Hat, Meyer, Shannon,
Daubechies.
UNIT -IV: Multi Rate Analysis and DWT:

Need for Scaling function – Multi Resolution Analysis, Two-Channel Filter Banks, Perfect
Reconstruction Condition, Relationship between Filter Banks and Wavelet Basis, DWT, Structure of
DWT Filter Banks, Daubechies Wavelet Function, Applications of DWT.
UNIT -V: Special Topics:

Wavelet Packet Transform, Multidimensional Wavelets, Bi-orthogonal basis- B-Splines, Lifting
Scheme of Wavelet Generation, Multi Wavelets
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Wavelet Transforms-Introduction theory and applications -Raghuveer M.Rao and Ajit S.
Bopardikar, Pearson Edu, Asia, New Delhi, 2003.
2. “Insight into Wavelets from Theory to practice “, Soman. K. P, Ramachandran. K.I, Printice Hall
India, First Edition, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. “Fundamentals of Wavelets- Theory, Algorithms and Applications”, Jaideva C Goswami, Andrew
K Chan, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singapore, 1999.
2. “Wavelets and sub-band coding”, Vetterli M. Kovacevic, PJI, 1995.
3. “Introduction to Wavelets and Wavelet Transforms”, C. Sydney Burrus, PHI, First Edition, 1997.
4. “A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing”, Stephen G. Mallat,. Academic Press, Second Edition
5. Digital Image Processing – S.Jayaraman, S.Esakkirajan, T.Veera Kumar – TMH,2009
127

4 0 0 4
BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

(PG E - I)
Prerequisite: Advanced Digital Signal Processing
Course Objectives:
The main objectives of the course are :
1. To use basic probability theory to model random signals in terms of Random Processes.
2. To derive the noise power Spectral Density of Random signals and its analysis.
3. To understand lossless and lossy compression techniques related to ECG data.
4. To understand various cardilogical signal processing techniques and noise cancellation
techniques.
5. To understand estimation of signals using Prony’s and least square and linear prediction
methods.
6. To analyze evoked potentials.
7. To comprehend EEG signals, modeling and sleep stages.
Course Outcomes:
After studying the course , each student is expected to be able to :
1. Use probability theory to model random processes.
2. Analyze random signals using power spectral densities.
3. Compare various lossless and lossy techniques.
4. Compare various ECG processing and noise cancellation techniques.
5. Analyze evoked potentials.
6. Model and estimate EEG signals and various sleep stages.
UNIT -I:
Random Processes
Stationary random process, Ergodicity, Power spectral density and autocorrelation function of random
processes. Noise power spectral density analysis, Noise bandwidth and noise figure of systems.
UNIT -II:
Data Compression Techniques: Lossy and Lossless data reduction Algorithms. ECG data
compression using Turning point, AZTEC, CORTES, Huffman coding, vector quantisation, DICOM
Standards
UNIT -III:
Cardiological Signal Processing: Pre-processing, QRS Detection Methods, Rhythm analysis,
Arrhythmia Detection Algorithms, Automated ECG Analysis, ECG Pattern Recognition.
Adaptive Noise Cancelling: Principles of Adaptive Noise Cancelling, Adaptive Noise Cancelling with
the LMS Adaptation Algorithm, Noise Cancelling Method to Enhance ECG Monitoring, Fetal ECG
Monitoring.
UNIT -IV:
Signal Averaging, Polishing – Mean and trend removal, Prony’s method, Prony's Method based on
the Least Squares Estimate, Linear prediction, Yule – Walker (Y –W) equations, Analysis of Evoked
Potentials.
UNIT -V:
Neurological Signal Processing: Modelling of EEG Signals, Detection of spikes and spindles
Detection of Alpha, Beta and Gamma Waves. Auto Regressive (A.R.) modelling of seizure EEG.
Sleep Stage analysis, Inverse Filtering, Least squares and polynomial modelling.
128
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal Principles – Peyton Z. Peebles, 4 Ed., 2009,
TMH.
2. Biomedical Signal Processing- Principles and Techniques - D. C. Reddy, 2005, TMH.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Digital Bio Dignal Processing - Weitkunat R, 1991, Elsevier.
2. Biomedical Signal Processing - Akay M , IEEE Press.
3. Biomedical Signal Processing -Vol. I Time & Frequency Analysis - Cohen.A, 1986, CRC Press.
4. Biomedical Digital Signal Processing: C-Language Experiments and Laboratory Experiments,
Willis J.Tompkins, PHI.
129

4 0 0 4
RF CIRCUIT DESIGN
(PG E – I)
Perquisite : None
Course Objectives:
1. To educate students fundamental RF circuit and system design skills.
2. To introduce students the basic transmission line theory, single and multiport networks, RF
component modeling.
3. To offer students experience on designing matching and biasing networks & RF transistor
amplifier design.
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Explore fundamental RF circuit and system design skills.
2. Understand the basic transmission line theory, single and multiport networks, RF component
modeling.
3. Design matching and biasing networks & RF transistor amplifiers.
UNIT I: Introduction:
Importance of RF Design-Dimensions and Units-Frequency Spectrum-RF Behaviour of Passive
Components: High Frequency Resistors, High Frequency Capacitors, High Frequency Inductors.-Chip
Components and Circuit Board Considerations: Chip Resistors, Chip Capacitors, and Surface Mount
Inductors.
Review of Transmission Lines:
Types of Transmission Lines-Equivalent Circuit representation-R, L, C, G parameters of Different Line
configurations-Terminated Lossless Transmission Lines-Special Terminations: Short Circuit, Open
Circuit and Quarter Wave Transmission Lines- Sourced and Loaded Transmission Lines: Power
Considerations, Input Impedance Matching, Return Loss and Insertion Loss.
UNIT II: Single and Multi-Port Networks:

The Smith Chart: Reflection Coefficient, Normalized Impedance-Impedance Transformation: Standing
wave Ratio, Special Transformation Conditions-Admittance Transformation-Parallel and Series RL &
RC Connections-Basic Definitions of Single and Multi-Port Networks-Interconnecting Networks.
RF Filter Design:
Scattering Parameters: Definition, Meaning, Chain Scattering Matrix, Conversion Between S- and Z-
parameters, Signal Flow Chart Modeling, Generalization-Basic Resonator and Filter Configurations:
Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass and Band Stop type Filters-Filter Implementation using Unit
Element and Kuroda's Identities Transformations-Coupled Filters.
UNIT III: Active RF Component Modelling:

RF Diode Models: Nonlinear and Linear Models-Transistor Models: Large Signal and Small Signal
BJT Models, Large Signal and Small Signal FET Models- Scattering Parameter, Device
Characterization.
UNIT IV: Matching and Biasing Networks:

Impedance Matching Using Discrete Components: Two Component Matching Networks,
Forbidden Regions, Frequency Response and Quality Factor, T and Pi Matching Networks-Amplifier
Classes of Operation and Biasing Networks: Classes of Operation and Efficiency of Amplifiers,
Biasing Networks for BJT, Biasing Networks for FET.
UNIT V: RF Transistor Amplifier Design:

Characteristics of Amplifiers- Amplifier Power Relations: RF Source, Transducer Power Gain,
Additional Power Relations-Stability Considerations: Stability Circles, Unconditional Stability, And
130
Stabilization Methods-Unilateral and Bilateral Design for Constant Gain- Noise Figure Circles-
Constant VSWR Circles.
RF Oscillators and Mixers:

Basic Oscillator Model: Negative Resistance Oscillator, Feedback Oscillator Design, Design steps,
Quartz Oscillators- Fixed Frequency High Frequency Oscillator -Basic Characteristics of Mixers:
Concepts, Frequency Domain Considerations, Single Ended Mixer Design, Single and Double
Balanced Mixers.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. RF Circuit Design – Theory and Applications by Reinhold Ludwig, Pavel Bsetchko – Pearson
Education India, 2000.
2. Radio Frequency and Microwave Communication Circuits – Analysis and Design by Devendra
K.Misra – Wiley Student Edition – John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
REFERENCES:
1. Radio Frequency and Microwave Electronics – Illustrated by Matthew M. Radmanesh – PEI.
2. RF Circuit Design – Christopher Bowick, Cheryl Aljuni and John Biyler, Elsevier Science, 2008.
3. Secrets of RF Circuit Design by Joseph J.Carr, TMH, 2000.
4. Design of RF and Microwave Amplifiersand Oscillators, Peter L.D. Abrif, Artech House, 2000.
5. The Design of CMOS Radio Frequency Integrated Circuits by Thomas H.Lee , 2/e – Cambridge
University Press, 2004.
131

4 0 0 4
VLSI TECHNOLOGY AND DESIGN

(PG E - II)
Prerequisite: VLSI
Course Objectives:
1) Students from other engineering background to get familiarize with large scale integration
technology.
2) To expose fabrication methods, layout and design rules.
3) Learn methods to improve Digital VLSI system’s performance.
4) To know about VLSI Design constraints.
5) Visualize CMOS Digital Chip Design.
Course Outcomes:
1) Review of FET fundamentals for VLSI design.
2) To acquires knowledge about stick diagrams and layouts.
3) Enable to design the subsystems based on VLSI concepts.
UNIT –I:
Review of Microelectronics and Introduction to MOS Technologies:
MOS, CMOS, BiCMOS Technology. Basic Electrical Properties of MOS, CMOS & BiCMOS Circuits:
Ids – Vds relationships, Threshold Voltage VT, Gm, Gds and ωo, Pass Transistor, MOS, CMOS & Bi
CMOS Inverters, Zpu/Zpd, MOS Transistor circuit model, Latch-up in CMOS circuits.
UNIT –II:
Layout Design and Tools:
Transistor structures, Wires and Vias, Scalable Design rules, Layout Design tools.
Logic Gates & Layouts:
Static Complementary Gates, Switch Logic, Alternative Gate circuits, Low power gates, Resistive and
Inductive interconnect delays.
UNIT –III:
Combinational Logic Networks:
Layouts, Simulation, Network delay, Interconnect design, Power optimization, Switch logic networks,
Gate and Network testing.
UNIT –IV:
Sequential Systems:
Memory cells and Arrays, Clocking disciplines, Design, Power optimization, Design validation and
testing.
UNIT –V:
Floor Planning:
Floor planning methods, Global Interconnect, Floor Plan Design, Off-chip connections.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Essentials of VLSI Circuits and Systems, K. Eshraghian Eshraghian. D, A. Pucknell, 2005, PHI.
2. Modern VLSI Design – Wayne Wolf, 3rd Ed., 1997, Pearson Education.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Introduction to VLSI Systems: A Logic, Circuit and System Perspective – Ming-BO Lin, CRC
Press, 2011.
2. Principals of CMOS VLSI Design – N.H.E Weste, K. Eshraghian, 2nd Ed., Addison Wesley.
132

4 0 0 4
ADVANCED DATA COMMUNICATIONS

(PG E - II)
Prerequisite : Digital Communication
Course Objectives:
1. To learn about basics of Data Communication networks, different protocols, standards and
layering concepts.
2. To study about error detection and correction techniques.
3. Know about link layer protocol and point to point protocols.
4. To understand Medium Access Control sub layer protocols
5. To know about Switching circuits, Multiplexing and Spectrum Spreading techniques for data
transmission.
6. To study Wired LANs different Ethernet standards
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the concepts of Data Communication networks, different protocols, standards and
layering.
2. Acquire the knowledge of error detection, forward and reverse error correction techniques.
3. Analyze link layer protocol and point to point protocols
4. Explain and compare the performance of different MAC protocols like Aloha, CSMA, CSMA/CA,
TDMA, FDMA & CDMA.
5. Understand the features and the significance of Switching circuits, Multiplexing and Spectrum
Spreading for data transmission .
6. Understand the characteristics of Wired LANs and also the operation and applications of
Connecting Devices
7. Understand the services and functions of Network layer protocols.
Unit I
Data Communications, Networks and Network Types, Internet History, Standards and Administration,
Protocol Layering, TCP/IP protocol suite, OSI Model. Digital Data Transmission, DTE-DCE interface.
Data Link Layer
Introduction, Data Link Layer, Nodes and Links, Services, Categories of Links, sub layers, Link
Layer Addressing, Address Resolution Protocol.
Unit II
Error Detection and Correction: Types of Errors, Redundancy, detection versus correction, Coding
Block Coding: Error Detection, Vertical redundancy cheeks, longitudinal redundancy cheeks, Error
Correction, Error correction single bit, Hamming code.
Cyclic Codes: Cyclic Redundancy Check, Polynomials, Cyclic Code Encoder Using Polynomials,
Cyclic Code Analysis, Advantage of Cyclic Codes, Checksum
Data Link Control: DLC Services, Data Link Layer Protocols, HDLC, Point to Point Protocol
Unit III
Media Access Control (MAC) Sub Layer
Random Access, Aloha, Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA), Carrier Sense Multiple Access with
Collision Avoidance (CSMA/CA), Controlled Access- Reservation, Polling- Token Passing,
Channelization - Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA), Time - Division Multiple Access
(TDMA), Code - Division Multiple Access (CDMA).
Unit IV
Switching: Introduction to Switching, Circuit Switched Networks, Packet Switching, Structure of
switch
133
Multiplexing and Spectrum Spreading: Multiplexing, Frequency Division Multiplexing, Time Division
Multiplexing, Spread Spectrum -Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum and Direct Sequence Spread
Spectrum.
Unit V
Wired LANS: Ethernet Protocol, Standard Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Giga bit
Ethernet
Connecting Devices: Hubs, Link Layer Switches, Routers
Networks Layer: Packetizing, Routing and Forwarding, Packet Switching, Network Layer
Performance, IPv4 Address, Address Space, Classful Addressing, Classless Addressing, Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), Network Address Resolution(NATF), Forwarding of IP Packets,
Forwarding based on Destination Address, Forwarding based on Label, Routing as Packet Switches.
TEXT BOOKS:
th
1. Data Communications and Networking - B. A. Forouzan, 5 , 2013,TMH.
2. Data and Computer Communications - William Stallings, 8th ed., 2007, PHI.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Data Communications and Computer Networks - Prakash C. Gupta, 2006, PHI.
2. Data Communications and Networking - B. A. Forouzan, 2nd , 2013, TMH.
3. Data Communications and Computer Networks- Brijendra Singh, 2nd ed., 2005, PHI.
134

4 0 0 4
DETECTION AND ESTIMATION THEORY
(PG E-II)
Prerequisite: RP& QT
Course Objectives:
1. The main objective of this course is to provide basic estimation and detection background for
engineering applications.
2. This course provides the main concepts and algorithms for detection and estimation theory.
3. Students learn the statistics and estimating the parameters of Random Process from detection.
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will understand the basic detection methods.
2. Learn about basic estimation methods.
3. Gain ability to apply estimation method for real time engineering problems.
UNIT –I:
Random Processes: Discrete Linear Models, Markov Sequences and Processes, Point Processes,
and Gaussian Processes.
UNIT –II:
Detection Theory: Basic Detection Problem, Maximum A posteriori Decision Rule, Minimum Probability
of Error Classifier, Bayes Decision Rule, Multiple-Class Problem (Bayes)- minimum probability error with
and without equal a priori probabilities, Neyman-Pearson Classifier, General Calculation of Probability of
Error, General Gaussian Problem, Composite Hypotheses.
UNIT –III:
Linear Minimum Mean-Square Error Filtering:Linear Minimum Mean Squared Error Estimators,
Nonlinear Minimum Mean Squared Error Estimators. Innovations, Digital Wiener Filters with Stored
Data, Real-time Digital Wiener Filters, Kalman Filters.
UNIT –IV:
Statistics: Measurements, Nonparametric Estimators of Probability Distribution and Density Functions,
Point Estimators of Parameters, Measures of the Quality of Estimators, Introduction to Interval
Estimates, Distribution of Estimators, Tests of Hypotheses, Simple Linear Regression, Multiple Linear
Regression.
UNIT –V:
Estimating the Parameters of Random Processes from Data:Tests for Stationarity and Ergodicity,
Model-free Estimation, Model-based Estimation of Autocorrelation Functions, Power Special Density
Functions.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Random Signals: Detection, Estimation and Data Analysis – K. Sam Shanmugan & A.M. Breipohl,
Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2011.
2. Random Processes: Filtering, Estimation and Detection – Lonnie C. Ludeman, Wiley India Pvt.
Ltd., 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing: Volume I Estimation Theory– Steven.M.Kay,
Prentice Hall, USA, 1998.
2. Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing: Volume I Detection Theory– Steven.M.Kay,
Prentice Hall, USA, 1998.
3. Introduction to Statistical Signal Processing with Applications – Srinath, Rajasekaran,
Viswanathan, 2003, PHI.
4. Statistical Signal Processing: Detection, Estimation and Time Series Analysis – Louis L.Scharf,
1991, Addison Wesley.
5. Detection, Estimation and Modulation Theory: Part – I – Harry L. Van Trees, 2001, John Wiley &
Sons, USA.
6. Signal Processing: Discrete Spectral Analysis – Detection & Estimation – Mischa Schwartz,
Leonard Shaw, 1975, Mc Graw Hill.
135

4 0 0 4
AD-HOC WIRELESS AND SENSOR NETWORKS

(PG E - III)
Prerequisite: Computer Networks
Course Objectives:
1. To study the fundamentals of wireless Ad-Hoc Networks.
2. To study the operation and performance of various Adhoc wireless network protocols.
3. To study the architecture and protocols of Wireless sensor networks.
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will be able to understand the basis of Ad-hoc wireless networks.
2. Students will be able to understand design, operation and the performance of MAC layer
protocols of Adhoc wireless networks.
3. Students will be able to understand design, operation and the performance of routing protocol of
Adhoc wireless network.
4. Students will be able to understand design, operation and the performance of transport layer
protocol of Adhoc wireless networks.
5. Students will be able to understand sensor network Architecture and will be able to distinguish
between protocols used in Adhoc wireless network and wireless sensor networks.
UNIT - I:
Wireless LANs and PANs
Introduction, Fundamentals of WLANS, IEEE 802.11 Standards, HIPERLAN Standard, Bluetooth,
Home RF.
AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKS
Introduction, Issues in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks.
UNIT - II:
MAC Protocols
Introduction, Issues in Designing a MAC protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, Design goals of a
MAC Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, Classifications of MAC Protocols, Contention - Based
Protocols, Contention - Based Protocols with reservation Mechanisms, Contention – Based MAC
Protocols with Scheduling Mechanisms, MAC Protocols that use Directional Antennas, Other MAC
Protocols.
UNIT - III:
Routing Protocols
Introduction, Issues in Designing a Routing Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, Classification of
Routing Protocols, Table –Driven Routing Protocols, On – Demand Routing Protocols, Hybrid Routing
Protocols, Routing Protocols with Efficient Flooding Mechanisms, Hierarchical Routing Protocols,
Power – Aware Routing Protocols.
UNIT – IV:
Transport Layer Protocols
Introduction, Issues in Designing a Transport Layer Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, Design
Goals of a Transport Layer Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, Classification of Transport Layer
Solutions, TCP Over Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, Other Transport Layer Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless
Networks.
136
UNIT – V:
Wireless Sensor Networks
Introduction, Sensor Network Architecture, Data Dissemination, Data Gathering, MAC Protocols for
Sensor Networks, Location Discovery, Quality of a Sensor Network, Evolving Standards, Other
Issues.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and Protocols - C. Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj,
2004, PHI.
2. Wireless Ad- hoc and Sensor Networks: Protocols, Performance and Control - Jagannathan
Sarangapani, CRC Press.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
st
1. Ad- Hoc Mobile Wireless Networks: Protocols & Systems, C.K. Toh , 1 Ed. Pearson Education.
2. Wireless Sensor Networks - C. S. Raghavendra, Krishna M. Sivalingam, 2004, Springer
137

4 0 0 4
RANDOM PROCESSES AND QUEUING THEORY

(PG E – III)
Prerequisite: Probability Theory & Stochastic Processes
Course Objectives:
1. To expose the students to the random process and queuing theory related topics for their
subsequent study of Computer Networks and wireless communication and Networks.
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to:

1. Understand Random variables as an intrinsic need for the analysis of random phenomena.
2. Evaluate and apply moments and Characteristics functions.
3. Understand the concept of random process spectral density of stationary process.
4. Understand the concepts of Markov Chains and queuing theory.
5. Understand the concepts of M| M|1, M|M|1|K, M|G|1 queuing Process.
6. Understand the modeling of telecommunication networks using appropriate queuing process.
UNIT I: RANDOM VARIABLE

Random Variables-Basic Definitions and properties, Sum of independent random variables, Minimum
and Maximum of random variables, Comparisons between random variables, Moments of the random
variables, Random variables in the field of telecommunications, Transformations of random variables-
The probability generating function, the characteristic function of a pdf, The Laplace Transform of a
pdf, Methods for the generation of random variables- Method of the inverse of the distribution
function, Method of the transformation.
UNIT II: RANDOM PROCESSES

The Random Process Concept, Concept of Stationarity and Statistical Independence, First Order
Stationary Processes, Second Order and Wide Sense Stationary, (N-Order) and Strict Sense
Stationarity, Time Averages and Ergodicity, Mean Ergodic Processes, Correlation Ergodic Processes,
Autocorrelation Function and its Properties, Cross Correlation function and its properties, Covariance
Functions, The Power Spectrum- Properties, Relationship between Power spectrum and
Autocorrelation function.
UNIT III: Markov Chains and Queuing Theory

Queues, Poisson arrival process- Sum of independent Poisson processes, Random splitting of a
Poisson process, Compound Poisson processes, Birth death Markov chains, Formulation of Hidden
Markov Model (HMM), building, evaluation and decoding of HMM, Notations for Queuing systems,
The Little Theorem, M/M/1 queue analysis, M/M/1/K queue analysis, M/M/S queue analysis, M/M/S/S
queue analysis, The M/M/∞ queue analysis, Distribution of the queuing delays in the FIFO case-
M/M/1 case, M/M/S case.
UNIT IV: M/G/1 Queuing Theory

M/G/1 queue, M/G/1 system delay distribution in the FIFO case, Laplace Transform numerical
inversion method, Generalizations of the M/G/1 theory, Different imbedding instants in the M/G/1
theory, M/G/1 with geometrically distributed messages.
UNIT V: Local Area Network Analysis

Introduction, Contention based protocols- Aloha, Slotted Aloha, Aloha Protocol with ideal capture
effect, CSMA Schemes, Demand assignment protocols-Polling protocol, Token passing protocol,
Analysis of token and polling Schemes, R-Aloha, PRMA protocol, Comparisons between CSMA/CD
and Token Protocols, Fixed assignment Protocols- FDMA, TDMA, Resource reuse in cellular
systems, CDMA.
138
TEXTBOOK
1. Queuing Theory and Telecommunications Networks and Applications, Springer, Giovanni
Giambene.
2. Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal Principles-Peyton Z. Peebles, TMH, 4th
Edition,2001.
3. Digital Processing of Speech Signals. L.R Rabinar and R W Jhaung, 1978, PHI.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes – Athanasios Papoulis, S. Unnikrishna
Pillai – TMH, 2008
2. Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal Processing – Henry Stark, John
W. Woods, 3rd Edition, Pearson
3. Probability and Stochastic Processes – A Friendly Introduction for Electrical and Computer
Engineers – Roy D. Yates, David J. Goodman.
139

4 0 0 4
TCP/ IP AND ATM NETWORKS

(PG E - III)
Course Objectives:
1. To study Network Layer Protocols, Next Generation IP protocols

2. To learn about User Datagram Protocol, Transmission Control Protocol and stream control
Transmission protocol.
3. To understand techniques to improve QoS
4. To learn about the features of ATM networks. .
5. To study the various Interconnection Networks
Course Outcomes:
1. Get the concept of Network Layer Protocols and Transport Layer Protocols.
2. Understand and analyze about UDP, TCP AND SCTP protocols, flow and error control
techniques.
3. Learn congestion control mechanisms and techniques to improve Quality of Service in switched
networks
4. To understand features of Virtual circuit networks like ATM networks and their applications
5. Design and analyze various types of Inter connection Networks, understand the functioning of
Folding , Benes, Lopping bit allocation algorithms and their significance.
Unit I
Network Layer Protocols: Internet Protocol (IP), ICMPv4, Mobile IP
Next Generation IP: IPv6, Addressing IPv6 Protocol, ICMPV6 Protocol, Transition from IPV4 to IPV6
Transport Layer: Introduction to Transport Layer, Transport Layer Protocols: Simple Protocols, Stop
and Wait Protocols, Go Back N Protocol, Selective Repeat Protocol, Bidirectional Protocols:
Piggybacking Transport layer protocols Services and Port Numbers.
Unit II
User Datagram Protocol: User Datagram, UDP Services, UDP Applications
Transmission Control Protocol: TCP Services, TCP Features, Segments, TCP Connection, State
Transition Diagram, Windows in TCP, Flow and Error Control ,TCP Congestion Control, TCP Timers,
SCTP: SCTP Services, SCTP Features, Packet Format, An SCTP Association SCTP Flow and Error
Control, TCP in Wireless Domain.
Unit III
Congestion Control and Quality of Service: Data Traffic, Congestion, Congestion Control, Quality
of Service, Techniques to Improve QoS, Integrated Services, Differentiated Services, QoS in
Switched Networks
Queue Management: Passive-Drop trial, Drop front, Random drop, Active- early Random drop,
Random Early detection.
Unit IV
Virtual-Circuit Networks: Introduction, Frame relay Operation, Frame relay Layers, Congestion
Control, Leaky Bucket algorithm.
ATM: Design Goals, ATM Architecture, Switching, Switch Fabric, ATM Layers, Service Classes, ATM
Application.
SONET/SDH: Architecture, SONET Layers, SONET Frames, STS Multiplexing, SONET Networks
140
Unit V
Interconnection Networks
Introduction, Banyan Networks, Properties, Crossbar switch, Three stage Class networks,
Rearrangeble Networks, Folding algorithm, Benes Networks, Lopping algorithm, Bit allocation
algorithm.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Data Communications and Networking - B. A.Forouzan, 5th edition, 2013, TMH.
2. High Performance TCP/IP Networking –Mahabub Hassan and Raj Jain ,PHI,2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. ATM Fundamentals –N.N Biswas, Adventure Books,1998
141

0 0 3 2
MICROWAVE ENGINEERING LAB

PC (UG)
1. Reflex Klystron Characteristics

2. Gunn Diode Characteristics
3. Directional Coupler Characteristics
4. VSWR Measurement
5. Measurement of Waveguide Parameters
6. Measurement of Impedance of a given Load
7. Measurement of Scattering Parameters of a Magic Tee
8. Measurement of Scattering Parameters of a Circulator
9. Attenuation Measurement
10. Microwave Frequency Measurement
11. Antenna Pattern Measurements.
12. Study of HFSS.
13. Simulation of Radiation Patterns for some Standard Antennas
a) Dipole
b) Rectangular Patch
c) Circular Patch
142

0 0 4 2
ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB

( PGC – lab )
Note:
A. Minimum of 10 Experiments have to be conducted

B. All Experiments may be Simulated using MATLAB and to be verified theoretically.
1. Basic Operations on Signals, Generation of Various Signals and finding its FFT.
2. Program to verify Decimation and Interpolation of a given Sequences.
3. Program to Convert CD data into DVD data
4. Generation of Dual Tone Multiple Frequency (DTMF) Signals
5. Plot the Periodogram of a Noisy Signal and estimate PSD using Periodogram and Modified
Periodogram methods
6. Estimation of Power Spectrum using Bartlett and Welch methods
7. Verification of Autocorrelation Theorem
8. Parametric methods (Yule-Walker and Burg) of Power Spectrum Estimation
9. Estimation of data series using Nth order Forward Predictor and comparing to the Original
Signal
10. Design of LPC filter using Levinson-Durbin Algorithm
11. Computation of Reflection Coefficients using Schur Algorithm
12. To study Finite Length Effects using Simulink
13. ECG signal compression
14. Design and verification of Matched filter
15. Adaptive Noise Cancellation using Simulink
16. Design and Simulation of Notch Filter to remove 60Hz Hum/any unwanted frequency
component of given Signal (Speech/ECG)
143
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. / MBA) IV Year II-Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
MANAGEMENT SCIENCE
Objective
The course introduces the basic concepts of Management Science and Operations Management and
its application to business. The topics include human resource management, project and strategic
management; the course develops problem solving and spreadsheet skills, an invaluable tool for
modern business.
Learning outcome
To enable students to gain an insight into different managerial decisions using standard
techniques and problem structuring methods
Students will be able to gain an understanding of the core concepts of Management Science
and Operations Management;
To understand the management issues in different functional areas of management namely
operations and Human resources, strategy, marketing and project management.
Unit I Introduction to Management & Organisation: Concepts of Management and organization-

nature, importance and Functions of Management, Systems Approach to Management - Taylor’s
Scientific Management Theory – Fayal’s Principles of Management – Maslow’s theory of Hierarchy of
Human Needs – Douglas McGregor’s Theory X and Theory Y – Hertzberg Two Factor Theory of
Motivation - Leadership Styles, Social responsibilities of Management. Designing Organisational
Structures: Basic concepts related to Organisation - Departmentation and Decentralisation, Types and
Evaluation of mechanistic and organic structures of organisation and suitability.
Unit II Operations & Marketing Management: Principles and Types of Plant Layout-Methods of
production (Job, batch and Mass Production), Work Study -Basic procedure involved in Method Study
and Work Measurement – Business Process Reengineering (BPR) - Statistical Quality Control: control
charts for Variables and Attributes (simple Problems) and Acceptance Sampling, TQM, Six Sigma,
Deming’s contribution to quality. Objectives of Inventory control, EOQ, ABC Analysis, Purchase
Procedure, Stores Management and Stores Records – JIT System, Supply Chain Management,
Functions of Marketing, Marketing Mix, and Marketing Strategies based on Product Life Cycle,
Channels of distribution.
Unit III Human Resources Management (HRM): Concepts of HRM, HRD and Personnel
Management and Industrial Relations (PMIR), HRM vs PMIR, Basic functions of HR Manager:
Manpower planning, Recruitment, Selection, Training and Development, Placement, Wage and
Salary Administration, Promotion, Transfer, Separation, Performance Appraisal, Grievance Handling
and Welfare Administration, Job Evaluation and Merit Rating – Capability Maturity Model (CMM)
Levels – Performance Management System.
Unit IV Project Management (PERT/CPM): Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review
Technique (PERT), Critical Path Method (CPM), Identifying critical path, Probability of Completing the
project within given time, Project Cost Analysis, Project Crashing (simple problems).
Unit V Strategic Management and Contemporary Strategic Issues: Mission, Goals, Objectives,
Policy, Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate Planning Process, Environmental Scanning,
Value Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy Formulation and Implementation, Generic
Strategy alternatives. Bench Marking and Balanced Score Card as Contemporary Business
Strategies.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Aryasri: Management Science, McGraw Hill, 2012.
2. Vijay Kumar and Appa Rao, Management Science, Cengage, 2012.
144
REFERENCES :
1. Kotler Philip & Keller Kevin Lane: Marketing Management, Pearson, 2012.
2. Koontz & Weihrich: Essentials of Management, McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. Thomas N.Duening & John M.Ivancevich Management—Principles and Guidelines, Biztantra,
2012.
4. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press, 2012.
5. Samuel C.Certo: Modern Management, 2012.
6. Schermerhorn, Capling, Poole & Wiesner: Management, Wiley, 2012.
7. Parnell: Strategic Management, Cengage,2012.
8. Lawrence R Jauch, R.Gupta &William F.Glueck: Business Policy and Strategic Management,
Frank Bros.2012.
145
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. /MBA) IV Year II-Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORKS

(PGC - II)
Course Objectives:
1. To study the WLAN and WPAN architecture and protocols
2. To know about WiMAX services, 802.16 standard, cellular telephony & satellite networks.
3. To study the techniques to improve QoS.in Networks
4. To learn about the basic concepts of Ad hoc wireless Networks
5. To know about various Routing Protocols in Ad hoc Networks.
6. To learn the concepts of Wireless Sensor Networks, architecture and various data dissemination
and data gathering techniquess
Course Outcomes:
1. Acquire the knowledge about Wireless LANs, Bluetooth and WiMAX standards, architecture and
their sub-layers.
2. Understand congestion control mechanisms and techniques to improve Quality of Service in
switched networks
3. Get the basic concepts of Ad hoc wireless networks and its protocols and issues related to QoS,
energy management, scalability and Security.
4. Explain about Wireless Sensor Network architecture, data dissemination & data gathering
techniques and will be able to address the issues and challenges in designing Sensor Networks.
Unit I
Wireless LANs: Architectural Comparison, Characteristics, Access Control, IEEE 802.11 Project:
Architecture, MAC Sub layer, Addressing Mechanism, Physical Layer
Bluetooth: Architecture, Bluetooth Layers
WiMAX: Services, IEEE Project 802.16, Cellular Telephony: operation,1G,2G,3G,4G, Satellite
Networks, GEO, MEO and LEO Satellites
Unit II
Congestion Control and Quality of Service: Data Traffic, Congestion, Congestion Control, Quality
of Service, Techniques to Improve QoS, Integrated Services, Differentiated Services, QoS in
Switched Networks
Queue Management: Passive-Drop trial, Drop front, Random drop, Active- early Random drop,
Random Early detection.
Unit III
AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKS: Introduction, Cellular and Ad hoc Wireless Networks, Application
of Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, Issues in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, Medium Access Scheme,
Routing, Multicasting, Transport Layer Protocols, Pricing Scheme, Quality of Service Provisioning,
Self-Organization, Security, Addressing and Service Discovery, Energy Management, Scalability,
Deployment Considerations, Ad Hoc Wireless Internet
Unit IV
Quality of Service in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks:
Introduction, Real Time Traffic Support in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, QoS Parameters in Ad Hoc
Wireless Network, Issues and Challenges in providing QoS in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks,
Classification of QoS Solutions: MAC Layer Solutions, Cluster TDMA, IEEE 802.11e, DBASE,
Network Layer Solutions, QoS Routing Protocols, Ticket Based QoS Routing Protocol, Predictive
Location Based QoS routing protocol, Trigger Based Distributed QoS Routing Protocol, QoS enabled
AODV Routing Protocol, Bandwidth QoS Routing Protocol, On Demand QoS Routing Protocol, On
146
Demand Link-State Multipath QoS Routing Protocol, Asynchronous Slot Allocation Strategies. QoS
Frameworks for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks.
Unit V
Wireless Sensor Networks
Introduction, Application of Sensor Network , Comparison with Ad hoc Wireless Networks, Issues and
challenges in Designing a Sensor Network, Sensor Network Architecture, Layer Architecture, Cluster
Architecture, Data Dissemination Flooding, Gossiping, Rumor Routing, Sequential Assignment
Routing, Direct Diffusion, Sensor Protocols for Information via Negotiation, Cost- Field Approach,
Geography Hash Table, Small Minimum Energy Communication Network, Data Gathering, Direct
Transmission, Power Efficient Gathering for Sensor Information Systems, Binary Scheme, Chain
Based Three-Level Scheme.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and Protocols - C. Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj,
2004, PHI
2. Data Communications and Networking - B. A.Forouzan, 5th , 2013, TMH.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
147

4 0 0 4
ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING

(PG E – IV)
Prerequisite: Digital Signal Processing
Course Objectives :
The main objectives of the course are:
1. This course focuses on problems algorithms and solutions for processing signals in an manner
that is responsive to a changing environment.
2. To develop systems on recursive, model based estimation methods taking the advantage of the
statistical properties of the received signals.
3. To analyze the performance of adaptive filters and considers the application of the theory to a
variety of practical problems such as beam forming and echo cancellation signal.
4. To understand innovation process, Kalman filter theory and estimation of state using the
innovation process , concept of Kalman Gain and Filtering.
Course Outcomes:
After studying the course, the student is expected to be able to :
1. Design and apply optimal minimum mean square estimators and in particular linear estimators.
2. Understand and compute their expected performance and verify it.
Design , implement and apply Wiener Filters ( FIR, non-casual, causal) and evaluate their
performance.
3. To understand innovation process, Kalman filter theory and estimation of state using the
Innovation Process, concept of Kalman Gain and Filtering.
4. Design , implement and apply LMS, RLS and Kalman filters to given applications.
UNIT –I:
Introduction to Adaptive Systems
Adaptive Systems: Definitions, Characteristics, Applications, Example of an Adaptive System. The
Adaptive Linear Combiner - Description, Weight Vectors, Desired Response Performance function -
Gradient & Mean Square Error.
UNIT –II:
Development of Adaptive Filter Theory & Searching the Performance surface:
Introduction to Filtering - Smoothing and Prediction – Linear Optimum Filtering, Problem statement,
Principle of Orthogonality - Minimum Mean Square Error, Wiener- Hopf equations, Error Performance
- Minimum Mean Square Error.
Searching the performance surface – Methods & Ideas of Gradient Search methods - Gradient
Searching Algorithm & its Solution - Stability & Rate of convergence - Learning Curves.
UNIT –III:
Steepest Descent Algorithms
Gradient Search by Newton’s Method, Method of Steepest Descent, Comparison of Learning Curves.
UNIT –IV:
LMS Algorithm & Applications
Overview - LMS Adaptation algorithms, Stability & Performance analysis of LMS Algorithms - LMS
Gradient & Stochastic algorithms - Convergence of LMS algorithm.
Applications: Noise cancellation – Cancellation of Echoes in long distance telephone circuits,
Adaptive Beam forming.
148
UNIT –V:
Kalman Filtering: Introduction to RLS Algorithm, Statement of Kalman filtering problem, The
Innovation Process, Estimation of State using the Innovation Process- Expression of Kalman Gain,
Filtering Examples using Kalman filtering.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Adaptive Signal Processing - Bernard Widrow, Samuel D.Strearns, 2005, PE.
2. Adaptive Filter Theory - Simon Haykin-, 4 ed., 2002,PE Asia.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Optimum signal processing: An introduction - Sophocles.J.Orfamadis, 2 ed., 1988, McGraw-Hill,
Newyork
2. Adaptive signal processing-Theory and Applications, S.Thomas Alexander, 1986, Springer –
Verlag.
3. Siganl analysis – Candy, Mc Graw Hill Int. Student Edition
4. James V. Candy, Signal Processing : A Modern Approach, McGraw-Hill, International Edition,
1988.
149

4 0 0 4
EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN

(PG E – IV)
Prerequisite : None
Course Objectives:
1. To provide an overview of Design Principles of Embedded System.
2. To provide clear understanding about the role of firmware , operating systems in correlation with
hardware systems.
Course Outcomes :
1. Expected to understand the selection procedure of Processors in the Embedded domain.
2. Design Procedure for Embedded Firmware.
3. Expected to visualize the role of Real time Operating Systems in Embedded Systems
4. Expected to evaluate the Correlation between task synchronization and latency issues
UNIT -I:
Introduction to Embedded Systems
Definition of Embedded System, Embedded Systems Vs General Computing Systems, History of
Embedded Systems, Classification, Major Application Areas, Purpose of Embedded Systems,
Characteristics and Quality Attributes of Embedded Systems.
UNIT -II:
Typical Embedded System:
Core of the Embedded System: General Purpose and Domain Specific Processors, ASICs, PLDs,
Commercial Off-The-Shelf Components (COTS), Memory: ROM, RAM, Memory according to the type
of Interface, Memory Shadowing, Memory selection for Embedded Systems, Sensors and Actuators,
Communication Interface: Onboard and External Communication Interfaces.
UNIT -III:
Embedded Firmware:
Reset Circuit, Brown-out Protection Circuit, Oscillator Unit, Real Time Clock, Watchdog Timer,
Embedded Firmware Design Approaches and Development Languages.
UNIT -IV:
RTOS Based Embedded System Design:
Operating System Basics, Types of Operating Systems, Tasks, Process and Threads,
Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Task Scheduling.
UNIT -V:
Task Communication: Shared Memory, Message Passing, Remote Procedure Call and Sockets,
Task Synchronization: Task Communication/Synchronization Issues, Task Synchronization
Techniques, Device Drivers, How to Choose an RTOS.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Introduction to Embedded Systems - Shibu K.V, Mc Graw Hill.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Embedded Systems - Raj Kamal, TMH.
2. Embedded System Design - Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, John Wiley.
3. Embedded Systems – Lyla, Pearson, 2013
4. An Embedded Software Primer - David E. Simon, Pearson Education.
150

4 0 0 4
NETWORK SECURITY AND CRYPTOGRAPHY
(PG E - IV)
Prerequisite : None
Course Objectives:
1. Understand the basic concept of Cryptography and Network Security, their mathematical models
2. To provide deeper understanding of application to network security, threats/vulnerabilities to
networks and countermeasures
3. To create an understanding of Authentication functions the manner in which Message
Authentication Codes and Hash Functions works
4. To provide familiarity in Intrusion detection and Firewall Design Principles
Course Outcomes:
After completion of this course, the student shall be able to:
1. Describe computer and network security fundamental concepts and principles
2. Identify and assess different types of threats, malware, spyware, viruses, vulnerabilities
3. Encrypt and decrypt messages using block ciphers
4. Describe the inner-workings of today's remote exploitation and penetration techniques
5. Describe the inner-workings of popular encryption algorithms, digital signatures, certificates, anti-
cracking techniques, and copy-right protections
6. Demonstrate the ability to select among available network security technology and protocols such
as IDS, IPS, firewalls, SSL, SSH, IPSec, TLS, VPNs, etc.
7. Analyze key agreement algorithms to identify their weaknesses
UNIT- I: Introduction : Attacks, Services and Mechanisms, Security attacks, Security services, A
Model for Internetwork security, Classical Techniques: Conventional Encryption model,
Steganography, Classical Encryption Techniques.
Modern Techniques : Simplified DES, Block Cipher Principles, Data Encryption standard, Strength of
DES, Block Cipher Design Principles.
UNIT- II: Encryption : Triple DES, International Data Encryption algorithm, Blowfish, RC5,
Characteristics of Advanced Symmetric block cifers.
Conventional Encryption
Placement of Encryption function, Traffic confidentiality, Key distribution, Random Number
Generation.
UNIT - III: Public Key Cryptography

Principles, RSA Algorithm, Key Management, Diffie-Hellman Key exchange, Elliptic Curve
Cryptograpy.
Number Theory
Prime and Relatively prime numbers, Modular arithmetic, Fermat’s and Euler’s theorems, Testing for
primality, Euclid’s Algorithm, the Chinese remainder theorem, Discrete logarithms.
UNIT- IV: Message Authentication and Hash Functions

Authentication requirements and functions, Message Authentication, Hash functions, Security of
Hash functions and MACs.
Hash and Mac Algorithms
MD File, Message digest Algorithm, Secure Hash Algorithm.
Digital signatures and Authentication protocols: Digital signatures, Authentication Protocols, Digital
signature standards.
Authentication Applications
Kerberos, Electronic Mail Security: Pretty Good Privacy, S/MIME.
151
UNIT – V: IP Security
Overview, Architecture, Authentication, Encapsulating Security Payload, Key Management. Web
Security: Web Security requirements, Secure sockets layer and Transport layer security, Secure
Electronic Transaction.
Intruders, Viruses and Worms: Intruders, Viruses and Related threats.
Fire Walls: Fire wall Design Principles, Trusted systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice - William Stallings, Pearson
Education.
2. Network Security Essentials (Applications and Standards) by William Stallings Pearson
Education.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals of Network Security by Eric Maiwald (Dreamtech press)
2. Network Security - Private Communication in a Public World by Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman
and Mike Speciner, Pearson/PHI.
3. Principles of Information Security, Whitman, Thomson.
4. Network Security: The complete reference, Robert Bragg, Mark Rhodes, TMH
5. Introduction to Cryptography, Buchmann, Springer.
152

0 0 4 2
ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORKS LAB

(PGC Lab)
1. Simulation and analysis of MAC Layer protocols.

2. Simulation and analysis of various topologies.
3. Simulation and analysis of wired routing protocols.
4. Simulation and analysis of wireless routing protocols.
5. Simulation and analysis of various security attacks.
6. Analysis of log files and provide the intruder statistics.
7. Simulation of Queue Management Schemes.
8. Evaluation of DES, AES and Triple-DES.
9. Evaluation of Substitution and Transposition ciphers.
10. Error correcting coding in CDMA Mobile communication system.
11. Capturing and tracking of GOLD sequence in CDMA system.
12. Study of Satellite Azimuth & Elevation using sky Plot Window.
13. Study of Global Positioning System Applications.
14. Study of I2C and UART protocols.
153
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. /MBA) V Year I-Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKS

(PGC – III)
Prerequisite: Digital Communications
Course objectives:
• To provide the students with the fundamental treatment about many practical and theoretical
concepts that forms basic of wireless communications.
• To equip the students with various kinds of wireless networks and its operations.
• To prepare students to understand the concept of frequency reuse, and be able to apply it in the
design of mobile cellular system.
• To prepare students to understand various modulation schemes and multiple access techniques
that are used in wireless communications,
• To provide an analytical perspective on the design and analysis of the traditional and emerging
wireless networks, and to discuss the nature of, and solution methods to, the fundamental
problems in wireless networking.
• To train students to understand the architecture and operation of various wireless wide area
networks such as GSM, IS-95, GPRS and SMS.
• To train students to understand wireless LAN architectures and operation.
• To prepare students to understand the emerging technique OFDM and its importance in the
wireless communications.
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to:
• Understand the principles of wireless communications.
• Understand fundamentals of wireless networking
• Understand cellular system design concepts.
• Analyze various multiple access schemes used in wireless communication.
• Understand wireless wide area networks and their performance analysis.
• Demonstrate wireless local area networks and their specifications.
• Familiar with some of the existing and emerging wireless standards.
• Understand the concept of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing.
UNIT -I:
The Cellular Concept-System Design Fundamentals
Introduction, Frequency Reuse, Channel Assignment Strategies, Handoff Strategies- Prioritizing
Handoffs, Practical Handoff Considerations, Interference and system capacity – Co channel
Interference and system capacity, Channel planning for Wireless Systems, Adjacent Channel
interference , Power Control for Reducing interference, Trunking and Grade of Service, Improving
Coverage & Capacity in Cellular Systems- Cell Splitting, Sectoring .
UNIT –II:
Mobile Radio Propagation: Large-Scale Path Loss
Introduction to Radio Wave Propagation, Free Space Propagation Model, Relating Power to Electric
Field, The Three Basic Propagation Mechanisms, Reflection-Reflection from Dielectrics, Brewster
Angle, Reflection from prefect conductors, Ground Reflection (Two-Ray) Model, Diffraction-Fresnel
Zone Geometry, Knife-edge Diffraction Model, Multiple knife-edge Diffraction, Scattering, Outdoor
Propagation Models- Longley-Ryce Model, Okumura Model, Hata Model, PCS Extension to Hata
Model, Walfisch and Bertoni Model, Wideband PCS Microcell Model, Indoor Propagation Models-
Partition losses (Same Floor), Partition losses between Floors, Log-distance path loss model,
Ericsson Multiple Breakpoint Model, Attenuation Factor Model, Signal penetration into buildings, Ray
Tracing and Site Specific Modeling.
154
UNIT –III:
Mobile Radio Propagation: Small –Scale Fading and Multipath
Small Scale Multipath propagation-Factors influencing small scale fading, Doppler shift, Impulse
Response Model of a multipath channel- Relationship between Bandwidth and Received power,
Small-Scale Multipath Measurements-Direct RF Pulse System, Spread Spectrum Sliding Correlator
Channel Sounding, Frequency Domain Channels Sounding, Parameters of Mobile Multipath
Channels-Time Dispersion Parameters, Coherence Bandwidth, Doppler Spread and Coherence Time,
Types of Small-Scale Fading-Fading effects Due to Multipath Time Delay Spread, Flat fading,
Frequency selective fading, Fading effects Due to Doppler Spread-Fast fading, slow fading, Statistical
Models for multipath Fading Channels-Clarke’s model for flat fading, spectral shape due to Doppler
spread in Clarke’s model, Simulation of Clarke and Gans Fading Model, Level crossing and fading
statistics, Two-ray Rayleigh Fading Model.
UNIT -IV:
Equalization and Diversity
Introduction, Fundamentals of Equalization, Training A Generic Adaptive Equalizer, Equalizers in a
communication Receiver, Linear Equalizers, Non linear Equalization-Decision Feedback Equalization
(DFE), Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation (MLSE) Equalizer, Algorithms for adaptive
equalization-Zero Forcing Algorithm, Least Mean Square Algorithm, Recursive least squares
algorithm. Diversity Techniques-Derivation of selection Diversity improvement, Derivation of Maximal
Ratio Combining improvement, Practical Space Diversity Consideration-Selection Diversity, Feedback
or Scanning Diversity, Maximal Ratio Combining, Equal Gain Combining, Polarization Diversity,
Frequency Diversity, Time Diversity, RAKE Receiver.
UNIT -V:
Wireless Networks
Introduction to wireless Networks, Advantages and disadvantages of Wireless Local Area Networks,
WLAN Topologies, WLAN Standard IEEE 802.11,IEEE 802.11 Medium Access Control, Comparision
of IEEE 802.11 a,b,g and n standards, IEEE 802.16 and its enhancements, Wireless PANs, Hiper
Lan, WLL.
TEXT BOOKS:
nd
1. Wireless Communications, Principles, Practice – Theodore, S. Rappaport, 2 Ed., 2002, PHI.
2. Wireless Communications-Andrea Goldsmith, 2005 Cambridge University Press.
3. Principles of Wireless Networks – Kaveh Pah Laven and P. Krishna Murthy, 2002, PE
4. Mobile Cellular Communication – Gottapu Sasibhushana Rao, Pearson Education, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wireless Digital Communications – Kamilo Feher, 1999, PHI.
2. Wireless Communication and Networking – William Stallings, 2003, PHI.
155

4 0 0 4
IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING

(PG E – V)

Course Objectives:
1. The student will be able to understand the quality improvement methods of Image.
2. To study the basic digital image and video filter operations.
3. Understand the fundamentals of Image Compression.
4. Understand the representation of video.
5. Understand the principles and methods of motion estimation.
Course Outcomes:
1. The students will learn image representation, filtering , compression.
2. Students will learn the basics of video processing , representation, motion estimation.
UNIT – I:
Fundamentals of Image Processing and Image Transforms
Basic steps of Image Processing System Sampling and Quantization of an image, Basic relationship
between pixels.
Image Segmentation
Segmentation concepts, Point, Line and Edge Detection, Thresholding, Region based segmentation.
UNIT – II:
Image Enhancement
Spatial domain methods: Histogram processing, Fundamentals of Spatial filtering, Smoothing spatial
filters, Sharpening spatial filters.
Frequency domain methods: Basics of filtering in frequency domain, image smoothing, image
sharpening, Selective filtering.
UNIT – III:
Image Compression
Image compression fundamentals - Coding Redundancy, Spatial and Temporal redundancy,
Compression models: Lossy & Lossless, Huffman coding, , Bit plane coding, Transform coding,
Predictive coding, Wavelet coding, Lossy Predictive coding, JPEG Standards.
UNIT - IV:
Basic Steps of Video Processing
Analog Video, Digital Video. Time-Varying Image Formation models: Three-Dimensional Motion
Models, Geometric Image Formation, Photometric Image Formation, Sampling of Video signals,
Filtering operations.
UNIT – V:
2-D Motion Estimation
Optical flow, General Methodologies, Pixel Based Motion Estimation, Block- Matching Algorithm,
Mesh based Motion Estimation, Global Motion Estimation, Region based Motion Estimation, Multi
resolution motion estimation, Waveform based coding, Block based transform coding, Predictive
coding, Application of motion estimation in Video coding.
156
TEXT BOOKS:
rd
1. Digital Image Processing – Gonzaleze and Woods, 3 ed., Pearson.
2. Video Processing and Communication – Yao Wang, Joem Ostermann and Ya–quin Zhang. 1st
Ed., PH Int.
REFRENCE BOOKS:
1. Digital Video Processing – M. Tekalp, Prentice Hall International

2. Digital Image Processing – S.Jayaraman, S.Esakkirajan, T.Veera Kumar –TMH, 2009
157

4 0 0 4
4G TECHNOLOGIES
(PG E - V)
Prerequisite: None.
Course Objectives:
1. To know about Second Generation and Third Generation Cellular technologies
2. To study the Evolution Generation(2.5G) technology platforms,
3. To learn about OFDM modulation technique and their evaluation parameters.
4. To understand UWB wireless channels, data modulation and its features.
5. To study the 4G technology.
Course Outcomes:
1. Explain and compare Second and Third Generation technologies and their architectures.
2. Understand improved version of 2G technology i.e., evolution Generation (2.5G) and data
transmission using GPRS, EDGE, HSCSD.
3. Get the knowledge of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing and evaluate the
performance using channel model and SNR, issues regarding OFDM.
4. Acquire the knowledge about UWB wireless channels, data modulation and their features.
5. Understand 4G Cellular technology and advantages of new technologies in cellular data
networks.
UNIT I: 2G and 3G technology

Second Generation (2G) - Overview, Enhancements over 1G Systems, Integration with Existing 1G
Systems, GSM, IS-136 System Description, IS-95 System Description, iDEN (Integrated Dispatch
Enhanced Network), CDPD
Third Generation (3G)- Overview, Introduction, Universal Mobile Telecommunications Service
(UMTS), UMTS Services, The UMTS Air Interface, Overview of the 3GPP Release 1999 Network
Architecture, Overview of the 3GPP Release 4 Network Architecture, Overview of the 3GPP Release
5 All-IP Network Architecture, Overview CDMA2000, Commonality Between, DMA/CDMA2000/CDM
UNIT II: The Evolution Generation (2.5G)
What Is 2.5G?,Enhancements over 2G, Technology Platforms, General Packet Radio Service,
(GPRS), Enhanced Data Rates for Global Evolution (EDGE),High-Speed Circuit Switched Data
(HSCSD), CDMA2000 (1XRTT), WAP, Migration Path from 2G to 2.5G to 3G,
UNIT III: OFDM
Introduction to OFDM, Multicarrier Modulation and Cyclic Prefix, Channel model and SNR
performance, OFDM Issues – PAPR, Frequency and Timing Offset Issues.
UNIT IV: UWB
UWB Definition and Features, UWB Wireless Channels, UWB Data Modulation, Uniform Pulse Train.
UNIT V: 4G Cellular technology :
4G evolution, objectives of the projected 4G, advantages of 4G network technology over 3G,
applications of 4G, 4G technologies, Smart antenna techniques, 4G software, New technologies in
cellular data networks.
Text books:
nd
1. 3G Wireless Networks, 2 ed., Clint Smith, P.E , Daniel Collins
2. Mobile Cellular Communication , Gottapu Sasibhuhsana Rao, PEARSON, 2013
Reference Books:
1. 3G Networks Architecture, Protocols and Procedures, Sumith Kaseara, Nishit Narang
158

4 0 0 4
MULTI-MEDIA AND SIGNAL CODING

(PG E-V)
Prerequisite: Artificial Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems.
Course Objectives:
This course makes the students to Understand
1. Various image & video processing algorithms.
2. Various video compression techniques.
3. Various audio compression techniques.
Course Outcomes:
On completion of this course the students will be able to
1. Represent and convert various colour models.
2. Simulate various video compression image techniques and can suggest the appropriate video
compression techniques for specific application.
3. Simulate various audio compression techniques and can suggest the appropriate audio
compression method for specific application.
UNIT -I:
Introduction to Multimedia: Multimedia, World Wide Web, Overview of Multimedia Tools, Multimedia
Authoring, Graphics/ Image Data Types, and File Formats.
Color in Image and Video: Color Science – Image Formation, Camera Systems, Gamma Correction,
Color Matching Functions, CIE Chromaticity Diagram, Color Monitor Specifications, Out-of-Gamut
Colors, White Point Correction, XYZ to RGB Transform, Transform with Gamma Correction, L*A*B*
Color Model. Color Models in Images – RGB Color Model for CRT Displays, Subtractive Color: CMY
Color Model, Transformation from RGB to CMY, Under Color Removal: CMYK System, Printer
Gamuts, Color Models in Video – Video Color Transforms, YUV Color Model, YIQ Color Model, Ycbcr
Color Model.
UNIT -II:
Video Concepts: Types of Video Signals, Analog Video, Digital Video.
Audio Concepts: Digitization of Sound, Quantization and Transmission of Audio.
UNIT -III:
Compression Algorithms:
Lossless Compression Algorithms: Run Length Coding, Variable Length Coding, Arithmetic
Coding, Lossless JPEG, Image Compression.
Lossy Image Compression Algorithms: Transform Coding: KLT And DCT Coding, Wavelet Based
Coding.
Image Compression Standards: JPEG and JPEG2000.
UNIT -IV:
Video Compression Techniques: Introduction to Video Compression, Video Compression Based on
Motion Compensation, Search for Motion Vectors, H.261- Intra-Frame and Inter-Frame Coding,
Quantization, Encoder and Decoder, Overview of MPEG1 and MPEG2.
UNIT -V:
Audio Compression Techniques: ADPCM in Speech Coding, G.726 ADPCM, Vocoders – Phase
Insensitivity, Channel Vocoder, Formant Vocoder, Linear Predictive Coding, CELP, Hybrid Excitation
Vocoders, MPEG Audio – MPEG Layers, MPEG Audio Strategy, MPEG Audio Compression
Algorithms, MPEG-2 AAC, MPEG-4 Audio.
159
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals of Multimedia – Ze- Nian Li, Mark S. Drew, PHI, 2010.
st
2. Multimedia Signals & Systems – Mrinal Kr. Mandal Springer International Edition 1 Edition, 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Multimedia Communication Systems – Techniques, Stds& Netwroks K.R. Rao, Zorans. Bojkoric,
st
Dragorad A.Milovanovic, 1 Edition, 2002.
2. Fundamentals of Multimedia Ze- Nian Li, Mark S.Drew, Pearson Education (LPE), 1st Edition,
2009.
st
3. Multimedia Systems John F. Koegel Bufond Pearson Education (LPE), 1 Edition, 2003.
4. Digital Video Processing – A. Murat Tekalp, PHI, 1996.
5. Video Processing and Communications – Yaowang, Jorn Ostermann, Ya-QinZhang, Pearson,
2002.
6. Judith Jeffocate, “Printmedia in practice (Theory and Applications)”, PHI, 1998.
160

4 0 0 4
CODING THEORY AND TECHNIQUES

(PG E - VI)
Prerequisite: Digital Communications
Course Objectives:
1. To acquire the knowledge in measurement of information and errors.
2. T study the generation of various code methods.
3. To study the various application of codes.
Course Outcomes:
1. Learning the measurement of information and errors.
2. Obtain knowledge in designing various codes like block codes, cyclic codes, convolution codes,
turbo codes and space codes
UNIT – I:
Coding for Reliable Digital Transmission and storage
Mathematical model of Information, A Logarithmic Measure of Information, Average and Mutual
Information and Entropy, Types of Errors, Error Control Strategies.
Linear Block Codes: Introduction to Linear Block Codes, Syndrome and Error Detection, Minimum
Distance of a Block code, Error-Detecting and Error-correcting Capabilities of a Block code, Standard
array and Syndrome Decoding, Probability of an undetected error for Linear Codes over a BSC,
Hamming Codes. Applications of Block codes for Error control in data storage system
UNIT - II:
Cyclic Codes : Description, Generator and Parity-check Matrices, Encoding, Syndrome Computation
and Error Detection, Decoding ,Cyclic Hamming Codes, Shortened cyclic codes, Error-trapping
decoding for cyclic codes, Majority logic decoding for cyclic codes.
UNIT – III:
Convolutional Codes : Encoding of Convolutional Codes, Structural and Distance Properties,
maximum likelihood decoding, Sequential decoding, Majority- logic decoding of Convolution codes.
Application of Viterbi Decoding and Sequential Decoding, Applications of Convolutional codes in ARQ
system.
UNIT – IV:
Turbo Codes
LDPC Codes- Codes based on sparse graphs, Decoding for binary erasure channel, Log-likelihood
algebra, Brief propagation, Product codes, Iterative decoding of product codes, Concatenated
convolutional codes- Parallel concatenation, The UMTS Turbo code, Serial concatenation, Parallel
concatenation, Turbo decoding
UNIT - V:
Space-Time Codes
Introduction, Digital modulation schemes, Diversity, Orthogonal space- Time Block codes, Alamouti’s
schemes, Extension to more than Two Transmit Antennas, Simulation Results, Spatial Multiplexing :
General Concept, Iterative APP Preprocessing and Per-layer Decoding, Linear Multilayer Detection,
Original BLAST Detection, QL Decomposition and Interface Cancellation, Performance of Multi –
Layer Detection Schemes, Unified Description by Linear Dispersion Codes.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Error Control Coding- Fundamentals and Applications –Shu Lin, Daniel J.Costello,Jr, Prentice
Hall, Inc.
2. Error Correcting Coding Theory-Man Young Rhee- 1989, McGraw-Hill
161
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Error Correcting Coding Theory-Man Young Rhee-1989,McGraw – Hill Publishing,19
2. Digital Communications-Fundamental and Application - Bernard Sklar, PE.
3. Digital Communications- John G. Proakis, 5th ed., 2008, TMH.
4. Introduction to Error Control Codes-Salvatore Gravano-oxford
5. Error Correction Coding – Mathematical Methods and Algorithms – Todd K.Moon, 2006, Wiley
India.
6. Information Theory, Coding and Cryptography – Ranjan Bose, 2nd Edition, 2009, TMH.
162

4 0 0 4
SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO

(PG E-VI)
Prerequisite: TCP/ IP , Digital Signal Processing
Course Objectives:
The objectives of this course is
1. To provide fundamentals and state of the art concepts in software defined radio.
Course Outcomes:
On completion of this course, the students:
1. Understand the design principles of software defined radio.
2. Understand the analog RF components as front end block in implementation of SDR.
3. Understand digital hardware architectures and development methods.
4. Understand the radio recourse management in heterogeneous networks.
5. Understand the object oriented representation of radio and network resources.
UNIT -I: Introduction: The Need for Software Radios, What is Software Radio, Characteristics and
benefits of software radio- Design Principles of Software Radio, RF Implementation issues- The
Purpose of RF Front – End, Dynamic Range- The Principal Challenge of Receiver Design – RF
Receiver Front- End Topologies- Enhanced Flexibility of the RF Chain with Software Radios-
Importance of the Components to Overall Performance- Transmitter Architectures and Their Issues-
Noise and Distortion in the RF Chain, ADC and DAC Distortion.
UNIT -II: Profile and Radio Resource Management : Communication Profiles- Introduction,
Communication Profiles, Terminal Profile, Service Profile , Network Profile, User Profile,
Communication Profile Architecture, Profile Data Structure, XML Structure, Distribution of Profile
Data, Access to Profile Data, Management of Communication Profiles, Communication Classmarks,
Dynamic Classmarks for Reconfigurable Terminals, Compression and Coding, Meta Profile Data
UNIT -III: Radio Resource Management in Heterogeneous Networks : Introduction, Definition of

Radio Resource Management, Radio Resource Units over RRM Phases, RRM Challenges and
Approaches, RRM Modelling and Investigation Approaches, Investigations of JRRM in
Heterogeneous Networks, Measuring Gain in the Upper Bound Due to JRRM, Circuit-Switched
System, Packet-Switched System, Functions and Principles of JRRM, General Architecture of JRRM,
Detailed RRM Functions in Sub-Networks and Overall Systems
UNIT -IV: Reconfiguration of the Network Elements : Introduction, Reconfiguration of Base

Stations and Mobile Terminals, Abstract Modelling of Reconfigurable Devices, the Role of Local
Intelligence in Reconfiguration, Performance Issues, Classification and Rating of Reconfigurable
Hardware, Processing Elements, Connection Elements, Global Interconnect Networks, Hierarchical
Interconnect Networks, Installing a New Configuration, Applying Reconfiguration Strategies,
Reconfiguration Based on Comparison, Resource Recycling, Flexible Workload Management at the
Physical Layer, Optimised Reconfiguration, Optimisation Parameters and Algorithms, Optimization
Algorithms, Specific Reconfiguration Requirements, Reconfiguring Base Stations, Reconfiguring
Mobile Terminals
UNIT -V: Object – Oriented Representation of Radios and Network Resources: Networks- Object
Oriented Programming- Object Brokers- Mobile Application Environments- Joint Tactical Radio
System.
Case Studies in Software Radio Design: Introduction and Historical Perspective, SPEAK easy-
JTRS, Wireless Information Transfer System, SDR-3000 Digital Transceiver Subsystem, Spectrum
Ware, CHARIOT.
163
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Software Defined Radio Architecture System and Functions- Markus Dillinger, Kambiz Madani,
WILEY 2003
2. Software Defined Radio: Enabling Technologies- Walter Tuttle Bee, 2002, Wiley Publications.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Software Radio: A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering - Jeffrey H. Reed, 2002, PEA
Publication.
2. Software Defined Radio for 3G - Paul Burns, 2002, Artech House.
3. Software Defined Radio: Architectures, Systems and Functions - Markus Dillinger, Kambiz
Madani, Nancy Alonistioti, 2003, Wiley.
4. Software Radio Architecture: Object Oriented Approaches to wireless System Enginering –
Joseph Mitola, III, 2000, John Wiley & Sons.
164

4 0 0 4
SPREAD SPECTRUM COMMUNICATIONS
(PG E – VI)
Prerequisite: Communication
Course Objectives:
1. Understand the concept of Spread Spectrum and study various types of Spread spectrum
sequences and their generation.
2. Understand the principles of Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) and use of Spread
spectrum concept in CDMA
3. Understand various Code tracing loops for optimum tracking of wideband signals viz spread
spectrum signals
4. Understand the procedure for synchronization of receiver for receiving the Spread spectrum
signal.
5. Study the performance of spread spectrum systems in Jamming environment, systems with
Forward Error Correction and Multiuser detection in CDMA cellular radio.
Course Outcomes:
1. Generate various types of Spread spectrum sequences and can simulate CDMA system
(Both Transmitter & Receiver).
2. Analyze the performance of Spread spectrum systems in Jamming environment and systems
with Forward Error Correction.
3. Can provide detection and cancellation schemes for Multiusers in CDMA cellular radio.
UNIT -I:
Introduction to Spread Spectrum Systems: Fundamental Concepts of Spread Spectrum Systems,
Pseudo Noise Sequences, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum, Frequency Hop Spread Spectrum,
Hybrid Direct Sequence Frequency Hop Spread Spectrum, Code Division Multiple Access.
Binary Shift Register Sequences for Spread Spectrum Systems:
Introduction, Definitions, Mathematical Background and Sequence Generator Fundamentals, Maximal
Length Sequences, Gold Codes.
UNIT -II:
Code Tracking Loops: Introduction, Optimum Tracking of Wideband Signals, Base Band Delay-Lock
Tracking Loop, Tau-Dither Non- Coherent Tracking Loop, Double Dither Non-Coherent Tracking
Loop.
UNIT -III:
Initial Synchronization of the Receiver Spreading Code: Introduction, Problem Definition and the
Optimum Synchronizer, Serial Search Synchronization Techniques, Synchronization using a Matched
Filter, Synchronization by Estimated the Received Spreading Code.
UNIT -IV:
Cellular Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Principles: Introduction, Wide Band Mobile
Channel, The Cellular CDMA System, Single User Receiver in a Multi User Channel, CDMA System
Capacity,
Multi-User Detection in CDMA Cellular Radio: Optimal Multi-User Detection, Linear Suboptimal
Detectors, Interference Combat Detection Schemes, Interference Cancellation Techniques.
UNIT -V:
Performance of Spread Spectrum Systems in Jamming Environments: Spread Spectrum
Communication System Model, Performance of Spread Spectrum Systems without Coding.
165
Performance of Spread Spectrum Systems with Forward Error Correction: Elementary Block
Coding Concepts, Optimum Decoding Rule, Calculation of Error Probability, Elementary Convolution
Coding Concepts, Viterbi Algorithm, Decoding and Bit-Error Rate.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rodger E Ziemer, Roger L. Peterson and David E Borth - “Introduction to Spread Spectrum
Communication- Pearson, 1st Edition, 1995.
2. Mosa Ali Abu-Rgheff – “Introduction to CDMA Wireless Communications.” Elsevier Publications,
2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. George R. Cooper, Clare D. Mc Gillem - “Modern Communication and Spread Spectrum,”
McGraw Hill, 1986.
st
2. Andrew j. Viterbi - “CDMA: Principles of spread spectrum communication,” Pearson Education, 1
Edition, 1995.
3. Kamilo Feher - “Wireless Digital Communications,” PHI, 2009.
4. Andrew Richardson - “WCDMA Design Handbook,” Cambridge University Press, 2005.
5. Steve Lee - Spread Spectrum CDMA, McGraw Hill, 2002.
166

4 0 0 4
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS AND ARCHITECTURES
(PG E – VII)
Course Objectives
The objectives of the course are:
• To recall digital transform techniques.
• To introduce architectural features of programmable DSP Processors of TI and Analog
Devices.
• To give practical examples of DSP Processor architectures for better understanding.
• To develop the programming knowledge using Instruction set of DSP Processors.
• To understand interfacing techniques to memory and I/O devices.
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student
• Be able to distinguish between the architectural features of General purpose processors and
DSP processors.
• Understand the architectures of TMS320054xx and ADSP 2100 DSP devices.
• Be able to write simple assembly language programs using instruction set of TMS32OC54xx.
• Can inteace various devices to DSP Processors.
UNIT –I
Introduction to Digital Signal Processing
Introduction, A Digital signal- processing system, The sampling process, Discrete time sequences.
Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) and Fast Fourier Transform (FET), Linear time- invariant systems,
Digital filters, Decimation and interpolation.
Computational Accuracy in DSP Implementations
Number formats for signals and coefficients in DSP systems, Dynamic Range and Precision,Sources
of error in DSP implementations, AID Conversion errors, DSP Computational errors, D/A Conversion
Errors, Compensating filter.
UNIT —II
Architectures for Programmable DSP Devices
Basic Architectural features, DSP Computational Building Blocks, Bus Architecture and Memory, Data
Addressing Capabilities, Address Generation Unit, Programmability and Program Execution, Speed
Issues, Features for External interfacing.
UNIT -III
Programmable Digital Signal Processors: Commercial Digital signal- processing Devices, Data
Addressing modes of TMS32OC54XX DSPs, Data Addressing modes of TMS32OC54XX Processors,
Memory space of TMS32OC54XX Processors, Program Control, TMS32OC54XX instructions and
Programming, On-Chip Peripherals, Interrupts of TMS32OC54XX processors, Pipeline Operation of
TMS32OC54XX Processors.
UNIT -IV
Analog Devices Family of DSP Devices
Analog Devices Family of DSP Devices —ALU and MAC block diagram, Shifter Instruction, Base
Architecture of ADSP 2100, ADSP-2181 high performance Processor.
Introduction to Blackfin Processor – The Blackfin Processor, Introduction to Micro Signal
Architecture, Overview of Hardware Processing Units and Register files, Address Arithmetic Unit,
Control Unit, Bus Architecture and Memory, Basic Peripherals.
167
UNIT -V
Interfacing Memory and I/O Peripherals to Programmable DSP Devices
Memory space organization, External bus interfacing signals, Memory interface, Parallel I/O interface,
Programmed I/O, Interrupts and I/O, Direct memory access (DMA).
TEXT BOOKS
1. Digital Signal Processing — Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan, Thomson Publications, 2004.
2. A Practical Approach To Digital Signal Processing – K Padmanabhan, R Vijayarajeswaran,
Ananthi. S, New Age International, 2006/2009
3. Embedded Signal Processing with the Micro Signal Architecture Publisher: Woon-Seng Gan,
Sen M. Kuo, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Programming and Applications — B. Venkataramani

and M. Bhaskar, 2002, TMH.
2. Digital Signal Processing — Jonatham Stein, 2005, John Wiley.
3. DSP Processor Fundamentals, Architectures & Features — Lapsleyet al. 2000, S. Chand &
Co.
4. Digital Signal Processing Applications Using the ADSP-2100 Family by The Applications
Engineering Staff of Analog Devices, DSP Division, Edited by Amy Mar, PHI
5. The Scientist and Engineer’s Guide to Digital Signal Processing by Steven W. Smith, Ph.D.,
California Technical Publishing, ISBN 0-9660176-3-3, 1997
6. Embedded Media Processing by David J. Katz and Rick Gentile of Analog Devices, Newnes,
ISBN 0750679123, 2005.
168

4 0 0 4
SPEECH AND AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSING

(PG E - VII)
Prerequisite: Advanced Digital Signal Processing
Course Objectives:
1. Understand the anatomy and Physiology of Speech Production system and perception model and
to design an electrical equivalent of Acoustic model for Speech Production.
2. To understand the articulatory and acoustic interpretation of various phonemes and their
allophones.
3. To analyze the speech in time domain and extract various time domain parameters which can be
used for various applications like pitch extraction, end point detection, Speech Compression,
Speech Synthesis etc.,
4. To study the concept of Homomorphic system and its use in extracting the vocal tract information
from speech using Cepstrum which is a bye product of Homomorphic processing of Speech.
5. To study various Speech Signal Processing applications viz: Speech Enhancement, Speech
Recognition, Speaker Recognition.
6. To study various Audio coding techniques based on perceptual modeling of the human ear.
Course Outcomes:
1. Model an electrical equivalent of Speech Production system.
2. Extract the LPC coefficients that can be used to Synthesize or compress the speech.
3. Design a Homomorphic Vocoder for coding and decoding of speech.
4. Enhance the speech and can design an Isolated word recognition system using HMM.
5. Can extract the features for Automatic speaker recognition system which can used for
classification.
6. Can design basic audio coding methods for coding the audio signal.
Unit – I :
Fundamentals of Digital Speech Processing:
Anatomy & Physiology of Speech Organs, The Process of Speech Production, The Acoustic theory of
speech production- Uniform lossless tube model, effect of losses in vocal tract, effect of radiation at
lips, Digital models for speech signals.
Perception : Anatomical pathways from the Ear to the Perception of Sound, The Peripheral Auditory
system, Hair Cell and Auditory Nerve Functions, Properties of the Auditory Nerve. Block schematics
of the Peripheral Auditory system.
Unit – II :
Time Domain models for Speech Processing:
Introduction – Window considerations, Short time energy, average magnitude, average zero crossing
rate, Speech vs Silence discrimination using energy and zero crossing, pitch period estimation using
a parallel processing approach, the short time autocorrelation function, average magnitude difference
function, pitch period estimation using the autocorrelation function.
Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) Analysis :
Basic principles of Linear Predictive Analysis : The Autocorrelation Method, The Covariance method,
Solution of LPC Equations : Cholesky Decomposition Solution for Covariance Method, Durbin’s
Recursive Solution for the Autocorrelation Equations, comparison between the methods of solution of
the LPC Analysis Equations, Applications of LPC Parameters : Pitch Detection using LPC
Parameters, Formant Analysis using LPC Parameters.
169
Unit – III :
Homomorphic Speech Processing:
Introduction , Homomorphic Systems for Convolution : Properties of the Complex Cepstrum,
Computational Considerations , The Complex Cepstrum of Speech, Pitch Detection , Formant
Estimation, The Homomorphic Vocoder.
Speech Enhancement:
Speech enhancement techniques : Single Microphone Approach, Spectral Subtraction, Enhancement
by re-synthesis, Comb filter, Wiener filter, Multi Microphone Approach.
Unit – IV:
Automatic Speech Recognition:
Basic pattern recognition approaches, parametric representation of Speech, Evaluating the similarity
of Speech patterns, Isolated digit Recognition System, Continuous word Recognition system.
Elements of HMM, Training & Testing of Speech using HMM.
Automatic Speaker Recognition:
Recognition techniques, Features that distinguish speakers, MFCC, delta MFCC, Speaker
Recognition Systems: Speaker Verification System , Speaker Identification System, Performance
Metrics.
Unit – V:
Audio Coding :
Lossless Audio Coding, Lossy Audio coding, Psychoacoustics , ISO-MPEG-1 Audio coding , MPEG -
2 Audio coding, MPEG - 2 Advanced Audio Coding, MPEG - 4 Audio Coding.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Digital Processing of Speech Signals - L.R. Rabiner and S. W. Schafer. Pearson Education.
2. Digital Audio Signal Processing – Udo Zolzer, 2nd Edition, Wiley.
3. Speech & Audio Signal Processing- Ben Gold & Nelson Morgan, 1st Ed., Wiley
REFENCE BOOKS:
st
1. Discrete Time Speech Signal Processing: Principles and Practice - Thomas F. Quateri, 1 Ed.,
PE.
2. Digital Processing of Speech Signals. L.R Rabinar and R W Jhaung, 1978, PHI.
nd
3. Speech Communications: Human & Machine - Douglas O'Shaughnessy, 2 Ed., EEE Press.
170

4 0 0 4
RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING
(PG E- VII)
Prerequisite: Radar Systems
Course Objectives:
1. This course emphasis on the principles of Radar Systems and Signal Processing techniques.
2. Ability to understand the various parameters of Radar like pdf , prf.
3. Acquire knowledge about pulse compression Radar.
4. To study the phase coding Techniques.
Course Outcomes:
Upon the completion of this course, the student will be able to
1. Understand the principles of Radar Systems.
2. Learn the appropriate model, calculate system performance parameters and assess the
limitations of particular systems.
3. Understand the concepts of pulse compression Radar.
UNIT -I:
Introduction
Radar, Radar Block Diagram, Radar Equation, Detection of Signals in Noise, Receiver Noise and the
Signal to Ratio.
UNIT –II:
Radar Equation
Probability Density Function, Probability of Detection and False Alarm, Radar Cross Section of
Targets, Transmitter Power, PRF and Antenna Parameters, CFAR Receiver.
UNIT –III:
Waveform Selection
Radar Ambiguity Function and Ambiguity Diagram – Principles and Properties; Specific Cases – Ideal
Case, Single Pulse of Sine Wave, Periodic Pulse Train, Single Linear FM Pulse.
UNIT -IV:
Pulse Compression in Radar Signals
Introduction, Significance, Types, Linear FM Pulse Compression – Block Diagram, Characteristics,
Reduction of Time Side lobes, Stretch Techniques, Generation and Decoding of FM Waveforms.
UNIT –V:
Phase Coding Techniques
Principles, Binary Phase Coding, Barker Codes, Maximal Length Sequences (MLS/LRS/PN), Block
Diagram of a Phase Coded CW Radar.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Radar Handbook - M.I. Skolnik, 2nd Ed., 1991, McGraw Hill.
2. Radar Design Principles: Signal Processing and the Environment - Fred E. Nathanson, 2nd
Ed.,1999, PHI.
3. Introduction to Radar Systems - M.I. Skolnik, 3rd Ed., 2001, TMH.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Radar Principles - Peyton Z. Peebles, Jr., 2004, John Wiley.
2. Radar Signal Processing and Adaptive Systems - R. Nitzberg, 1999, Artech House.
3. Radar Design Principles - F.E. Nathanson, 1st Ed., 1969, McGraw Hill.
171

3 0 0 3
DISASTER MANAGEMENT
OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Pre Requisites: NIL
Course Objectives:
The subject provide different disasters, tools and methods for disaster management
Course Outcomes:
Estimate, perform quantity survey & valuate various engineering works
UNIT 1 : Understanding Disaster

Concept of Disaster
Different approaches
Concept of Risk
Levels of Disasters
Disaster Phenomena and Events (Global, national and regional)
Hazards and Vulnerability

Natural and man-made hazards; response time, frequency and forewarning levels of different hazards
Characteristics and damage potential or natural hazards; hazard assessment
Dimensions of vulnerability factors; vulnerability assessment
Vulnerability and disaster risk
Vulnerabilities to flood and earthquake hazards
UNIT 2 : Disaster Management Mechanism

Concepts of risk management and crisis managements
Disaster Management Cycle
Response and Recovery
Development, Prevention, Mitigation and Preparedness
Planning for Relief
UNIT 3: Capacity Building

Capacity Building: Concept
Structural and Nonstructural Measures
Capacity Assessment; Strengthening Capacity for Reducing Risk
Counter-Disaster Resources and their utility in Disaster Management
Legislative Support at the state and national levels
UNIT 4: Coping with Disaster

Coping Strategies; alternative adjustment processes
Changing Concepts of disaster management
Industrial Safety Plan; Safety norms and survival kits
Mass media and disaster management
UNIT 5: Planning for disaster management

Strategies for disaster management planning
Steps for formulating a disaster risk reduction plan
Disaster management Act and Policy in India
Organizational structure for disaster management in India
Preparation of state and district disaster management plans
172
Text Books
1. Alexander, D. Natural Disasters, ULC press Ltd, London, 1993.
2. Carter, W.N. Disaster Management: A Disaster Management Handbook, Asian Development
Bank, Bangkok, 1991.
3. Manual on Natural Disaster Management in India, NCDM, New Delhi, 2001.
References
1. Abarquez I. & Murshed Z. Community Based Disaster Risk Management: Field Practitioner’s
Handbook, ADPC, Bangkok, 2004.
2. Goudie, A. Geomorphological Techniques, Unwin Hyman, London 1990.
3. Goswami, S.C Remote Sensing Application in North East India, Purbanchal Prakesh, Guwahati,
1997.
4. Chakrabarty, U.K. Industrial Disaster Management and Emergency Response, Asian Book Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi 2007.
5. Disaster Management in India, Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India, New Delhi, 2011.
6. National Policy on Disaster Management, NDMA, New Delhi, 2009
7. Disaster Management Act. (2005), Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India, New Delhi,
2005.
8. District Disaster Management Plan-Model Template, NIDM, New Delhi, 2005.
9. Disaster Management, Future challenge and opportunities, Edited by Jagbir singh, I.K.
International publishing home Pvt, Ltd.
173

3 0 0 3
NON CONVENTIONAL POWER GENERATION
OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Pre-requisite: Nil.
Objectives:
• To introduce various types of renewable technologies available.
• The technologies of energy conversion from these resources and their quantitative analysis.
Outcomes:
• The student will be able analyse solar thermal and photovoltaic systems and related
technologies for energy conversion.
• Wind energy conversion and devices available for it.
• Biomass conversion technologies.
• Geo thermal resources and energy conversion principles and technologies.
• Power from oceans (thermal, wave, tidal) and conversion and devices.
• Fundamentals of fuel cells and commercial batteries.
UNIT - I
Fundamentals of Solar Energy-Solar spectrum- Solar Radiation on Earth’s surface-Solar radiation
geometry-Solar radiation measurements- Solar radiation data- Solar radiation on horizontal and tilted
surfaces. Solar Thermal conversion- Flat plate collectors- concentrated collectors- construction and
thermal analysis- Solar applications- Solar ponds- Heliostat systems-water heater-air heater-solar still.
UNIT - II
Solar-Electric Power generation- Photovoltaic cells- Equivalent circuit- V-I Characteristics-
Photovoltaic modules – constructional details- design considerations- Tracking- Maximum power point
tracking - Solar Thermo electric conversion.
UNIT - III
Wind Energy- Fundamentals of wind energy-power available in wind- Betz Limit-Aerodynamics of
wind turbine- Wind turbines- Horizontal and vertical axis turbines –their configurations- Wind Energy
conversion systems.
UNIT - IV
Energy from Bio Mass- Various fuels- Sources-Conversion technologies-Wet Processes – Dry
Processes- Bio Gas generation – Aerobic and anaerobic digestion - Factors affecting generation of
bio gas - Classification of bio gas plants-Different Indian digesters- Digester design considerations -
Gasification process - Gasifiers – Applications. Geothermal Energy - sources- Hydrothermal
convective - Geo-pressure resources - Petro-thermal systems (HDR) - Magma Resources-Prime
Movers.
UNIT - V
OTEC Systems- Principle of operation - Open and closed cycles, Energy from Tides - Principle of
Tidal Power - Components of tidal Power plants - Operation Methods - Estimation of Energy in Single
and double basin systems - Energy and Power from Waves-Wave energy conversion devices - Fuel
Cells - Design and Principle of operation - Types of Fuel Cells - Advantages and disadvantages -
Types of Electrodes – Applications - Basics of Batteries - Constructional details of Lead acid batteries
- Ni-Cd Batteries.
TEXT BOOKS
1. John Twidell & Wier, Renewable Energy Resouces, CRC Press, 2009.
2. G.D.Rai – Non Conventional Energy sources, Khanna publishers.
174
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. D.P .Kothari, Singal,Rakesh, Ranjan, Renewable Energy sources and Emerging Technologies,
PHI, 2009.
2. F.C.Treble, Generating Electricity from Sun.
3. C.S.Solanki, Solar Photo volatics- Fundamentals- Principles and Applications, PHI 2009
4. S.P.Sukhatme, Solar Energy Principles and Application - TMH
175

3 0 0 3
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING MATERIALS
OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Pre-requisites: Nil
Objectives: To understand the importance of various materials used in electrical engineering and
obtain a qualitative analysis of their behavior and applications.
OUTCOMES: Will be able to

1. Understand various types of dielectric materials, their properties in various conditions.
2. Evaluate magnetic materials and their behavior.
3. Evaluate semiconductor materials and technologies.
4. Materials used in electrical engineering and applications.
UNIT- I
DIELECTRIC MATERIALS: Dielectric as Electric Field Medium, leakage currents, dielectric loss,
dielectric strength, breakdown voltage, breakdown in solid dielectrics, flashover, liquid dielectrics,
electric conductivity in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics, Ferromagnetic materials, properties of
ferromagnetic materials in static fields, spontaneous, polarization, curie point, anti-ferromagnetic
materials, piezoelectric materials, pyroelectric materials.
UNIT – II
MAGNETIC MATERIALS: Classification of magnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization in
ferromagnetic materials, magnetic Anisotropy, Magnetostriction, diamagnetism, magnetically soft and
hard materials, special purpose materials, feebly magnetic materials, Ferrites, cast and cermet
permanent magnets, ageing of magnets. factors effecting permeability and hysteresis
UNIT – III
SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIALS: Properties of semiconductors, Silicon wafers, integration
techniques, Large and very large scale integration techniques (VLSI)
UNIT – IV
MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS: Materials used for Resistors, rheostats, heaters,
transmission line structures, stranded conductors, bimetals fuses, soft and hard solders, electric
contact materials, electric carbon materials, thermocouple materials. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous
insulating materials, Effect of moisture on insulation.
UNIT – V
SPECIAL PURPOSE MATERIALS: Refractory Materials, Structural Materials, Radioactive Materials,
Galvanization and Impregnation of materials, Processing of electronic materials, Insulating varnishes
and coolants, Properties and applications of mineral oils, Testing of Transformer oil as per ISI
TEXT BOOKS
1. R K Rajput: A course in Electrical Engineering Materials, Laxmi Publications. 2009
2. T K BasaK: A course in Electrical Engineering Materials:, New Age Science Publications 2009
3. TTTI Madras: Electrical Engineering Materials
4. Adrianus J.Dekker: Electrical Engineering Materials, THM Publication.
176

3 0 0 3
NANO-TECHNOLOGY
OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Pre-requisites: Nil
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the student to understand fundamentals of nano materials and technologies for these
materials and their manufacturing, applications in various fields.
OUTCOMES:
• To evaluate electronic structural studies of nano materials and different synthesis methods to
obtain nano structures.
• Understand characterization techniques through various measurements to study electrical,
mechanical,thermal properties of nano materials.
• Applications of nano materials for specific purposes like MEMS, NEMS, nano electronics, energy
storage.
UNIT - I
Background of Nanotechnology: Scientific Revolutions, Nanotechnology and Nanomachines - The
Periodic Table, Atomic Structure, Molecules and Phases, Energy, Molecular and Atomic size,
Surfaces and Dimensional Space, Top down and Bottom up approach.
UNIT - II
Molecular Nanotechnology: Atoms by inference, Electron Microscopes, Scanning electron
microscope, Modern transmission electron microscope, Scanning probe microscope-atomic force
microscope, scanning, tunneling microscope, Self Assembly.
UNIT - III
Nanopowders and Nanomaterials: Preparation, Plasma arcing, chemical vapor deposition, Sol-gels,
Electrodeposition, Ball milling, using natural nanoparticles, Applications of nanomaterials.
UNIT - IV
Nanoelectronics: Approaches to nanoelectronics, Fabrication of integrated circuits, MEMS, NEMS,
Nano circuits, Quantum wire, Quantum well, DNA-directed assembly and application in electronics.
UNIT - V
Applications: MEMS, NEMS, Coatings, Optoelectronic Devices, Environmental Applications,
Nanomedicine.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology Gabor L. Hornyak, NanoThread, Inc., Golden,
Colorado, USA; H.F. Tibbals, University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Dallas,
USA; Joydeep Dutta, Asian Institute of Technology, Pathumthani, Thailand; John
J. Moore, Colorado School of Mines, Golden, USA
2. Introduction to Nanotechnology by Charles P. Poole Jr and Frank J.Owens Wiley India Pvt Ltd.
3. Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, Chatopadhyaya.K.K, and Banerjee A.N,
4. Introduction to nano tech by phani kumar
5. Introduction to Nano Technology by Charles P. Poole Jr and Frank J. Owens. Wiley India Pvt Ltd.
6. Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, Chatopadhyaya.K.K, and Banerjee A.N,
NANOTECHNOLOGY Basic Science and EmergingTsechnologies by Michael Wilson, Kamali
Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons, Burkhard Raguse- CHAPMAN & HALL/CRC
PRESS 2002.
177

3 0 0 3
OPERATIONS RESEARCH
OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Prerequisites: None
Objectives:
Understanding the mathematical importance of development of model in a particular optimization
model for the issue and solving it.
Outcomes:
Understanding the problem, identifying variables & constants, formulas of optimization model and
applying appropriate optimization Techniques
UNIT – I
Development – Definition– Characteristics and Phases – Types of models – Operations Research
models – applications.
ALLOCATION: Linear Programming Problem - Formulation – Graphical solution – Simplex method –
Artificial variables techniques: Two–phase method, Big-M method; Duality Principle.
UNIT – II
TRANSPORTATION PROBLEM – Formulation – Optimal solution, unbalanced transportation
problem – Degeneracy.
Assignment problem – Formulation – Optimal solution - Variants of Assignment Problem; Traveling
Salesman problem.
UNIT – III
SEQUENCING – Introduction – Flow –Shop sequencing – n jobs through two machines – n jobs
through three machines – Job shop sequencing – two jobs through ‘m’ machines-graphical model
REPLACEMENT: Introduction – Replacement of items that deteriorate with time – when money
value is not counted and counted – Replacement of items that fail completely- Group Replacement.
UNIT – IV
THEORY OF GAMES: Introduction –Terminology– Solution of games with saddle points and without
saddle points- 2 x 2 games –m x 2 & 2 x n games - graphical method – m x n games - dominance
principle.
INVENTORY: Introduction – Single item, Deterministic models – Types - Purchase inventory models
with one price break and multiple price breaks –Stochastic models – demand discrete variable or
continuous variable – Single Period model with no setup cost.
UNIT – V
WAITING LINES: Introduction – Terminology-Single Channel – Poisson arrivals and Exponential
Service times – with infinite population and finite population models– Multichannel – Poisson arrivals
and exponential service times with infinite population.
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING:
Introduction – Terminology- Bellman’s Principle of Optimality – Applications of dynamic programming-
shortest path problem – linear programming problem.
TEXT BOOK :
1. Operation Research /J.K.Sharma/ MacMilan.
2. Operations Research/A.C.S.Kumar/Yesdee
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Operations Research: Methods and Problems / Maurice Saseini, Arhur Yaspan and Lawrence
Friedman
2. Operations Research /A.M.Natarajan, P.Balasubramaniam, A. Tamilarasi/Pearson Education.
3. Operations Research / Wagner/ PHI Publications.
4. Introduction to O.R/Hillier & Libermann (TMH).
5. Introduction to O.R /Taha/PHI
178

3 0 0 3
BASICS OF THERMODYNAMICS
OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Pre-requisite: Engineering Chemistry and Physics

Course Objective: To understand the treatment of classical Thermodynamics and to apply the First
and Second laws of Thermodynamics to engineering applications
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
• Understand and differentiate between different thermodynamic systems and processes
• Understand and apply the laws of Thermodynamics to different types of systems undergoing
various processes
• Understand and analyze the Thermodynamic cycles
UNIT – I
Introduction: Basic Concepts:
System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe, Types of Systems, Macroscopic and
Microscopic viewpoints, Concept of Continuum, Thermodynamic Equilibrium, State, Property,
Process, Exact & Inexact Differentials, Cycle, Reversibility – Quasi – static Process, Irreversible
Process, Causes of Irreversibility
UNIT II
Types, Displacement & Other forms of Work, Heat, Point and Path functions, Zeroth Law of
Thermodynamics – Concept of Temperature – Principles of Thermometry – Reference Points –
Const. Volume gas Thermometer – Scales of Temperature, Ideal Gas Scale
UNIT – III
First and Second Laws of Thermodynamics: First Law: Cycle and Process, Specific Heats (cp and
cv), Heat interactions in a Closed System for various processes, Limitations of First Law, Concept of
Heat Engine (H.E.) and Reversed H.E. (Heat Pump and Refrigerator), Efficiency/COP, Second Law:
Kelvin-Planck and Clausius Statements, Carnot Cycle, Carnot Efficiency, Statement of Clausius
Inequality, Property of Entropy, T-S and P-V Diagrams
UNIT IV
Mixtures of perfect Gases – Mole Fraction, Mass friction Gravimetric and volumetric Analysis –
Dalton’s Law of partial pressure, Avogadro’s Laws of additive volumes – Mole fraction , Volume
fraction and partial pressure, Equivalent Gas const.
Atmospheric air - Psychrometric Properties – Dry bulb Temperature, Wet Bulb Temperature, Dew
point Temperature, , Specific Humidity, Relative Humidity, saturated Air, Vapour pressure, Degree of
saturation – Adiabatic Saturation ,Psychrometric chart.
UNIT - V
Power Cycles : Otto, Diesel cycles - Description and representation on P–V and T-S diagram,
Thermal Efficiency, Mean Effective Pressures on Air standard basis
Refrigeration Cycles:
Bell-Coleman cycle, Vapour compression cycle-performance Evaluation.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Engineering Thermodynamics / PK Nag /TMH, III Edition
2. Thermodynamics / C.P.Arora.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach – Yunus Cengel & Boles /TMH
2. Fundamentals of Classical Thermodynamics – G. Van Wylan & R.E. Sonntag – John Wiley Pub.
3. Thermodynamics – J.P.Holman / McGrawHill
4. Engineering Thermodynamics – Jones & Dugan
5. Thermodynamics & Heat Engines – Yadav – Central Book Depot, Allahabad.
179

3 0 0 3
FABRICATION PROCESSES
OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Prerequisites: Nil
Objectives:
Understand the philosphipies of various Manufacturing process.
Outcomes:
For given product, one should be able identify the manufacturing process.
UNIT – I
Casting : Steps involved in making a casting – Advantage of casting and its applications; Patterns -
Pattern making, Types, Materials used for patterns, pattern allowances and their construction;
Properties of moulding sands.
Methods of Melting - Crucible melting and cupola operation – Defects in castings;
Casting processes – Types – Sand moulding, Centrifugal casting, die- casting, Investment casting,
shell moulding; Principles of Gating – Requirements – Types of gates, Design of gating systems –
Riser – Function, types of Riser and Riser design.
UNIT – II
Welding: Classification – Types of welds and welded joints; Gas welding - Types, oxy-fuel gas
cutting. Arc welding, forge welding, submerged arc welding, Resistance welding, Thermit welding.
Inert Gas Welding _ TIG Welding, MIG welding, explosive welding, Laser Welding; Soldering and
Brazing; Heat affected zone in welding. Welding defects – causes and remedies; destructive and non-
destructive testing of welds.
UNIT – III
Hot working, cold working, strain hardening, recovery, recrystallisation and grain growth.
Stamping, forming and other cold working processes. Blanking and piercing – Bending and forming –
Drawing and its types – wire drawing and Tube drawing – coining – Hot and cold spinning.
Types of presses and press tools. Forces and power requirement in the above operations.
UNIT – IV
Extrusion of Metals : Basic extrusion process and its characteristics. Hot extrusion and cold
extrusion - Forward extrusion and backward extrusion – Impact extrusion – Extruding equipment –
Tube extrusion and pipe making, Hydrostatic extrusion. Forces in extrusion
UNIT – V
Forging Processes : Forging operations and principles – Tools – Forging methods – Smith forging,
Drop Forging – Roll forging – Forging hammers : Rotary forging – forging defects – cold forging,
swaging, Forces in forging operations.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Manufacturing Technology / P.N. Rao/TMH
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Production Technology / R.K. Jain
2. Metal Casting / T.V Ramana Rao / New Age
3. Principles of Metal Castings / Rosenthal.
4. Welding Process / Parmar /
5. Production Technology /Sarma P C /
6. Manufacturing Engineering and Technology/Kalpakjin S/ Pearson Edu.
180

3 0 0 3
ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Note: No detailed mathematical treatment is required.
Prerequisite : Nil
Course Objectives:
• It provides an understanding of various measuring systems functioning and metrics for
performance analysis.
• Provides understanding of principle of operation, working of different electronic instruments viz.
signal generators, signal analyzers, recorders and measuring equipment.
• Provides understanding of use of various measuring techniques for measurement of different
physical parameters using different classes of transducers.
Course Outcomes:
On completion of this course student can be able to
• Identify the various electronic instruments based on their specifications for carrying out a
particular task of measurement.
• Measure various physical parameters by appropriately selecting the transducers.
• Use various types of signal generators, signal analyzers for generating and analyzing various
real-time signals.
Unit-I:
Block Schematics of Measuring Systems and Performance Metrics: Performance
Characteristics, Static Characteristics, Accuracy, Precision, Resolution, Types of Errors, Gaussian
Error, Root Sum Squares formula, Dynamic Characteristics, Repeatability, Reproducibility, Fidelity,
Lag.
Unit-II:
Signal Generators: AF, RF Signal Generators, Sweep Frequency Generators, Pulse and Square
wave Generators, Function Generators, Arbitrary Waveform Generator, and Specifications.
Unit-III:
Measuring Instruments: DC Voltmeters, D’ Arsonval Movement, DC Current Meters, AC Voltmeters
and Current Meters, Ohmmeters, Multimeters, Meter Protection, Extension of Range, True RMS
Responding Voltmeters, Specifications of Instruments. CRT, Block Schematic of CRO, Time Base
Circuits, Lissajous Figures, CRO Probes.
Unit-IV:
Recorders: X-Y Plotter, Curve tracer, Galvanometric Recorders, Servo transducers, pen driving
mechanisms, Magnetic Recording, Magnetic recording techniques.
Unit-V:
Transducers: Classification, Strain Gauges, Bounded, unbounded; Force and Displacement
Transducers, Resistance Thermometers, Hotwire Anemometers, LVDT, Thermocouples, Synchros,
Special Resistance Thermometers, Digital Temperature sensing system, Piezoelectric Transducers,
Variable Capacitance Transducers, Magneto Strictive Transducers.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation: B.M. Oliver, J.M. Cage TMH Reprint 2009.
2. Electronic Instrumentation: H.S.Kalsi – TMH, 2nd Edition 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements – David A. Bell, Oxford Univ. Press, 1997.
2. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques: A.D. Helbincs, W.D. Cooper:
PHI 5th Edition 2003.
181
3. Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation – K. Lal Kishore, Pearson Education 2010.

4. Industrial Instrumentation: T.R. Padmanabham Springer 2009.
182

3 0 0 3
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING THROUGH JAVA

OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Prerequisites
1. A course on “Computer Programming & Data Structures”
Objectives
1. Introduces object oriented programming concepts using the Java language.
2. Introduces the principles of inheritance and polymorphism; and demonstrates how they relate
to the design of abstract classes
3. Introduces the implementation of packages and interfaces
4. Introduces exception handling, event handling and multithreading
5. Introduces the design of Graphical User Interface using applets and swings
Outcomes
1. Develop applications for a range of problems using object-oriented programming techniques
2. Design simple Graphical User Interface applications
UNIT I:
Object oriented thinking and Java Basics- Need for OOP paradigm, summary of OOP concepts,
coping with complexity, abstraction mechanisms. A way of viewing world – Agents, responsibility,
messages, methods, History of Java, Java buzzwords, data types, variables, scope and life time of
variables, arrays, operators, expressions, control statements, type conversion and casting, simple
java program, concepts of classes, objects, constructors, methods, access control, this keyword,
garbage collection, overloading methods and constructors, method binding, inheritance, overriding
and exceptions, parameter passing, recursion, nested and inner classes, exploring string class.
UNIT II:
Inheritance, Packages and Interfaces – Hierarchical abstractions, Base class object, subclass,
subtype, substitutability, forms of inheritance- specialization, specification, construction, extension,
limitation, combination, benefits of inheritance, costs of inheritance. Member access rules, super
uses, using final with inheritance, polymorphism- method overriding, abstract classes, the Object
class.
Defining, Creating and Accessing a Package, Understanding CLASSPATH, importing packages,
differences between classes and interfaces, defining an interface, implementing interface, applying
interfaces, variables in interface and extending interfaces, Exploring java.io.
UNIT III:
Exception handling and Multithreading-- Concepts of exception handling, benefits of exception
handling, Termination or resumptive models, exception hierarchy, usage of try, catch, throw, throws
and finally, built in exceptions, creating own exception sub classes.
String handling,Exploring java.util.Differences between multi threading and multitasking, thread life
cycle, creating threads, thread priorities, synchronizing threads, inter-thread communication, thread
groups, daemon threads, Enumerations, auto boxing, annotations, generics.
UNIT IV:
Event Handling: Events, Event sources, Event classes, Event Listeners, Delegation event model,
handling mouse and keyboard events, Adapter classes. The AWT class hierarchy, user interface
components- labels, button, canvas, scrollbars, text components, check box, check box groups,
choices, lists panels – scroll pane, dialogs, menu bar, graphics, layout manager – layout manager
types – border, grid, flow, card and grid bag.
183
UNIT V:
Applets – Concepts of Applets, differences between applets and applications, life cycle of an applet,
types of applets, creating applets, passing parameters to applets.
Swing – Introduction, limitations of AWT, MVC architecture, components, containers, exploring
swing- JApplet, JFrame and JComponent, Icons and Labels, text fields, buttons – The JButton class,
Check boxes, Radio buttons, Combo boxes, Tabbed Panes, Scroll Panes, Trees, and Tables.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Java the complete reference, 7th editon, Herbert Schildt, TMH.
2. Understanding OOP with Java, updated edition, T. Budd, Pearson Education.
REFERENCES:
1. An Introduction to programming and OO design using Java, J.Nino and F.A. Hosch, John Wiley
& Sons.
2. Introduction to Java programming, Y. Daniel Liang, Pearson Education.
3. An introduction to Java programming and object oriented application development, R.A. Johnson-
Thomson.
184

3 0 0 3
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Prerequisites
1. Familiarity with the theory and use of coordinate geometry and of linear algebra such as matrix
multiplication.
2. A course on “Computer Programming and Data Structures”
Objectives
1. The aim of this course is to provide an introduction of fundamental concepts and theory of
computer graphics.
2. Topics covered include graphics systems and input devices; geometric representations and
2D/3D transformations; viewing and projections; illumination and color models; animation;
rendering and implementation; visible surface detection;
Outcomes
1. Acquire familiarity with the relevant mathematics of computer graphics.
2. Be able to design basic graphics application programs, including animation
3. Be able to design applications that display graphic images to given specifications
UNIT-I:
Introduction: Application areas of Computer Graphics, overview of graphics systems, video-display
devices, raster-scan systems, random scan systems, graphics monitors and work stations and input
devices
Output primitives: Points and lines, line drawing algorithms (Bresenham’s and DDA Algorithm), mid-
point circle and ellipse algorithms
Filled area primitives: Scan-line polygon fills algorithm, boundary-fill and flood-fill algorithms
UNIT-II:
2-D geometrical transforms: Translation, scaling, rotation, reflection and shear transformations,
matrix representations and homogeneous coordinates, composite transforms, transformations
between coordinate systems
2-D viewing: The viewing pipeline, viewing coordinate reference frame, window to view-port
coordinate transformation, viewing functions, Cohen-Sutherland and Cyrus-beck line clipping
algorithms, Sutherland –Hodgeman polygon clipping algorithm, Polygon Filling
UNIT-III:
3-D object representation: Polygon surfaces, quadric surfaces, spline representation, Hermite curve,
Bezier curve and B-Spline curves, Bezier and B-Spline surfaces. Basic illumination models, polygon
rendering methods.
UNIT-IV:
3-D Geometric transformations: Translation, rotation, scaling, reflection and shear transformations,
composite transformations.
3-D viewing: Viewing pipeline, viewing coordinates, view volume and general projection transforms
and clipping.
UNIT-V:
Computer animation: Design of animation sequence, general computer animation functions, raster
animation, computer animation languages, key frame systems, motion specifications.
Visible surface detection methods: Classification, back-face detection, depth-buffer, scan-line,
depth sorting, BSP-tree methods, area sub-division and octree methods
185
Text Books:
1. “Computer Graphics C version”, Donald Hearn and M.Pauline Baker, Pearson Education
2. “Computer Graphics Principles & practice”, second edition in C, Foley, Van Dam, Feiner and
Hughes, Pearson Education.
3. Computer Graphics, Steven Harrington, TMH
References:
1. Procedural elements for Computer Graphics, David F Rogers, Tata Mc Graw hill, 2nd edition.
2. Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics”, Neuman and Sproul, TMH.
3. Principles of Computer Graphics, Shalini Govil, Pai, 2005, Springer.
186

3 0 0 3
ENGINEERING MATERIALS
OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Pre requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To gain an knowledge about the uses and application of various ferrous metals and alloys.
2. To gain an knowledge about the uses and application of various non ferrous alloys.
3. To gain an knowledge about the uses and application of various ceramics, polymers and
composites for different engineering applications.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, student would be able to recommend
1. Ferrous metals and alloys for a given engineering applications and service condition.
2. Non ferrous alloys for a given engineering applications and service condition.
3. Ceramics, Polymers and composites for a given engineering applications and service condition.
UNIT-I
FERROUS ALLOYS: Introduction, Designations and classifications for steels, Simple Heat
Treatments, Effect of Alloying Elements.
UNIT-II
NONFERROUS ALLOYS: Introduction, properties and applications, Aluminum Alloys, Magnesium
Alloys, Copper Alloys and Titanium Alloys.
UNIT-III
CERAMIC MATERIALS: Introduction, Properties and Applications of Ceramics, Glasses and
Refractories.
UNIT-IV
POLYMERS: Introduction, Classification of Polymers, Polymerization, Degree of Polymerization,
Typical Thermoplastics and Thermosets.
UNIT-V
COMPOSITES: Introduction, Classification, Properties and Applications of Polymer matrix, Metal
Matrix Ceramic Matrix and Laminar composites.
TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Donald R. Askland, Pradeep P. Phule, The Science and Engineering of Materials (4th Edition),
Thomson Publishers, 2003.
2. William D. Callister Introduction to Material Science and Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, 2007.
3. W.F.Smith, Principles of Materials Science and Engineering, Mc Graw Hill, New York, 1994.
187

3 0 0 3
METALLURGY FOR NON METALLURGISTS

OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Pre requisites: Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To describe the basic principles of metallurgy and the importance of metallurgy in various
discipline of engineering.
2. Gain a thorough knowledge about heat treatment of steels.
3. Gain a knowledge about properties and uses of cast irons and non ferrous metals.
4. Gain a working knowledge of basic testing methods for metals.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course Student would be able
1. To use and apply metallurgy in his own branch of engineering.
2. The student will be able to justify the various testing methods adopted for metals.
UNIT-I
Introduction: Crystal structure and defects, Crystal structure of metals, Classification of steels,
Carbon steels
UNIT-II
Heat Treatment of Steels: The Iron carbon systems, Common phases in steels, Annealing,
Normalizing, Hardening and tempering
UNIT-III
Cast irons: Properties and applications of Ductile irons, Malleable irons, Compacted graphite iron.
UNIT-IV
Non Ferrous Metals: Properties and applications of Light Metals (Al , Be, Mg, Ti), Super alloys
UNIT-V
Testing of Metals: Hardness testing, Tensile Testing, Impact Testing, Fatigue Testing.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Materials Science and Engineering, An introduction. WD Callister, Jr., Adapted by R.
Balasubramaniam, John Wiley & Sons, NY, Indian edition, 2007
2. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy – SH Avner, TATA Mc GRAW HILL ,1997
3. Metallurgy for Engineers- Clark and Varney
4. Mechanical Metallurgy – G. E. Dieter
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Engineering Physical Metallurgy and Heat treatment – Y Lakhtin
2. C. Suryanarayana, Experimental Techniques in Mechanics and Materials, John Wiley, John
Wiley, NJ, USA,2006
Foundations of Materials Science and Engineering – WF Smith
188

3 1 0 3
INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION CONTROL ENGINEERING
OPEN ELECTIVE-I
Objective:
To expose the students to various types of industrial pollutions and controlling techniques.
OUTCOME:
The student will be able learn the sources of air, water pollution and also their treatment methods
UNIT-I
Introduction to industrial pollution and types of pollution from chemical industries, Effects of pollution
as environment and ecosystems-global warming-green house effect; Environmental legislatures-
standards and guidelines.
UNIT –II
Air pollution- Meteorological aspects of pollution dispersion-adiabatic lapse rate-Environmental lapse
rate-Turbulence and stability of atmosphere, Richardson number-Plume raise-plume behavior and
characteristics, effective stack height. Major air pollutants and their sources, measurement of air
pollutants
UNIT -III
General methods of control air pollutants removal of sulphur dioxide, oxides of nitrogen and organic
vapors from gaseous effluents; Removal of particulate matter – principle and working of setting
chambers, cyclone separators, fabric and fibre filters – electro static precipitators, Treatment of
gaseous effluents.
UNIT -IV
Introduction to water pollution – water pollutants classification – characteristics of liquid effluents
from fertilizer, pulp & paper and petroleum industries, estimation of oxygen demands – DO, BOD,
COD, TOC – BOD curves, oxygen sag curve – modeling of BOD curves
Biological treatment of waste waters – aerobic and anaerobic methods – suspended and attached
growth processes – bacteria – Reproduction in bacterial – Bacterial growth crushes, conventional
activated sludge process – Trickling filters, Aerated lagoons – stabilization ponds – fluidized bed
contractors.
UNIT -V
Physical Treatment methods : Principle and working of screening – sedimentation – flotation –
filtration – flocculation, Tertiary Treatment methods – carbon adsorption – lon exchange – Reverse
Osmosis, Boralin Chlorinating – Ultra filtration, Sludge treatment and disposal , removal of chromium
and phenol from liquid effluents.
.
Text books:
1. Pollution control in process industries by S.P. Mahajan TMH.,1985
2. Waste water treatment by M.Narayana Rao and A.K.Datta,Oxford and IHB publ. New Delhi
References:
1. Environmental pollution and control engineering by Rao C. S. – Wiley Eastern Limited, India,
1993.
2. Air pollution control by P.Prathap mouli and N.Venkata subbayya. Divya Jyothi Prakashan,
Jodhpur.
189

3 0 0 3
ESTIMATION, QUANTITY SURVEY & VALUATION

OPEN ELECTIVE -II
Pre Requisites:
Concrete Technology, RC Design, Desgin of Steel Structure
Course Objectives:
The subject provide process of estimations required for various work in construction. To have
knowledge of using SOR & SSR for analysis of rates on various works .
Course Outcomes:
Able to provide control steps for disaster mitigation steps
UNIT – I
General items of work in Building – Standard Units Principles of working out quantities for detailed
and abstract estimates – Approximate method of Estimating.
UNIT – II
Detailed Estimates of Buildings - Reinforcement bar bending and bar requirement schedules
UNIT – III
Earthwork for roads and canals.
UNIT – IV
Rate Analysis – Working out data for various items of work over head and contigent charges.
UNIT-V
Contracts – Types of contracts – Contract Documents – Conditions of contract, Valuation -Standard
specifications for different items of building construction.
NOTE : NUMBER OF EXERCISES PROPOSED :

1. Three in flat Roof & one in Sloped Roof
2. Exercises on Data – three Nos.
Text Books:
1. Estimating and Costing by B.N. Dutta, UBS publishers, 2000.
2. Estimating and Costing by G.S. Birdie
Reference books:
1. Standard Schedule of rates and standard data book by public works department.
2. I. S. 1200 ( Parts I to XXV – 1974/ method of measurement of building and Civil Engineering
works – B.I.S.)
3. Estimation, Costing and Specifications by M. Chakraborthi; Laxmi publications.
190

3 0 0 3
DESIGN ESTIMATION AND COSTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

OPEN ELECTIVE-II
Pre-requisite: Power systems-I and Power Systems-II
Objectives:
Objectives of this course are
• To emphasize the estimating and costing aspects of all electrical equipment, installation and
designs to analyze the cost viability.
• To design and estimation of wiring,
• To design overhead and underground distribution lines, substations and illumination design.
OUTCOMES:
Students are in a position to Understand the design considerations of electrical installations.
• To design electrical installation for buildings and small industries.
• To identify and design the various types of light sources for different applications.
UNIT - I
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: Electric Supply System, Three
phase four wire distribution system, Protection of Electric Installation against over load, short circuit
and Earth fault, Earthing, General requirements of electrical installations, testing of installations,
Indian Electricity rules, Neutral and Earth wire, Types of loads, Systems of wiring, Service
connections , Service Mains, Sub-Circuits, Location of Outlets, Location of Control Switches, Location
of Main Board and Distribution board, Guide lines for Installation of Fittings, Load Assessment,
Permissible voltage drops and sizes of wires, estimating and costing of Electric installations.
UNIT - II
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION FOR DIFFERENT TYPES OF BUILDINGS AND SMALL
INDUSTRIES: Electrical installations for residential buildings – estimating and costing of material,
Electrical installations for commercial buildings, Electrical installations for small industries.
UNIT - III
OVERHEAD AND UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION LINES: Introduction,
Supports for transmission lines, Distribution lines – Materials used, Underground cables, Mechanical
Design of overhead lines, Design of underground cables.
UNIT - IV
SUBSTATIONS: Introduction, Types of substations, Outdoor substation – Pole mounted type, Indoor
substations – Floor mounted type.
UNIT – V
DESIGN OF ILLUMINATION SCHEMES: Introduction, Terminology in illumination, laws of
illumination, various types of light sources, Practical lighting schemes LED, CFL and OCFL
differences.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Electrical Design Estimating and Costing, K. B. Raina, S. K. BhattAcharya, New Age International
Publisher.
2. Design of Electrical Installations, Er. V. K. Jain, Er. Amitabh Bajaj, University Science Press.
191
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Code of practice for Electrical wiring installations,(System voltage not exceeding 650 volts), Indian
Standard Institution, IS: 732-1983.
2. Guide for Electrical layout in residential buildings, Indian Standard Institution, IS: 4648-1968.
3. Electrical Installation buildings Indian Standard Institution, IS: 2032.
4. Code of Practice for selection, Installation of Maintenance of fuse (voltage not exceeding 650V),
Indian Standard Institution, IS: 3106-1966.
5. Code of Practice for earthling, Indian Standard Institution, IS:3043-1966.
6. Code of Practice for Installation and Maintenance of induction motors, Indian Standard Institution,
IS: 900-1965.
7. Code of Practice for electrical wiring, Installations (system voltage not exceeding 650 Volts),
Indian Standard Institution, IS: 2274-1963.
8. Electrical Installation, estimating and costing, Gupta J. B., Katson, Ludhiana.
192

3 0 0 3
ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS
OPEN ELECTIVE-II
Pre-requisite: None
Objectives:
Objectives of this course are
• To enable the student to understand the need for energy storage, devices and technologies
available and their applications.
OUTCOMES: After this course, the student

• Can analyze the characteristics of energy from various sources and need for storage
• Can classify various types of energy storage and various devices used for the purpose
• Can apply the same concepts to real time problems.
UNIT - I
Electrical Energy Storage Technologies: Characteristics of electricity, Electricity and the roles of
EES, High generation cost during peak-demand periods, Need for continuous and flexible supply,
Long distance between generation and consumption, Congestion in power grids, Transmission by
cable.
UNIT - II
Needs for Electrical Energy Storage: Emerging needs for EES, More renewable energy, less fossil
fuel, Smart Grid uses, The roles of electrical energy storage technologies, The roles from the
viewpoint of a utility, The roles from the viewpoint of consumers, The roles from the viewpoint of
generators of renewable energy.
UNIT - III
Features of Energy Storage Systems: Classification of EES systems , Mechanical storage systems,
Pumped hydro storage (PHS), Compressed air energy storage (CAES), Flywheel energy storage
(FES), Electrochemical storage systems, Secondary batteries, Flow batteries, Chemical energy
storage, Hydrogen (H2), Synthetic natural gas (SNG).
UNIT - IV
Types of Electrical Energy Storage systems: Electrical storage systems, Double-layer capacitors
(DLC) ,Superconducting magnetic energy storage (SMES),Thermal storage systems ,Standards for
EES, Technical comparison of EES technologies.
UNIT - V
Applications: Present status of applications, Utility use (conventional power generation, grid
operation & service) , Consumer use (uninterruptable power supply for large consumers), New trends
in applications ,Renewable energy generation, Smart Grid, Smart Micro grid, Smart House, Electric
vehicles, Management and control hierarchy of storage systems, Internal configuration of battery
storage systems, External connection of EES systems , Aggregating EES systems and distributed
generation (Virtual Power Plant), Battery SCADA– aggregation of many dispersed batteries.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Energy Storage Benefits and Market Analysis’ by James M. Eyer, Joseph J. Iannucci and Garth
P. Corey.
2. The Electrical Energy Storage by IEC Market Strategy Board.
193
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jim Eyer, Garth Corey: Energy Storage for the Electricity Grid: Benefits and Market Potential
Assessment Guide, Report, Sandia National Laboratories, Feb 2010.
194

3 0 0 3
MECHATRONICS
OPEN ELECTIVE-II
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION: Definition – Trends - Control Methods: Standalone , PC Based ( Real Time
Operating Systems, Graphical User Interface , Simulation) - Applications: identification of sensors and
actuators in Washing machine, Automatic Camera, Engine Management, SPM, Robot, CNC, FMS,
CIM.
SIGNAL CONDITIONING : Introduction – Hardware - Digital I/O , Analog input – ADC , resolution,
Filtering Noise using passive components – Registors, capacitors - Amplifying signals using OP amps
–Software - Digital Signal Processing – Low pass , high pass , notch filtering
UNIT – II
PRECISION MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Modern CNC Machines – Design aspects in machine
structures, guideways, feed drives, spindle and spindle bearings, measuring systems, control software
and operator interface, gauging and tool monitoring.
ELECTRONIC INTERFACE SUBSYSTEMS: TTL, CMOS interfacing - Sensor interfacing – Actuator
interfacing – solenoids , motors Isolation schemes- opto coupling, buffer IC’s - Protection schemes –
circuit breakers, over current sensing, resetable fuses, thermal dissipation - Power Supply - Bipolar
transistors / MOSFETs
UNIT – III
ELECTROMECHANICAL DRIVES: Relays and Solenoids - Stepper Motors - DC brushed motors –
DC brushless motors - DC servo motors - 4-quadrant servo drives , PWM’s - Pulse Width Modulation
– Variable Frequency Drives, Vector Drives - Drive System load calculation.
MICROCONTROLLERS OVERVIEW: 8051 Microcontroller , micro processor structure – Digital
Interfacing - Analog Interfacing - Digital to Analog Convertors - Analog to Digital Convertors -
Applications. Programming – Assembly, C ( LED Blinking , Voltage measurement using ADC).
UNIT – IV
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS: Basic Structure - Programming : Ladder diagram -
Timers, Internal Relays and Counters - Shift Registers - Master and Jump Controls - Data Handling -
Analog input/output - PLC Selection - Application.
UNIT – V
PROGRAMMABLE MOTION CONTROLLERS: Introduction - System Transfer Function – Laplace
transform and its application in analyzing differential equation of a control system - Feedback Devices:
Position , Velocity Sensors - Optical Incremental encoders - Proximity Sensors : Inductive ,
Capacitive, Infrared - Continuous and discrete processes - Control System Performance & tuning -
Digital Controllers - P , PI , PID Control - Control modes – Position , Velocity and Torque - Velocity
Profiles – Trapezoidal- S. Curve - Electronic Gearing - Controlled Velocity Profile - Multi axis
Interpolation , PTP , Linear , Circular - Core functionalities – Home , Record position , GOTO Position
- Applications : SPM, Robotics.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mechatronics Electronics Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering by W Bolton,
Pearson Education Press, 3rd edition, 2005.
2. Mechatronics by M.D.Singh, J.G.Joshi PHI.
3. Mechatronics HMT
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. “Designing Intelligent Machines”. open University, London.
2. Michel B. Histand and David G. Alciatore,”
3. Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement systems, “Tata MC Graw Hill
4. I. C.W. Desi ha, “Control sensors and actuators,” Prentice Hall.
5. Mechatronics Source Book by Newton C Braga, Thomson Publications, Chennai.
6. Mechatronics – N. Shanmugam / Anuradha Agencies Publisers.
7. Mechatronics System Design / Devdas shetty /Richard / Thomson.
195

3 0 0 3
JET PROPULSION AND ROCKET ENGINEERING
OPEN ELECTIVE-II
Prerequites: None
Course outcomes:
After doing this course, student should be in position to
1. Understand Turbo Jet Propulsion System
2. Analyze the flight performance
3. Understand Principles of Jet Propulsion and Rocketry & Nozzle Theory and Characteristics
4. Learn the Aero thermo chemistry of the combustion products
5. Understand the physics of Solid propellant rocket engine, Liquid Rocket Propulsion System &
Ramjet and Integral Rocket Ramjet Propulsion System:
Unit - I:
Turbo Jet Propulsion System:
Gas turbine cycle analysis – layout of turbo jet engine. Turbo machinery- compressors and turbines,
combustor, blade aerodynamics, engine off design performance analysis.
Flight Performance:
Forces acting on vehicle – Basic relations of motion – multi stage vehicles.
Unit - II:
Principles of Jet Propulsion and Rocketry:
Fundamentals of jet propulsion, Rockets and air breathing jet engines – Classification – turbo jet ,
turbo fan, turbo prop, rocket (Solid and Liquid propellant rockets) and Ramjet engines.
Nozzle Theory and Characteristics Parameters:
Theory of one dimensional convergent – divergent nozzles – aerodynamic choking of nozzles and
mass flow through a nozzle – nozzle exhaust velocity – thrust, thrust coefficient, Ac / At of a nozzle,
Supersonic nozzle shape, non-adapted nozzles, summer field criteria, departure from simple analysis
– characteristic parameters – 1) characteristic velocity, 2) specific impulse 3) total impulse 4)
relationship between the characteristic parameters 5) nozzle efficiency, combustion efficiency and
overall efficiency.
Unit - III: Aero Thermo Chemistry of The Combustion Products:

Review of properties of mixture of gases – Gibbs – Dalton laws – Equivalent ratio, enthalpy changes
in reactions, heat of reaction and heat of formation – calculation of adiabatic flame temperature and
specific impulse – frozen and equilibrium flows.
Solid Propulsion System:
Solid propellants – classification, homogeneous and heterogeneous propellants, double base
propellant compositions and manufacturing methods. Composite propellant oxidizers and binders.
Effect of binder on propellant properties. Burning rate and burning rate laws, factors influencing the
burning rate, methods of determining burning rates.
Unit - IV:
Solid propellant rocket engine – internal ballistics, equilibrium motor operation and equilibrium
pressure to various parameters. Transient and pseudo equilibrium operation, end burning and burning
grains, grain design. Rocket motor hard ware design. Heat transfer considerations in solid rocket
motor design. Ignition system, simple pyro devices.
Liquid Rocket Propulsion System:
Liquid propellants – classification, Mono and Bi propellants, Cryogenic and storage propellants,
ignition delay of hypergolic propellants, physical and chemical characteristics of liquid propellant.
Liquid propellant rocket engine – system layout, pump and pressure feed systems, feed system
components. Design of combustion chamber, characteristic length, constructional features, and
chamber wall stresses. Heat transfer and cooling aspects. Uncooled engines, injectors – various
196
types, injection patterns, injector characteristics, and atomization and drop size distribution, propellant
tank design.
Unit - V: Ramjet and Integral Rocket Ramjet Propulsion System:

Fuel rich solid propellants, gross thrust, gross thrust coefficient, combustion efficiency of ramjet
engine, air intakes and their classification – critical, super critical and sub-critical operation of air
intakes, engine intake matching, classification and comparison of IIRR propulsion systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gas Turbines and propulsive systems-P.Khajuria& S.P.Dubey/Dhanpatrai pub.
2. Gas Dynamics & Space Propulsion M.C.Ramaswamy / Jaico Publishing House.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rocket propulsion –Sutton
2. Gas Turbines /Cohen, Rogers & Sarvana Muttoo/Addision Wesley & Longman.
3. Gas Turbines-V.Ganesan /TMH.
197

3 0 0 3
ERGONOMICS
OPEN ELECTIVE-II
Prerequists: None
Objectives:
Provide a broad based introduction to ergonomic principles and their application in the design of work,
equipment and the workplace. Consideration is given to musculo-skeletal disorders, manual handling,
ergonomic aspects of the environment as well as to the social and legal aspects.
Course Outcomes:
On completing this course successfully the student will be able to:
• understand and apply ergonomic principles to the creation of safer, healthier and more efficient
and effective activities in the workplace;
• understand ergonomic risk assessments and appropriate control measures;
• understand the causes of upper limb disorders and how to reduce them;
• appreciate workplace layout and equipment design;
• appreciate environmental aspects of good ergonomic design.
UNIT I
Introduction to Ergonomics, Human, Machine Systems, Basic Work Systems, Human Relations and
Occupational Psychology, Hawthrone Experiments, Participation, Occupational Medicine, Human
Performance Psychology, FMJ versus FJM, Human Factors and Ergonomics. Modern Work Systems
and Neo, Taylorism, Attempts to Humanize Work, Generic Tools in Ergonomics, Effectiveness and
Cost Effectiveness of Ergonomics in General.
UNIT II
Design and Evaluation of Manual Handing Tasks, Anatomy and Biomechanics of Manual Handling,
Prevention of Manual Handling Injuries in the Workplace, Design of Manual Handling Tasks.
Body Mechanics at Work: Risk Assessment and Design, Low Back Pain, Biomechanics of Spinal
Loading, Ergonomics and Musculoskeletal System in General, Effectiveness and Cost Effectiveness.
UNIT III
Physically Demanding Work: Stress and Fatigue, Physically and Psychologically Demanding Work,
Muscles, Structure and Function, and Capacity, Physical work capacity.
User, Cantered Workspace Design Anthropometric Data, Statistical Essentials, Types of
Anthropometric Data, Applications Of Anthropometry in Design, Multiple Workspace Configurations,
Status of Anthropometry in Ergonomics.
UNIT IV
Human Error, Accidents, and Safety, Micro ergonomics, Human Error, and Accidents, Prevention of
Error in Human, Machine Interaction, Macroergonomices: Performance Shaping Factors.
UNIT V
Visual Environment: Measurements and Design, Vision and the Eye, Measurement of Light, Lighting
Design Considerations, Visual figure, Eyestrain, and Near Work, Status of Methods in Risk
Assessment and Task design.
Hearing, Sound, Noise and Vibration, Measurement of Sound, Hearing Protection, Design of Acoustic
Environment.
Text books
1. Introduction to Ergonomics(Third Edition)/ R.S.Bridger/CRC Press , Taylor & Francis Group
References
1. Human factors in Engineering and Design/E.J.McCormick/ TMH Edison
2. Motion and Time Design and Measurement of work/ Barnes Ralph., / John Wiley & sons
Newyork, 2002
198

3 0 0 3
MECHATRONICS
OPEN ELECTIVE-II
Pre-requisites: None.
Course objectives:
• They should be able to link up mechanical and electronics.
Outcomes:
• Develop a relationship between mechanical elements and electronics elements for proper
functioning of mechanical systems.
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION: Definition – Trends - Control Methods: Standalone , PC Based ( Real Time
Operating Systems, Graphical User Interface , Simulation ) - Applications: identification of sensors
and actuators in Washing machine, Automatic Camera, Engine Management, SPM, Robot, CNC,
FMS, CIM.
SIGNAL CONDITIONING : Introduction – Hardware - Digital I/O , Analog input – ADC , resolution,
Filtering Noise using passive components – Registors, capacitors - Amplifying signals using OP amps
–Software - Digital Signal Processing – Low pass , high pass , notch filtering
UNIT – II
PRECISION MECHANICAL SYSTEMS :
Modern CNC Machines – Design aspects in machine structures, guideways, feed drives, spindle and
spindle bearings, measuring systems, control software and operator interface, gauging and tool
monitoring.
Note: (text book: Mechatronics HMT – chapter 5)
ELECTRONIC INTERFACE SUBSYSTEMS : TTL, CMOS interfacing - Sensor interfacing – Actuator

interfacing – solenoids , motors Isolation schemes- opto coupling, buffer IC’s - Protection schemes –
circuit breakers , over current sensing , resetable fuses , thermal dissipation - Power Supply - Bipolar
transistors / mosfets
UNIT – III
ELECTROMECHANICAL DRIVES : Relays and Solenoids - Stepper Motors - DC brushed motors –
DC brushless motors - DC servo motors - 4-quadrant servo drives , PWM’s - Pulse Width Modulation
– Variable Frequency Drives, Vector Drives - Drive System load calculation.
MICROCONTROLLERS OVERVIEW : 8051 Microcontroller , micro processor structure – Digital
Interfacing - Analog Interfacing - Digital to Analog Convertors - Analog to Digital Convertors -
Applications. Programming –Assembly, C ( LED Blinking , Voltage measurement using ADC).
UNIT – IV
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS : Basic Structure - Programming : Ladder diagram -
Timers, Internal Relays and Counters - Shift Registers - Master and Jump Controls - Data Handling -
Analog input / output - PLC Selection - Application.
UNIT – V
PROGRAMMABLE MOTION CONTROLLERS : Introduction - System Transfer Function – Laplace
transform and its application in analysing differential equation of a control system - Feedback Devices
: Position , Velocity Sensors - Optical Incremental encoders - Proximity Sensors : Inductive ,
Capacitive , Infrared - Continuous and discrete processes - Control System Performance & tuning -
Digital Controllers - P , PI , PID Control - Control modes – Position , Velocity and Torque - Velocity
Profiles – Trapezoidal- S. Curve - Electronic Gearing - Controlled Velocity Profile - Multi axis
199
Interpolation , PTP , Linear , Circular - Core functionalities – Home , Record position , GOTO Position
- Applications : SPM, Robotics.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Mechatronics Electronics Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering by W Bolton,
Pearson Education Press, 3rd edition, 2005.
2. Mechatronics/M.D.Singh/J.G.Joshi/PHI.
REFERENCE:
1 “Designing Intelligent Machines”. open University, London.
2 Michel B. Histand and David G. Alciatore,”
3 Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement systems, “Tata MC Graw hill
4 I. C.W. Desi ha, “Control sensors and actuators,” Prentice Hall.
5 Mechatronics Source Book by Newton C Braga, Thomson Publications, Chennai.
6 Mechatronics – N. Shanmugam / Anuradha Agencies Publisers.
Mechatronics System Design / Devdas shetty/Richard/Thomson.
200

3 0 0 3
PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS

OPEN ELECTIVE-II
Prerequsite : Nil
Course Objectives:
The objective of this subject is to:
• Introduce the students to modulation and various analog and digital modulation schemes.
• They can have a broad understanding of satellite, optical, cellular, mobile, wireless and telecom
concepts.
Course Outcomes:
By completing this subject, the student can
• Work on various types of modulations.
• Should be able to use these communication modules in implementation.
• Will have a basic understanding of various wireless and cellular, mobile and telephone
communication systems.
Unit 1:
Introduction: Need for Modulation, Frequency translation, Electromagnetic spectrum, Gain,
Attenuation and decibels.
Unit 2:
Simple description on Modulation: Analog Modulation-AM, FM, Pulse Modulation-PAM, PWM,
PCM, Digital Modulation Techniques-ASK, FSK, PSK, QPSK modulation and demodulation schemes.
Unit 3:
Telecommunication Systems: Telephones Telephone system, Paging systems, Internet Telephony.
Networking and Local Area Networks: Network fundamentals, LAN hardware, Ethernet LANs,
Token Ring LAN.
Unit 4:
Satellite Communication: Satellite Orbits, satellite communication systems, satellite subsystems,
Ground Stations Satellite Applications, Global Positioning systems.
Optical Communication: Optical Principles, Optical Communication Systems, Fiber –Optic Cables,
Optical Transmitters & Receivers, Wavelength Division Multiplexing.
Unit 5:
Cellular and Mobile Communications: Cellular telephone systems, AMPS, GSM, CDMA, WCDMA.
Wireless Technologies: Wireless LAN, PANs and Bluetooth, ZigBee and Mesh Wireless networks,
Wimax and MANs, Infrared wireless, RFID communication, UWB.
Text Books:
1. Principles of Electronic Communication Systems, Louis E. Frenzel, 3e, McGraw Hill publications,
2008.
2. Kennady, Davis, Electronic Communications systems, 4e, TMH, 1999
Reference Books:
1. Tarmo Anttalainen, Introduction to Telecommunications Network Engineering, Artech House
Telecommunications Library.
2. Theodore Rappaport, Wireless Communications-Principles and practice, Printice Hall, 2002.
3. Roger L. Freeman, Fundamentals of Telecommunications, 2e, Wiley publications.
4. Wayne Tomasi, Introduction to data communications and networking, Pearson Education, 2005.
201

3 0 0 3
CYBER SECURITY
OPEN ELECTIVE -II
Prerequisites
1. A Course on “Network Security and Cryptography”
Objectives
1. The purpose of the course is to educate on cyber security and the legal perspectives of cyber
crimes and cyber offenses.
2. Introduce tools and methods for enhancing cyber security.
3. Topics include- cyber crimes, cyber offenses, cyber crimes on mobile and wireless devices, tools
and methods to prevent cyber crimes, legal perspectives of cyber crimes and cyber security,
computer forensics, Intellectual Property Rights and cyber terrorism
Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the knowledge of cyber security and understand the Indian and Global Act
concerning cyber crimes
2. Employ security and privacy methods in the development of modern applications such that
personal data is protected; and provide safe Internet usage.
UNIT-I
Introduction to Cybercrime:
Introduction, Cybercrime and Information security, who are cyber criminals, Classification of Cyber
crimes, Cybercrime: The legal Perspectives and Indian Perspective, Cybercrime and the Indian ITA
2000, A Global Perspective on Cyber crimes.
Cyber offenses : How Criminals Plan Them
Introduction, How Criminals plan the Attacks, Social Engineering, Cyber stalking, Cyber cafe and
Cybercrimes, Botnets: The Fuel for Cybercrime, Attack Vector, Cloud Computing.
UNIT-II
Cybercrime: Mobile and Wireless Devices
Introduction, Proliferation of Mobile and Wireless Devices, Trends in Mobility, Credit card Frauds in
Mobile and Wireless Computing Era, Security Challenges Posed by Mobile Devices, Registry Settings
for Mobile Devices, Authentication service Security, Attacks on Mobile/Cell Phones, Mobile Devices:
Security Implications for Organizations, Organizational Measures for Handling Mobile, Organizational
Security Policies and Measures in Mobile Computing Era, Laptops.
Tools and Methods Used in Cyber Crime:
Introduction, Proxy services and Anonymizers, Phishing, Password Cracking, Keyloggers and
Spywares, Virus and Worms, Trojan Horses and Backdoors, Steganography, DoS and DDoS Attacks,
SQL Injection, Buffer Overflow, Attacks on Wireless Networks.
UNIT III
Cyber crimes and Cyber Security: the Legal Perspectives Introduction
Cyber Crime and Legal Landscape around the world, Why Do We Need Cyber laws: The Indian
Context, The Indian IT Act, Challenges to Indian Law and Cybercrime Scenario In India, Digital
signatures and the Indian IT Act, Amendments to the Indian IT Act, Cybercrime and Punishment
Cyber law, Technology and Students: Indian Scenario.
Understanding Computer Forensics

Introduction, Historical background of Cyber forensics, Digital Forensics Science, The Need for
Computer Forensics, Cyber Forensics and Digital evidence, Forensics Analysis of Email, Digital
Forensics Lifecycle, Chain of Custody concept, Network Forensics, Approaching a computer,
Forensics Investigation, Challenges in Computer Forensics, Special Tools and Techniques Forensics
Auditing
202
UNIT IV
Cyber Security: Organizational Implications
Introduction, cost of cyber crimes and IPR issues, web threats for organizations, security and privacy
implications, social media marketing: security risks and perils for organizations, social computing and
the associated challenges for organizations.
Cybercrime and Cyber terrorism: Introduction, intellectual property in the cyberspace, the ethical
dimension of cyber crimes the psychology, mindset and skills of hackers and other cyber criminals
UNIT V
Cybercrime: Illustrations, Examples and Mini-Cases
Examples:
Official Website of Maharashtra Government Hacked, Indian Banks Lose Millions of Rupees,
Parliament Attack, Pune City Police Bust Nigerian Racket, e-mail spoofing instances.
Mini-Cases:
The Indian Case of online Gambling, An Indian Case of Intellectual Property Crime, Illustrations of
Financial Frauds in Cyber Domain, Digital Signature-Related Crime Scenarios.
Text book:
1. Cyber Security: Understanding Cyber Crimes, Computer Forensics and Legal Perspectives,
Nina Godbole and Sunil Belapure, Wiley INDIA.
Reference book:
1. Cyber Security Essentials, James Graham, Richard Howard and Ryan Otson, CRC Press.
203

3 0 0 3
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

OPEN ELECTIVE-II
Prerequisites
1. A course on “Advanced Data Structures”
Objectives
1. To understand the basic concepts and the applications of database systems.
2. To master the basics of SQL and construct queries using SQL.
3. Topics include data models, database design, relational model, relational algebra, transaction
control, concurrency control, storage structures and access techniques.
Outcomes
1. Gain knowledge of fundamentals of DBMS, database design and normal forms
2. Master the basics of SQL for retrieval and management of data.
3. Be acquainted with the basics of transaction processing and concurrency control.
4. Familiarity with database storage structures and access techniques
UNIT I:
Database System Applications: database system Vs. file system, view of data, data abstraction,
instances and schemas, data models, the ER model, relational model, other models, database
languages, DDL, DML, database access for application programs, database users and administrator,
transaction management, database system structure, storage manager, the query processor, history
of data base systems, data base design and ER diagrams, beyond ER design entities, attributes and
entity sets, relationships and relationship sets, additional features of ER model, concept design with
the ER Model, conceptual design for large enterprises.
UNIT II:
Introduction to the Relational Model: integrity constraint over relations, enforcing integrity
constraints, querying relational data, logical data base design, introduction to views,
destroying/altering tables and views, form of basic SQL query, examples of basic SQL queries,
introduction to nested queries, correlated nested queries, set comparison operators, aggregation
operators, NULL values, comparison using null values, logical connectivity’s, AND, OR and NOT,
impact on SQL constructs, outer joins, disallowing NULL values, complex integrity constraints in SQL,
triggers and active data bases, Oracle, SQL Server, DB2.
UNIT III:
Relational Algebra: Selection and projection, set operations, renaming, Joins, Division, Examples of
Algebra overviews, Relational calculus, Tuple relational Calculus, Domain relational calculus,
Expressive Power of Algebra and calculus.
Schema refinement: Problems caused by redundancy, decompositions, problems related to
decomposition, reasoning about functional dependencies, FIRST, SECOND, THIRD normal forms,
BCNF, lossless join decomposition, dependency preserving decomposition, schema refinement in
database design, multi valued dependencies, FOURTH normal form, FIFTH normal form.
UNIT IV:
Transaction Concept, Transaction State, Implementation of Atomicity and Durability, Concurrent
Executions, Serializability, Recoverability, Implementation of Isolation, Testing for serializability, Lock
Based Protocols, Timestamp Based Protocols, Validation- Based Protocols, Multiple Granularity.
Recovery and Atomicity, Log–Based Recovery, Recovery with Concurrent Transactions, Buffer
Management, Failure with loss of nonvolatile storage, Advance Recovery systems, Remote Backup
systems.
204
UNIT V:
Data on External Storage, File Organization and Indexing, Cluster Indexes, Primary and Secondary
Indexes, Index data Structures, Hash Based Indexing, Tree base Indexing, Comparison of File
Organizations, Indexes and Performance Tuning, Intuitions for tree Indexes, Indexed Sequential
Access Methods (ISAM), B+ Trees: A Dynamic Index Structure.
Text Books:
1. Database Management Systems, Raghurama Krishnan, Johannes Gehrke, Tata Mc Graw Hill 3rd
Edition
2. Database System Concepts, Silberschatz, Korth, Mc Graw hill, V edition.
References:
1. Database Systems design, Implementation, and Management, Peter Rob & Carlos Coronel 7th
Edition.
2. Fundamentals of Database Systems, Elmasri Navrate Pearson Education
3. Introduction to Database Systems, C.J. Date Pearson Education
4. Oracle for Professionals, The X Team, S.Shah and V. Shah, SPD.
5. Database Systems Using Oracle: A Simplified guide to SQL and PL/SQL,Shah,PHI.
6. Fundamentals of Database Management Systems, M. L. Gillenson, Wiley Student Edition.
205

3 0 0 3
CORROSION ENGINEERING
OPEN ELECTIVE-II
Pre-requisites: NIL
Course Objectives:
1. To demonstrate electrometallurgy principles in deposition winning and the efficiency of the bath.
2. To determine corrosion rate/ resistance of metals and alloys.
3. To explain corrosion protection methods and tests.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the student will be able:
1. To gain knowledge in various types of electrolytic cells and the processes taking place in them.
2. To obtain knowledge about the importance of controlling corrosion and its prevention measures.
3. The course is useful for higher studies, R&D, and also for getting into jobs in industries.
UNIT - I
Introduction, Electro Chemistry principles, electrochemical reactions, Polarization, passivity,
environmental effects (oxygen, oxidizers, velocity, temperature, corrosive concentration, Galvanic
coupling).
UNIT - II
Corrosion, Introduction, Definition, classification, Forms of corrosion, uniform corrosion,
Two metal corrosion: Sacrificial anode, EMF and Galvanic Series, Environmental effects,
Pitting corrosion: Pit shape and growth, Autocatalytic Nature of pitting, Crevice corrosion.
UNIT - III
Intergranular corrosion: Sensitization, weld decay, Knife-Line attack, Stress corrosion cracking: crack
morphology, stress effects, environmental factors, metallurgical factors, Erosion corrosion: cavitation
damage, fretting corrosion, Corrosion fatigue.
UNIT - IV
Corrosion prevention methods: Alteration of Environment (Inhibitors), Design, Coatings, cathodic and
anodic protection. Material selection, Metallurgical aspects, Hydrogen damage (hydrogen blistering,
Hydrogen embrittlement, Prevention).
UNIT - V
Modern theory and applications of corrosion: Introduction, free energy, cell potentials, emf series,
applications of thermodynamics to corrosion, Corrosion rate expressions and measurements,
corrosion testing.
Text / Reference Books:

1. Theory of Corrosion and Protection of Metals, N. D. Tomashov, Macmillan, 1967.
rd
2. Corrosion Engineering, M. G. Fontana, 3 edition, McGraw-Hill, 1985.
3. Corrosion and Corrosion Control, H. H. Uhlig, Wiley, 1985.
206

3 0 0 3
TESTING OF MATERIALS
OPEN ELECTIVE-II
Pre-requisites: NIL
Course Objectives:
1. To gain and understanding of the response of various metals under the application of stress and/or
temperature.
2. To build necessary theoretical back ground of the role of lattice defects in governing bot;h elastic and
plastic properties of metals will be discussed.
3. Obtain a working knowledge of various hardness testing machines BHN, VHN, RHN
4. Obtain a working knowledge of creep and fatigue and analysis of data.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
1. Classify mechanical testing of ferrous and non-ferrous metals and alloys.
2. Recognize the importance of crystal defects including dislocations in plastic deformation.
3. Identify the testing methods for obtaining strength and hardness.
4. Examine the mechanisms of materials failure through fatigue and creep
UNIT – I
Introduction, Importance of testing
Hardness Test: Methods of hardness testing – Brinell, Vickers, Rockwell hardness tests.
The Impact Test: Notched bar impact test and its significance, Charpy and Izod Tests, fracture toughness
testing - COD and CTOD tests, significance of transition temperature curve.
UNIT - II
The Tension Test: Engineering stress-strain and True stress-strain curves. Tensile properties, conditions
for necking. Stress-Strain diagrams for steel, Aluminum and cast iron.
UNIT - III
Fatigue Test: Introduction, Stress cycles, S-N Curve, Effect of mean stress, Mechanism of fatigue
failure, Effect of stress concentration, size, surface condition and environments on fatigue.
UNIT – IV
Creep and Stress Rupture: Introduction, The creep curve, Stress-rupture test, Structural changes during
creep, Mechanism of creep deformation, theories of creep. Fracture at elevated temperature.
UNIT – V
NDT: Principle, Operation, Advantages and Limitations of Liquid Penetrant, Magnetic Particle, Radio
graphy and Ultrasonic tests.
TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mechanical Metallurgy – G. E. Dieter
2. Mechanical behavior - Ed. Wulf.
3. Mechanical Metallurgy – White & Lemay.
4. Testing of Materials - A.V.K. Suryanarayana
207

3 0 0 3
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT
OPEN ELECTIVE-II
Objectives:
• To know the Classification of solid waste and characterization of the same
• Understand the sense of onsite handling storage and collection systems including transportation
• Understand the different processing technologies of solid waste.
Outcomes:
The student will be able to
• Apply the knowledge of characterization of waste and develop a suitable management plan
• Assess the cost of transportation and laboratory processing of solid waste
• Identify hazardous nature of waste if any and can suggest suitable dumping methods.
• Suggest processing waste for material for energy recovery.
Unit I
Introduction: Definition, characteristics and perspectives of solid waste. Types of solid waste.
Physical and chemical characteristics. Variation of composition and characteristics. Municipal,
industrial, special and hazardous wastes.
General aspects: Overview of material flow in society. Reduction in raw material usage. Reduction in
solid waste generation. Reuse and material recovery. General effects on health and environment.
Legislations.
Unit II
Engineered systems: Typical generation rates.Estimation and factors effecting generation rates. On
site handling.Storage and processing. Collection systems and devices. Transfer and transport.
Unit III
Processing Techniques: Mechanical volume reduction. Thermal volume reduction. Component
separation. Land filling and land forming. Deep well injection.
Unit IV
Material recovery: Mechanical size alteration. Electromagnetic separation. Drying and dewatering.
Other material recovery systems. Recovery of biological conversion products. Recovery of thermal
conversion products.
Energy recovery: Energy recovery systems and efficiency factors. Determination of output and
efficiency. Details of energy recovery systems. Combustion incineration and heat recovery.
Gasification and pyrolysis. Refuse derived fuels (RDF).
Unit V
Case studies: Major industries and management methods used in typical industries – Coal fired
power stations, textile industry, oil refinery, distillery, sugar industry, and radioactive waste generation
units.
Text Books:
1. Howard S. Peavy, Environmental Engineering, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1986.
2. Dutta, Industrial Solid Water Management and Land Filling Practice, Narose Publishing House,
1999.
Reference Books:
1. Sastry C.A., Waste Treatment Plants, Narose Publishing House, 1995.
2. Lagrega, Hazardous Waste Management, McGraw Hill, 1994.
208
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. / MBA) IV Year I-Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
MARKETING MANAGEMENT
PG CORE-I
(Students must read textbook. Faculty are free to choose any other cases)
Course Aim: The aim of the Marketing Management Course is to provide students the marketing
skills and enable them .
T o understand the basic marketing trends through case studies.
To familiarise with basic concepts of marketing mix and strategies
To get oriented to the tools required to help develop and implement marketing strategies.
Learning outcome:
The students would be able to describe key marketing concepts, theories and techniques for
analyzing a variety of marketing situations
By reading text and relating the concepts through cases the student would be able to understand the
importance and role of marketing in a global environment
They will be able to analyze markets and design customer driven strategies and will be able to
communicate the decisions towards business development with superior customer value.
1. Introduction to World of Marketing: Importance, scope of Marketing, Core Marketing

Concepts, Marketing Philosophies, Marketing Environment, Marketing Strategies & Plans,
Developed Vs Developing Marketing. Market Research-Definition of MR, MIS, Commissioning
MR, MR Process, MR Online, MR & Ethics, International MR.
Case 1: Bata (Rajendra.P Maheshwari page no: 03)
Case 2: Mahindra Scooters (Arun Kumar page no: 89).
Case 3: Ready Meal Manufactures (Adrian palmer, page no: 70).
Case 4: Santoor –(lamb Hair– page no : 238).
Case 5: Drawing on data, searching for insight (Adrian palmer – Page no: 175).
2. Analyzing Marketing Opportunities, Customer Value and Marketing Mix : Consumer Decision
Making, Creating Customer Value, Analyzing Consumer Markets – Consumer Behavior –
cultural, Social & Personal Factors, developing products & brands – product levels; classifying
products, product range, line & mix, PLC, new product development.
Case 1: Small New Phones (Adrian palmer- page no: 296).
3. Designing a Customer Driven Strategy: Market segmentation- segmentation of consumer

market, business market, requirement for effective segmentation, market targeting –
evaluating market segmentation, selecting target market segmentation, positioning –
positioning maps, positioning strategy.
Case 1: (Segmentation) Zee TV (lamb, Hair page no 212).
Case 2: (Targeting) Kellogg’s (lamb, Hair page no 300 )
Case 3: (Positioning) Nimbooz (S. Neelamegham page no 225).
Case 4 :( Positioning) Dalda (Arun Kumar page no:195).
4. Distribution Decisions, Promotion & Communication Strategies : Marketing Channels,

Channel intermediates and functions, channel structure, channel for consumer products,
business and industrial products, alternative channel, channel strategy decisions. The
promotional mix, advertising, public relations, sales promotion, personal selling, marketing
communication- communication process, communication promotion mix, factors effecting the
promotion mix
Case 1: Barista (Arun Kumar – page no:33).
Case 2: Nano Car (lamb, Hair – page no:52)
Case 3: Indigo (lamb, Hair – page no:356).
Case 4: TESCO (Adrian palmer page no : 388 )
209
Case 5: Hero Motor Corp (lamb, Hair Page no:446)

Case 6: Avon Cosmetics (lamb, Hair Page no:497).
Case 7: Eureka (Arun – Page no: 711).
Case 8: Home Shop (Arun – page no: 639).
5. Pricing Decisions & Personal Communication - Importance of price, cost determinant of

price, markup pricing, profit maximization pricing, break even pricing, pricing strategy, ethics
of pricing strategy, product line pricing, WOM, Rural marketing, BOP, relationship Marketing,
Digital marketing, Social marketing, post modern marketing, market sustainability and ethics,
Global marketing.
Case 1: Coca Cola(lamb, Hair – page no: 112).
Case 2: I phone ( lamb, Hair – page no: 534).
Case 3: Akash Tablet (lamb, Hair – page no: 557).
Case 4: Compact car (Arun Kumar page no :369)
Case 5: Chick (lamb,Hair Page no:650)
Case 6: Nokia (Neelamegham page no– 645).
Case 7: Shakti (Rajendra .P Maheswari – Page no:408).
Case 8: Airtel (Arun – page no: 901)
Case 9: Beer Marketing (Adrian palmer page no:529)
Textbook:
1. Lamb, Hair, Sharma, Mc Daniel: MKTG, A South Asian Perspective, Cengage Learning, 2012.
Journal : MICA Communications Review – A Marketing Communications Journal, Mudra Institute
of Communications, Ahmedabad.
Business Game
Music2Go Marketing: (Marketing Management Simulation Game), TMH, 2013. You can play on
any computer with internet (Rs.150/- per year-better buy and play).
210

4 0 0 4
HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
PG CORE-II
Course Aim:
To understand various terms in HRM and be able to manage the human resources of an organization
effectively and efficiently.
Learning Outcome:
Students should be able to understand the basic HR concepts. They will be able to understand the
process of recruitment, selection, performance appraisal, training & development, compensation and
employee retention approaches and strategies.
***
Unit-I:
Introduction of HRM: Introduction to HRM –Line Managers –HR Duties –New Approaches to
Organizing HR –Globalization & Competition Trends Technological Trends –Trends in Nature of Work
–Workforce and Demographic Trends –Economic Challenges –HRM in India –High Performance
Work System’s–Labor Legislation in India –Equal Employment Opportunity 1990-1991 –HR Score
Card developed by TVRLS India.
Case: Social Surveyors in Flood-hit Areas (Gary Dessler page no 160)

Case: Finding people who are passionate about what they do (Gary Desslerpage no 195)
Case: HR, CULTURE and Business Results Success at Google, Scripps and UPS (Robert L Mathis
P.No. 35)
Case: Religious Accommodation (Robert L Mathis P. No. 118)
Case: Mitsubishi Believes in EEO-Now (Robert L Mathis P. No. 119)
Unit-II: Recruitment and Placement: Basics of Job Analysis –Methods for Collecting Job Analysis
Information –Job Descriptions –Job Satisfaction –Job Enlargement, Job Enrichment, Job Rotation,
HRP –Recruitment & Selection Process –Planning & Forecasting –Sources of Recruitment –
Recruitment of Diverse Work Force –Employee Testing & Selection –Basic types of Interviews –
Errors in Interviews –Translating Strategy into HR-Policies & Practices.
Case:Reinventing the wheel at apex door Company (Gary Dessler page no 309)
Case: Xerox Focuses on HR (Robert L Mathis P. No. 79)
Case: where do you find the Bodies? (Robert L Mathis P. No. 79)
Case: The Reluctant Receptionist (Robert L Mathis P. No. 159)
Case: Accenture –Retaining for Itself (Robert L Mathis P. No.193)
Case: Recruiting at Kia (Robert L Mathis P. No. 231)
Case: Strategic Selection: A Review of Two Companies (Robert L Mathis P. No.267)
Unit-III:
Performance Appraisal and Training & Development of Employees –Concept of Performance,
Management Appraisal –Techniques for Performance Appraisal –Career Management –Employer Life
Cycle –Career Management & Talent Management, Analyzing Training needs & Designing the
program –Implementing different training program –Implementing Management Development
Programs –Evaluating the Training Programs .
Case: Training Crucial for Hotels (Robert L Mathis P. No. 307)

Case: performance management improvements for Bristol-Myers Squibb (Robert L Mathis P. No. 393)
Case: Just Another Job (Robert L Mathis P. No. 647)
Case: The Dilemma Within (Robert L Mathis P. No. 667)
Case: Performance Appraisal at Cola Magic Drinks (Robert L Mathis P. No. 671)
211
Case: Appraising the secretaries at Sweet water U? (Gary Dessler page no 349)
Unit-IV: Compensation–Basic Factors in Determining pay structure –Establishing pay rates –Pricing
Managerial and Professional Jobs –Special Topics in Compensation –Benefits –Insurance –
Retirement Benefits –Personal Services & Family friendly benefits –Salient features of Workmen
Compensation Act & Minimum Wages Act.
Case: Salary inequities at ACME Manufacturing (Gary Dessler page no 429)

Case: HR Contributes at CSSCO (Robert L Mathis P. No. 36)
Case: Compensation changes at JC Penny (Robert L Mathis P. No. 435)
Case: Benefiting Connie (Robert L Mathis P. No. 507)
Unit-V: Employee Relation–Labour Movement –Collective Bargaining Process –Grievances –

Managing Dismissals –Employee Safety and Health –Occupational Safety Law –Work Place Health
Hazards Problems & Remedies –Salient features of Industrial Disputes Acts 1947 –Factories Act,
Mines Act.
Case : The New Safety and Health Program (Gary Dessler page no 623)
Case : Full Disclosure on Sex Offenders? (Robert L Mathis P. No. 231)
Case : Wal-Mart and Watching Its “Union Prevention” (Robert L Mathis P. No. 629)
REFERENCES:
• Gary Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, 12thEdition, Pearson-2012.
• Robert L Mathis, John H Jackson, Manas Ranjan Tripathy “Human Resource Management-A
South Asian Perspective ”, Cengage Learning2012.
• C.B.Mamoria & V.S.P.Rao, Personnel Management, HPH, 2012.
• K. Aswathappa, “Human Resource Management, Text and Cases”, TMH, 2011.
• Dipak Kumar Bhattacharyya “Human Resource Management”, Excel Books, 2012.
• R.Wayne Mondy, “Human Resource Management” Pearson, 2009
212

4 0 0 4
SALES AND DISTRIBUTION
PG Elective-I (Marketing)
Aim: The aim of this course is to enable students to the sales and distribution processes with
particular focus on Sales Management and Sales Personnel, the role of Distribution Channels and
enabling them to manage Channel partners.
To expose students to the tools and strategies necessary for designing, motivating and evaluating
sales & distribution management systems.
.
Learning outcomes:
The student should be able to manage the sales force and distribution processes through
sales planning and Budgeting .
The Students should be able to understand & appreciate the diverse variables affecting the
sales & distribution function and analyse their impact on the sales and distribution processes.
1. Introduction to Sales Management: Evolution of Sales Management, importance of Sales

Management, types of Selling, difference between Selling and Marketing, Modern Day Sales
Activities, Selling Skills, Selling Strategies, Selling Process.
Case: Plastic Industries, Inc., The role of Personal Selling in creating Market. (Richard
R.Still page no 104,105)
Case: United air flow manufacturer of households appliances sales persons job. (Richard
R.Still page no 115 to 118)
2. Sales Planning and Budgeting: Sales planning process, sales forecasting methods, sales
budgeting process, methods used for deciding sales budget, types of quotas and quota
setting procedure, reasons for establishing or revising sales territories, routing and scheduling
sales persons, market cost analysis.
Case: Augsberg Wiesel Ltd, manufacturer of table ware, establishment of sales territories
(Richard R Still, Page no 603 to 605)
Case: Midland office engineering, establishment of sales budgeting program, (Richard R
Still, page no 588 to 589)
3. Sales Force Management: Recruitment and selection of the sales force, training the sales
force, sales force motivation, sales force compensation, sales force control and evaluation.
Case: 1 Adjusting Compensation Plan to Motivate Sales Representatives ( K.Sridhara Batt,
page no 576 to 577)
Case: 2 Sales Force Strategy at Life Insurance Corporation (K.Sridhara Batt, page no 579)
4. Introduction to Distribution Management

Definition of Distribution Management, need for Distribution Channels, Distribution Channels
for Rural Markets, designing the Marketing Channels, Motivating and Evaluating Channel
Members, Capturing the Customer requirements
Case: 1 Fed Ex’s Value Chain Solutions, (K.Sridhara Batt page no 618 to 620)
Case: 2 The National Handloom Development Corporation. (Tapan K. Panda, Sunil Sahadev
page no. 504)
213
5. Managing Channel Institutions

Managing Channel Information Systems, Managing Retailers, Wholesalers, Franchisers,
Designing Channel Systems, reasons for Channel Conflicts, Managing Conflict, Managing
International Channel of Distribution, Ethical issues in Sales and Distribution Management
Case: 1 Kinetic Engineering Company, Handling Channel Conflict, (Krishna K Havaldar,
Vasant page no 461)
Case: 2 Indian Ayurveda Pharmacy Limited, (Tapan K. Panda,Sunil Sahad page no 719)
Textbook
Krishna K Havaldar, Vasnt M Cavale, Sales and Distribution Management, 2nd edition, TMH,
2011.
Journal : MICA Communications Review – A Marketing Communications Journal, Mudra
Institute of Communications, Ahmedabad.
Business Game : Music2Go Marketing: (Marketing Management Simulation Game), TMH, 2013.
You can play on any computer with internet (Rs.150/- per year-better buy and play).
Music2Go is a Principles of Marketing/Marketing Management simulation game, where the
students are required to formulate and implement their own Sales and Marketing Campaign. This
helps the students to have a hands – on business experience in the classroom – experiential learning
at its best.
214

4 0 0 4
TRAINING & DEVELOPMENT
PG Elective – I (HR)
Course Objectives:
1. To provide the students information on the Career opportunities in training, important concepts
and meanings, Integrating strategy and training.
2. To enable the students to understand the design of training, implementation
3. To introduce the knowledge of evaluation of training programs in the organization.
Learning Outcome:
1. The student will be familiar with how to do training need analysis
2. Students will be able to learn various training methods, design training programs, implement
training programs.
3. They also gain the knowledge to evaluate the effectiveness of training programs.
1. Training in organizations: Trends in training, Career opportunities in training, important
concepts and meanings, Integrating OD, strategy and training, understand motivation and
performance, aligning training design with learning process.
Case : Taking Charge at Domtar : What it takes for a turnaround? (Nick Blanchard)
Case :LG Electronics ((Nick Blanchard)
Case : The wilderness training lab((Nick Blanchard)
2. Need Analysis and Training design: The Training Need Analysis (TNA) Model, TNA and
Design, organizational constraints, developing objectives, Facilitation of learning and training
transfer to the job, design theory.
Case : Developing a training package at westcan (Nick Blanchard)
Case : The Training program (Fabrics Inc.) (Nick Blanchard)
3. Training methods: Matching methods with outcomes, lectures and demonstrations , games and
simulations, OJT, computer based training.(CBT).
Case : Training & Development at Godrej. (Nick Blanchard)
4. Implementation & Evaluation of Training: Development of training, implementation, transfer of
training, major players in training & development, rational for evaluation, resistance to training
evaluation, types of evaluation.
Case : Jack goes to training. (Nick Blanchard)
Case 3 : Training designed to change behavior and attitude. (Nick Blanchard)
5. Areas of organizational Training: Orientation training, diversity training, sexual harassment
training, team training, cross functional teams, cross cultural training, training for talent
management and competency mapping.
Case 4: The competent employee. (Nick Blanchard)
Textbook:
• P.Nick Blanchard, James W. Thacker, A.Anand Ram, ” Effective Training” 4e, Pearson,
2012.
References:
1. Anjali Ghansekar “Training & Development” Everest, 2013.
2. Raymond A Noe, Amitabh Deo Kodwani, “Employee Training and Development” McGraw Hill,
2012.
3. B,Rathan Reddy “ Effective Human Resource Training & Developing Strategy “ Himalaya,2012 .
4. Rolf Lynton, Uday Pareek “Training for Development” Sage, 2012.
5. G Pandu Naik “Training & Development “Excel Books, 2012.
6. R K Sahu “Training for Development” Excel Books, 2012.
7. P L Rao : HRD Trainer's Handbook of Management Games, Excel, 2013
215

4 0 0 4
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
PG Elective-I (Finance)
*The students need Discounting Table and Annuity tables for the examination
Course Aim: To give an overview of the functions of a financial manager in the commercial world
with a particular focus on the concepts and theories of corporate finance.
Learning Outcome:
The students will gain skills to understand, evaluate and resolve the problems confronted by the
financial managers. They will gain in insight into the decision making process of a financial manager
based on timely, relevant and reliable financial and non-financial information. This course will further
help the students to understand the deligent use of resources efficiently, effectively and economically.
1 The Finance Function: Nature and Scope; Evolution of finance function – Its new role in the
contemporary scenario –Goals of finance function – maximizing vs. satisfying; Profit vs. Wealth
vs. Welfare; the Agency relationship and costs; Risk-Return trade off; Concept of Time Value of
Money – Future Value and Present value and the basic valuation model.
2. The Investment Decision: Investment decision process- Project generation, project evaluation,
project selection and project Implementation. Developing Cash Flow; Data for New Projects;
Capital Budgeting Techniques –Traditional and DCF methods. The NPV vs. IRR Debate;
Approaches for reconciliation. Capital budgeting decision under conditions of risk and uncertainty.
Cost of capital: Concept and measurement of cost of capital, Debt vs. Equity, cost of equity,
preference shares, equity capital and retained earnings, weighted average cost of capital and
marginal cost of capital. Importance of cost of capital in capital budgeting decisions.
3. Capital Structure Decisions: Capital structure vs. financial structure - Capitalization, financial
leverage, operating leverage and composite leverage. EBIT-EPS Analysis, Indifference
Point/Break even analysis of financial leverage, Capital structure Theories –The Modigliani Miller
Theory, NI, NOI Theory and Traditional Theory –A critical appraisal.
4. Dividend Decisions: Dividends and value of the firm - Relevance of dividends, the MM
hypothesis, Factors determining Dividend Policy-dividends and valuation of the firm-the basic
models. Declaration and payment of dividends. Bonus shares. Rights issue, share-splits, Major
forms of dividends – Cash and Bonus shares. The theoretical backdrop – Dividends and
valuation; Major theories centered on the works of GORDON, WALTER and LITNER. A brief
discussion on dividend policies of Indian companies. Working Capital Management: Components
of working capital, gross vs. net working capital, determinants of working capital needs, the
operating cycle approach. Planning of working capital, Financing of working capital through Bank
finance and Trade Credit – Recommendations of Tandon and Daheja Committee on Working
Capital. Cases.
5. Management of Current Assets: Management of cash, – Basic strategies for cash

management, cash budget, cash management techniques/processes. Marketable securities:
characteristics, selection criterion, Marketable security alternatives; Management of receivables
and Management of inventory- The importance of current assets management in working capital
planning. Corporate Restructuring: Corporate Mergers, Acquisitions and Takeovers: Types of
Mergers, Economic rationale of Mergers, motives for Mergers; Financial evaluation of Mergers.
216
Textbook
th
1. IM Pandey, Financial Management, 10 Edition, Vikas , 2013.
References:
1. M.Y Khan, P K Jain: “Financial Management-Text and Problems”, 6th Edition, TMH, 2012.
2. P.C.Tulsian,C.A. Bharat Tulsian , “Financial Management” S.Chand Publications,2012
th
3. Prasanna Chandra, “Financial Management Theory and Practice”, 8 Edition. TMH ,2012
4. Shashi K.Gupta, R.K.Sharma , “Financial Management” Kalyani Publishers ,2012
5. Rajiv Srivastava, Anil Mishra , Financial Management” Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2012
6. James C Van Horne, Sanjay Dhamija, “Financial Management and Policy” Pearson Education,
2012 .
7. IM Pandey, Cases in Financial Management, TMH 2/e 2012
217

4 0 0 4
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (MIS)

PG Elective – I (SYSTEMS)
Course Objectives
1. To provide students basic concepts of MIS and IS models
2. To explain integration process of MIS with Enterprise Resource Planning ( ERP)
3. To provide a practical framework for Information System operations and management
Learning Outcomes
1. Students learn different models of MIS and their applicability in various business resource
requirement plans
2. Students learn user training, operations, control, troubleshooting and maintenance aspects of
MIS
3. Students will appreciate what is the successful design and implementation of MIS in business
departments and operations
1. UNIT- I Introduction to IS Models – Nolan Stage Hypothesis, IS Strategic Grid, Wards Model,
Earl’s Multiple Methodology, Critical Success Factors, Soft Systems Methodology, Socio-
Technical Systems Approach (Mumford), System Develop Life Cycle, Prototype and End User
Computing, Application Packages, Outsourcing, Deciding Combination of Methods.
2. UNIT-II Types of Information Systems– Transactions Processing System, Knowledge Work

Systems, Office Automation System, Management Information System, Decision Support System,
Expert System, Strategic Information System. IS Security, Control and Audit - System
Vulnerability and Abuse, business value of security and control, Need for Security, Methods of
minimizing risks, IS Audit, ensuring system quality.
3. UNIT- III Induction to ERP: Overview of ERP, MRP, MRPII and Evolution of ERP, Integrated
Management Systems, Reasons for the growth of ERP, Business Modeling, Integrated Data
Model, Foundations of IS in Business, Obstacles of applying IT. Advantages and limitations of
ERP.
4. UNIT –IV ERP Modules: Finance, Accounting Systems, Manufacturing and Production Systems,
Sales and Distribution Systems, , Human Resource Systems, Plant Maintenance System,
Materials Management System, Quality Management System, ERP System Options and
Selection, ERP proposal Evaluation.
5. UNIT –V ERP Implementation and Maintenance: Implementation Strategy Options, Features of

Successful ERP Implementation, Strategies to Attain Success, User Training, Maintaining ERP &
IS. Case Studies.
References
1. C Laudon and Jane P.Laudon, et al: Management Information Systems, Pearson Education,
2009.
2. Alexis Leon, ERP (Demystified), 5/E, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2009.
3. David L Olson, Managerial Issues of Enterprise Resource Planning Systems, McGraw Hill,
International Edition-2009.
4. Vaman, ERP in Practice, Tata McGraw-Hill , 2009
5. Gordon B. Davis & Margrethe H.Olson: Management Information Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill ,
2009.
6. W S Jawadekar: Management Information Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill , New Delhi, 2009
7. James A. Obrein: Management Information Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill , 2008
8. Gerald V.Post, David L Anderson: Management Information Systems, Irvin McGraw Hill, 2009.
9. C.S.V.Murthy: Management Information System, Himalaya publishing House ,2009
218
10. Rainer, Turban, Potter, Introduction to Information Systems, WILEY-India, 2009.

11. Dharminder and Sangeetha, Management Information Systems, Excel books, 2009
12. Monk, Concepts in ERP, Cengage, 2009.
13. Ashim Raj Singla, Enterprise Resource Planning, Cengage, 2008.
14. Vinod Kumar Garg, et al., Enterprise Resource Planning, PHI, 2007.
219

0 0 4 2
SOFT SKILLS LAB

(Activity-based)
• To improve the fluency of students in English

• To facilitate learning through interaction
• To illustrate the role of skills in real-life situations with case studies, role plays etc.
• To train students in group dynamics, body language and various other activities which boost their
confidence levels and help in their overall personality development
• To encourage students develop behavioral skills and personal management skills
• To impart training for empowerment, thereby preparing students to become successful
professionals
INTRODUCTION
Definition and Introduction to Soft Skills – Hard Skills vs Soft Skills – Significance of Soft/Life/Self
Skills – Self and SWOT Analysis and
1. Exercises on Productivity Development

• Effective/ Assertive Communication Skills (Activity based)
• Time Management (Case Study)
• Creativity & Critical Thinking (Case Study)
• Decision Making and Problem Solving (Case Study)
• Stress Management (Case Study)
2. Exercises on Personality Development Skills

• Self-esteem (Case Study)
• Positive Thinking (Case Study)
• Emotional Intelligence (Case Study)
• Team building and Leadership Skills (Case Study)
• Conflict Management (Case Study)
3. Exercises on Presentation Skills

• Netiquette
• Importance of Oral Presentation – Defining Purpose- Analyzing the audience- Planning
outline and preparing the Presentation- Individual & Group Presentation- Graphical
Organizers- Tools and Multi-media Visuals
• One Minute Presentations (Warming up)
• PPT on Project work- Understanding the Nuances of Delivery- Body Language – Closing and
Handling Questions – Rubrics for Individual Evaluation (Practice Sessions)
4. Exercises on Professional Etiquette and Communication

• Role-Play and Simulation- Introducing oneself and others, Greetings, Apologies, Requests,
Agreement & Disagreement….etc.
• Telephone Etiquette
• Active Listening
• Group Discussions (Case study)- Group Discussion as a part of Selection Procedure-
Checklist of GDs
• Analysis of Selected Interviews (Objectives of Interview)
• Mock-Interviews (Practice Sessions)
• Job Application and Preparing Resume
• Process Writing (Technical Vocabulary) – Writing a Project Report- Assignments
220
5. Exercises on Ethics and Values

Introduction –– Types of Values - Personal, Social and Cultural Values - Importance of Values in
Various Contexts
• Significance of Modern and Professional Etiquette – Etiquette (Formal and Informal Situations
with Examples)
• Attitude, Good Manners and Work Culture (Live Examples)
• Social Skills - Dealing with the Challenged (Live Examples)
• Professional Responsibility – Adaptability (Live Examples)
• Corporate Expectations
Note:
• Hand-outs are to be prepared and given to students.
• Training plan will be integrated in the syllabus.
• Topics mentioned in the syllabus are activity-based.
SUGGESTED SOFTWARE:
The following software from ‘train2success.com’
o Preparing for being Interviewed,
o Positive Thinking,
o Interviewing Skills,
o Telephone Skills,
o Time Management
o Team Building,
o Decision making
SUGGESTED READING
1. Alex, K. 2012. Soft Skills. S. Chand Publishers

2. Management Shapers. 2011. Collection of 28 Books by different Authors. Universities Press.
3. Sherfield, Robert M. 2005. et al Cornerstone: Developing Soft Skills. Pearson
4. Suresh Kumar,E; Sreehari, P. & Savithri, J. 2011. Communication Skills and Soft Skills- An
Integrated Approach. New Delhi: Pearson
5. The ACE of Soft Skills by Gopalaswamy Ramesh & Mahadevan Ramesh. 2013. Pearson
Publishers. New Delhi.
6. Patnaik, P. 2011. Group Discussion and Interview Skills. New Delhi: Foundation
7. Sudhir Andrews. 2009. How to Succeed at Interviews. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill
8. Sasikumar, V & Dhamija, P.V. 1993. Spoken English - A Self-Learning Guide to Conversation
Practice. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill
9. Dixson, Richard J. Everyday Dialogues in English. Prentice Hall India Pvt Ltd
10. Mukhopadhyay. L et al. 2012. Polyskills. New Delhi: CUP India Pvt Ltd
11. Rizvi, M. A. 2005. Effective Technical Communication. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill
12. The Hindu Speaks on Education by the Hindu Newspaper
13. Naterop, B. Jean and Revell, Rod. 2004. Telephoning in English. Cambridge: CUP
221

4 0 0 4
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY & STATISTICAL ANALYSIS

PG CORE-III
Course Aim: To understand the basic statistical tools for interpretation of quantitative and qualitative
data.
Learning Outcome: Students will be able to apply the principles of research methodology for the
research design for the various mini and major projects of the MBA programme. They will be able to
analyse the data statistically.
1. Research Methodology: Introduction-Topic-Review of Literature-Research Gaps-Research

Questions-Objectives-Hypotheses-Scope of the study-Period of the study-Sampling Techniques-
Data Collection-Primary data –Questionnaire design-Secondary data-Data Analysis-Limitations of
the study-Appendix-References.
2. Tabulation, Graphical presentation of data: Histogram, Diagrammatic representation of data:

Bar diagram, Multiple Bar diagram, Sub-divided Bar Diagram, Pie Diagram, Measures of Central
Tendency: Mean, Median and Mode. Measures of Dispersion: Range, Standard deviation and
Variance, Coefficient of variation, Measure of Skewness.
3. Linear Correlation and Regression Analysis: Covariance, Pearson’s Correlation Coefficient,

Scatter plot, Spearman’s rank Correlation Coefficient, Regression lines.
4. Parametric and Non- Parametric Hypothesis Testing: Procedure for Testing of Hypothesis,
One Sample t-test for the Population Mean, Two Sample t-test for independent Samples, Paired
Sample t-test. F-test for two population Variances (Variance ratio test), ANOVA One Way
Classification, ANOVA two way Classification, Chi Square test of association, Chi Square test of
independence.
5. Time Series and Data Analysis: Fitting a trend line to a time series, Method of least Squares
and Method of Moving Averages, Measure of Seasonal Variation.
Textbook
1. Glyn Davis & Branko Pecar “Business Statistics Using Excel” Oxford University Press, 2012.
References:
1. P N Arora” Comprehensives Statistics Methods” S. Chand, 2012.
2. Sharma” Business Statistics” Pearson, 2012.
3. David Cooper, Business Research Methods, TMH, 9/e 2013.
4. Zikmund, Business Research Methods, Cengage, 2012.
5. S C Gupta, ”Fundamentals of Statistics”, HPH, 2012
6. C B Gupta “ An introduction to Statistical Methods” Vikas, 2012
7. S L Gupta ‘Business Research Methods” TMH, 2012.
8. Pannerselvam” Research Methodology” PHI, 2012.
9. Ranjit Kumar “Research Methodology” Sage, 2012.
10. R P Hooda “Statistics” Vikas, 2012
11. Newbold” Statistics for Business and Economics” Pearson, 2012.
12. Levin, Rubin, Rastogi & Siddiqui, “Statistics for Management” Pearson, 2013
13. Mukul Gupta & Deepa Gupta “Research Methodology” PHI, 2013.
14. Bhardwaj : Mathematics and Statistics for Business, Excel, 2013.
222

4 0 0 4
BUSINESS LAW AND REGULATION

PG CORE-IV
(Students must read textbook along with cases. Faculty are free to choose any other cases)
Course Aim: The aim of this course is to enable students understand legal and regulatory framework
for doing business in India.
Learning Outcome: After going through the text and case lets in terms of various court judgements,
the students should be able to understand the formalities involved in incorporating a company and the
nuances related to the Law of Contract. The student will also be able to know the implications of direct
and indirect taxes, negotiable instruments Act and also about the cyber laws.
1. Companies Act, 1956: Steps and procedure for incorporation of the company, Appointment of
Directors, Powers, duties, & liabilities of Directors, Company Meetings, Resolutions, Winding-up
of a Company.
2. Law of Contract: Nature of contract and essential elements of valid contract, Offer and
Acceptance, Consideration, Capacity to contract and free consent, Legality of object. Unlawful
and illegal agreements, Contingent contracts, Performance and discharge of contracts, Remedies
for breach of contract. Contracts-II: Indemnity and guarantee, Contract of Agency, Sale of goods
Act -1930: General Principles, Conditions & Warranties, Performance of Contract of Sale.
3. Direct and Indirect Tax: Income Tax Act -1961 - Important Provisions of Income Tax Act:
Assessment year –Assesee, Gross Total Income, Procedure for advance payment of tax and tax
deducted at source. Assessment procedure. Central Excise Act -1944: .Basic concepts related to
excisable goods, classification of goods, and Basic concept of VAT.
4. Negotiable Instruments Act - 1881: Negotiable Instruments- Promissory Note, Bills of Exchange,
& Cheque, and their definitions and characteristics, Types of endorsements, Holder- Holder in
due course, Discharge of Parties.
5. Cyber Crime and the Legal Landscape-the world-Why do we need cyber laws in tha indian
context-The indina IT act-challenges to indian Law and cyber crime scenarion in india. (Refer
Nina Godbole & Sunit Belapure)
Textbook:
1. RSN Pillai, Bagavathi, Business Law, S.Chand, 2013.
References
1. Akhileshwar Pathak: Legal Aspects of Business, TMH, 4/e, 2013.
2. Nina Godbole & Sunit Belapure “ Cyber Security” Wiley India 2012.
3. K.R. Bulchandani: Business Law for Management, 5/e, Himalaya Publishing House (HPH), 2012
4. Ravinder Kumar “Legal Aspects of Business”, 2nd Edition Cengage Learning, 2012.
5. Kuchal: Business Law, Vikas, 2011
6. Tulsian:Business Law, TMH, 2012.
7. S S Gulshan, Business Law, 4th edition, Excel Books, 2012
8. S.N. Maheshwari, S K Maheshwari, A Manual of Business Laws, Himalaya Publishing House
(HPH), 2013.
9. C L Bansal, Business and Corporate Laws, Excel Books, 2011.
10. Tejpal Sheth, Business Law, Pearson, 2012
11. P.K.Padhi, Legal Aspects of Business, PHI, 2013
223

4 0 0 4
INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUCATION

PG Elective-II (Marketing)
Aim: The aim of this course is to a) enable students to understand management of marketing
communication, marketing mix and ethical aspects of marketing communication b) choose a
marketing communications mix to achieve the communications and behavioral objectives of the IMC
campaign plan.
Learning outcome
The student should be able to design innovative integrated marketing communication
strategies for a given product or service using social media
Students will able to create an integrated marketing communications plan to promote IMC
strategies and to measure their effectiveness.
1. Understanding Integrated Marketing Communication: Understanding Marketing

Communication, Integrated Marketing Communication, Integrated Marketing Communication as
an Integral part of Marketing, Understanding Consumer Behaviour, Understanding the
Communication process, Communication Mix.
Case : Cadbury Manages a Crisis with Integrated Marketing Communications (Kruti Shah page
no 59)
2. Budgeting, Objectives and Evaluation of IMC: Setting Communication Objectives, DAGMAR

Approach to setting objectives and measuring advertising effectiveness, allocating the Marketing
Communication Budget, Conducting research to measure communication effectiveness, Post-
Testing tools and techniques, Evaluating other promotional tools and IMC.
Case : The Premium Milk Food Private Ltd. (Kruti Shah page no 820)
Case : Archias, Advertizing (Jaishri Jethwaney, Shruthi Jain, Oxford, page no 195)
3. Marketing Communication Mix I:

Creative Execution in Advertising, Decision in Print, Execution on Radio, Execution on online and
television, getting that ‘Big Idea’ of creativity.
Case : Tata Salt (Part I,II,III) (Kruti Shah page no 282,284,310-311,367-372)
4. Marketing Communication Mix II:

Sales Promotion, Direct Marketing, Personal Public Relations, Publicity and Corporate
Advertising, Unconventional Promotional Media: Sponsorships, Mobile Advertising, Word Of
Mouth, Village Farmers, Out of Home Media, World Wide Web Communications.
Case : Amul taste of India (Kruti Shah page no 793)
Case : Rasha Prankees promotion (Kruti Shah page no 600)
5. Regulation, Social and Ethical Aspects of Advertising and Promotion:-

Federal Regulation of Advertising, regulations of Advertising and Promotion in India, regulation of
other Promotional Areas, Social and Ethical Criticisms of Advertising, ethical aspects of
Advertising – Truth in Advertising, Advertising to children, Advertising controversial products,
Social Aspects of Advertising.
Case : Surrogate advertising(Jai shri Jethwaney page no 475-480)
Case : The Unilever experience (Jai shri Jethwaney page no 606)
Textbook:
• Krutishah, Alan D’Souza, Advertising and promotions on IMC Perspective, TMH, 2012.
224

Businesss Game : AdSim Advertising: (Advertising & Promotion Simulation Game), TMH,
2013. You can play on any computer with internet (Rs.150/- per year-better buy and play).
AdSim is a simulation game for the Advertising & Promotion course, where the students are
required to formulate and implement their own Advertising and Promotion campaign. This helps the
students to have an hands – on business experience in the classroom – experiential learning at its
best.
References:
1. Jaishri Jethwaney, Shruthi Jain, Advertising Management, Oxford, Second edition, 2012.
2. George E Belch, Michael A Belch , Keyoor puravi , Advertising and Promotions – An Integrated
Marketing Communications perspective , TMH, 2013.
3. Semenile , Allen, O Guinn , Kaufmann, Advetising and Promotions, An Integrated brand
approach, Cengage, 6th edition , 2012.
225

4 0 0 4
MANAGEMENT OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

PG Elective – II (HR)
Course objectives:
1. The aim of the course is to enable HR elective students develop awareness towards labour laws.
2. The students will be introduced, how to deal with legal problems emanating from employer and
employee relations in organizations.
3. To introduce the students with the concept of collective bargaining, employee welfare, wage
policy act.
Learning Outcomes:
1. The student understands the industrial relations, its importance in HR
2. Various Labour Laws like Factories Act, Wage and Bonus Act and Dispute Preventive and
Corrective Mechanisms are learnt.
3. They will also understand the role of Trade Unions, Settlement of disputes, Collective Bargaining,
Wage Policy.
1. Industrial Relations: Introduction, Dunlop’s Industrial Relations Systems, Characteristics of Indian

IR System; Trade Unions: Union Purpose. Trade Union , Functions, Methods, Politics, Types of
Unions, Trade Unions in India: Union Structure and characteristics. Recognition of Unions:
States provisions for Recognition. Rights of recognized Unions, Unfair Labour Practices:
Case 1. Let us get back to work (p.no. 720, C.B.Mamoria)
Case 2. A case of complicated multi-union manoeuvres (J.A. Kulkarni)
2. Settlement of Disputes: Role of state Dispute Settlement Machinery and its instruments,
Legislation: Causes of disputes, Right to Strike, Major Strikers, Tripartite and Bipartite Bodies,
Standing orders and Grievance Procedure.
Case 1. Stop the shouting game please (p.no. 760, C.B.Mamoria)
Case 2. The dish ends ltd. (p.no.07, J.A. Kulkarni)
3. Collective Bargaining, Conciliation, Arbitration, Adjudication, The Industrial Dispute Act 1947,
Labour Welfare work, Labour Welfare officer, Worker’s Participation.
Case 1.who is to be blammed (p.no. 685, C.B.Mamoria)
4. Wage Policy and Wage Regulation Machinery, Wage Legislation, Payment of Wages Act 1936,
The Payment of Bonus Act,1965
Case 1. Rules and regulations still guide actions at UPS (p.no. 37, C.B.Mamoria)
5. The Factories Act 1948, Mines Act 1952, Industrial Relations and Technological Change.
Case 1. Organizations and unions working as partners (p.no. 738, C.B.Mamoria)
Textbook:
• Mamoria, Mamoria, Gankar “Dynamics of Industrial Relations” Himalaya Publishing
House.2012.
Cases:
1. C.B.Mamoria, VSP Rao “personnel management- text & cases”, Himalaya Publishers
th
13 edition, 2012.
2. J.A.Kulkarni, Asha Pachpande, Sandeep Pachpande, “case studies in amangement”,
pearson, 2011.
226
References:
1. Dr K S Anandram “Cases in Personnel Management Industrial Relations and Trade Relations”
Everest, 2012.
2. Arun Monappa,Ranjeet Nambudiri,Selvaraj “ Industrial Relations and Labour Laws” , TMH,2012
3. A.M.Sharma “Industrial Relations and Labour Laws”, Himalaya Publishing House,2013.
4. Ratna Sen “Industrial Relations-Text and cases “Macmillan Publishers,2011.
5. Kubendran.V,Kodeeswari.K “Industrial Relations and Labour Laws “Himalaya Publishing
House,2011.
6. Punekar S.D,Deodhar S.B, Saras wathi Sankaren”Labour Welfare,Trade Unionism and Industrial
Relations, “Himalaya Publishing House,2012.
7. B.D.Singh “Industrial Relations”Excel Books 2008.
8. S C Srivastava “Industrial Relations and Labor Laws” Vikas, 2012.
9. Padhi “ Labour and Industrial Relations” PHI, 2012.
10. Venkata Ratnam “Industrial Relations” Oxford, 2012.
227

4 0 0 4
SECURITY ANALYSIS PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

PG Elective-II (Finance)
Course Aim: To Understand the investment alternatives, process and portfolio management
Learning Outcome: The objective of this course is to provide the conceptual and Practical
understanding of Stock markets Equity & Bond Valuation , Cash market and also Mutual funds.
1. a) Investment Environment in India, overview of Indian financial system securities trading in stock
markets, investment alternatives, the investment management process.
b) Security Analysis: Fundamental Analysis, Technical Analysis, EMH (Efficient Market
Hypothesis)
2. Portfolio Analysis: The returns and risks from investing- Markowitz portfolio Theory, Mean-
variance approach, portfolio selection-efficient portfolios, The single index model-capital asset
pricing model, arbitrage pricing theory.
3. Bond Analysis & Valuation & management: Types of bonds, Interest rates, Term Structure of
interest rates, measuring bond yields, Yield to Maturity, Yield to Call, Yield to Maturity, Holding
Period Return, Bond pricing theorems, bond duration, Active and Passive bond management
Strategies, bond immunization, bond volatility, bond convexity.
4. (a) Equity Valuation : Equity Analysis & Valuation, Balance sheet Analysis equity valuation
models, intrinsic value & market price, The P/E Ratio & Earnings multiplier Approach, CAGR,
Price/Book value, Price/ Sales ratio, Economic Value Added (EVA) and MVA.
(b) Derivatives: Overview of derivatives Markets, Option Markets, Option Strategies and option
valuation forward & future markets, Strategies. Stock index futures, interest rate futures, Swaps
contracts.
5. Mutual Funds: Types of Mutual Funds Schemes, Structure, NAV(Net Asset Value),Risk and
Return, Performance Evaluation Models- Sharpe Model, Trey nor Model, Jensen Model, Fama’s
Decomposition. Trends in Indian Mutual Funds.
Textbooks:
1. William. F.Sharpe, Gordon j Alexander & Jeffery V Bailey: Fundamentals of
Investments, Prentice Hall,2012.
Journals : Vikalpa, IIMA, IIMB Review, Decision, IIMC, Vision, MDI.
Business Game : Stock-Trak: (Finance Simulation Game), TMH, 2013- You can play on any
computer with internet (Rs.150/- per year-better buy and play).
Stock-Trak is the most comprehensive, Online investment simulation game for Finance students to
trade on Stocks, bonds, mutual funds, options, futures, spots, future options and international stocks
with virtual money. This game is created specifically for classroom use and students can play this
game 24*7 to give them hands-on experience on Investments.
References:
th
1. Reilly, Brown: Analysis of Investment and Management of Portfolios, 10 Edition, Cengage,
2012.
2. ZVI Bodie, AlexKane, Alan J Marcus : Investments, TMH, 2012.
th
3. Donald E Fischer, Ronald J Jordan: Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, 6 Edition,
Pearson, 2012.
4. Prasanna Chandra: Investment analysis and Portfolio Management” 4th Edition, TMH, 2012.
228
5. Punithavathi Pandian : Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, Vikas. 2012.

6. Jones: Invest Analysis and Management, Wiley.
nd
7. M. Ranganatham, R. Madhumathi: Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, 2 Edition ,
Pearson, 2012.
8. Edwin J Elton, Martin J Gruber, Stephen J Brown, William N.Goef Z Mann : Modern Portfolio
9. Theory and Investment Analysis. 2013.
229

4 0 0 4
ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING

PG Elective – II (SYSTEMS)
Course Objectives
1. To provide students the foundations of ERP planning and system options
2. To provide framework of general and specialized modules of ERP
3. To provide students a risk-benefit analysis of ERP system
Learning Outcomes
1. Students understand a) integration of various ERP modules with each other and with Business
Environment b) the issues in operation and implementation of a successful ERP system and c)
how to face the challenges associated with the present and future ERP systems..
1. Introduciton to ERP- Foundation for Understanding ERP systems-Buisiness benefits of ERP-The

challenges of impelmenting ERP system-ERP modules and Historical Developement.
Case: Response top RFP for ban ERP system (Mary Sumner).
2. ERP system options & Selection methods-Measurement of project Inpact- information Technology
Selection-ERP proposal evaluvation-Project Evaluvation Technique.(David L.olson).
Case: Atlantic Manufacturing (Mary Sumner).
3 ERP system Installation Options- IS/IT Management results-Risk Identificatioon analysis-System

Projects- Demonstation of the system-Failure method-system Architecture & ERP (David L.Olson)
Case: DataSolutiions & Technology Knowledge (Mary Sumner).
4 ERP - sales and Marketing- Managment control process in sales and markring-ERP custoemr
relatonship managment-ERP systems- Accounting & Fiance control processes. Fiancial modules
in ERP systems.
Case: atalantic manufacturing (Mary Sumner).
5 ERP – Produciton and Material Managment-Control process on produciton and manuifacturing-

Produciton module in ERP- supply chain Managmeent & e-market place-e-businesss & ERP-e
supply chian & ERP- Future directions for ERP.
Case: HR in atalntic manufacturing. (Mary Sumner).
Textbook:
1. Mary Sumner “ Enterprice Resource Planning” Pearson, 2012.
Referencs:
1. David L.Olson “ Managerial Issues in ERP systems” TMH 2012.
2. Ellen Monk “Enterprice Resource Planning” Cengage, 2012.
3. Alexis Leon “Enterprice Resource Planning” 2e, TMH ,2012
4. Goyal “Enterprice Resource Planning” TMH, 2012
5. Jagan Nathan Vaman “ERP Srategies for Steering Orgnizationsal competence and competetive
Advantage” TMH, 2012.
230

0 0 4 2
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS LAB USING SPSS / EXCEL
Course aim: The course aims is to understand MS Excel for applying statistical tools learnt in RMSA.
Learning Outcome: The learning outcome is that the students should be able to:
Analyse the data to draw inference for decision making.
Understand application of statistical measures of central tendency.
Understand application of ANOVA.
Analyse trends.
Test hypotheses.
Syllabus - PART A
About EXCEL
1. Introduction, Uses of Excel, New functions and features of excel 2007.
2. Getting started with excel: Opening a blank or new workbook, general organization.
3. Highlights and main functions: Home, Insert, page layout, formulas.
4. Highlights and main functions: Data, review, view, add-inns.
5. Using the Excel help function.
General EXCEL Lessons
6. Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar.
7. Creating and Using Templates.
8. Working with Data: Entering, Editing, Copy, Cut, Paste, Paste Special.
9. Formatting Data and Using the Right Mouse Click.
10. Saving, Page Setup, and Printing.
11. Using Headers and Footers.
12. Manipulating Data, using Data Names and Ranges, Filters and Sort and Validation Lists.
13. Data from External Sources.
14. Using and Formatting Tables.
15. Basic Formulas and Use of Functions.
16. Data Analysis Using Charts and Graphs.
17. Managing, Inserting, and Copying Worksheets.
18. Securing the Excel Document (Protect Cells and Workbook).
ADVANCED EXCEL LESSONS
19. Advanced Formulas and Functions.
20. Advanced Worksheet Features.
21. Advanced Data Analysis using PivotTables and Pivot Charts.
PART B – STATISTICAL TOOLS FOR EXECUTION USING EXCEL

I. Tabulation, bar diagram, Multiple Bar diagram, Pie diagram, Measure of central tendency:
mean, median, mode, Measure of dispersion: variance, standard deviation, Coefficient of
variation.
II. Correlation, regression lines.
III. t- test, F-test, ANOVA one way classification, chi square test, independence of attributes.
IV. Time series: forecasting Method of least squares, moving average method.
V. Inference and discussion of results.
Text
1. Glyn Davis & Branko Pecar “Business Statistics Using Excel” Oxford University Press, 2012.
References:
1. David Whigham “Business Data Analysis Using Excel’’ Oxford University Press, 2012.
2. Winstion “Excel 2010 Data Analysis and Business Modelling” PHI Learning Private Limited.
3. Bajpai “Business Statistics” Pearson, 2013.
4. D P Apte : Statistical Tools for Managers USING MS EXCEL, Excel, 2012.
5. Bruce Bowerman, Business Statistics in Practice, TMH, 5/e 2012.
6. Shelly, MS Office, 2007, Cengage, 2009.
7. Robert H Carver, Doing Data Analysis with SPSS, Cengage, 2013
231
IDP (B.Tech. ECE & M.Tech. / MBA) V Year I-Sem L T P C

4 0 0 4
STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
PG CORE-V
Course Aim:
The aim of this subject is to enable the students develop a holistic perspective about
Strategic management of an organization
Learning Outcome:
By reading the text and discussing the cases students should be able to understand how to scan
internal and external environment of an organization, understand different types of strategies and
structures, strategies of the competitors, turnaround strategies, global strategies and strategic control.
With that knowledge they would be able to formulate strategies, change strategies if necessary and
implement strategies. They will also be able to evaluate strategies and take corrective steps.
Unit-I:
Strategic Inputs: Introduction to Strategic Management-Strategic Management and Competitiveness-
Technology and Technology change-Vision, Mission and Objectives-Strategic Leaders-Strategic
Management process-The External Environment: Opportunities, Threats, Competition and Competitor
Analysis. External Environmental Analysis, Segments of the External Environment, Porters 5 Force
Model, The internal Environment: Resource, Capabilities, Competencies and Competitive
advantages. Analyzing internal organization - Building Core Competencies - Value Chain Analysis,
Outsourcing.
Case:Bharti Airtel (Hitt & Irelandpage no 4).
Case: ITC Limited (Hitt & Irelandpage no 30).
Unit-II: Formulation of Strategic Actions: Business level strategy-Effectively managing relationships

with Customers-the purpose of Business strategy. Competitive Rivalry and Dynamics - A Model of
Competitive Rivalry-Competitor Analysis-Drivers of Competitive actions and responses-Competitive
rivalry and dynamics.
Case:Bajaj Auto limited (Hitt & IrelandPage no 80).
Case: Coca cola Vs Pepsi in India (Hitt & Irelandpage. no108)
Unit-III: Corporate level Strategy-Levels of Diversifications and reasons-Value creating

diversifications. Strategic Acquisitions & Restructuring - Popularity of Mergers & Acquisitions
strategies, problems in achieving Acquisition Success-Restructuring.
Case: Foster’s Group Diversification into the Wine Business (Hitt & IrelandPage 150)
Case: Merger and Acquisition Activity during a Global Crisis: Global and in India (Hitt & Ireland page
154) Focus : Troubles in the Godrej –P & G Alliance(Hitt & Irelandpage. no 223)
Unit-IV: Global Strategy-Identifying International Opportunities and international Strategies-Strategic

competitive Outcomes and risk in an international Environment. Corporate Implications for strategy-
Strategic Alliances-corporate level cooperative strategy, Competitive risk with Cooperative strategies.
Case: Entry into India & China by Foreign Firms and Indian/Chinese Firms Reaching for Global
markets (Hitt & Irelandpage. no 176).
Case: Using Cooperative Strategies at IBM (Hitt & Ireland page 206)
Unit-V: Structure and Controls with Organizations-Organizational Structure and controls, Evolutionary
Patterns of strategy and organizational structure. Leadership Implications for Strategy -
Entrepreneurial Implications for Strategy. Fundamental principles of Ethics, Professional Ethics,
Ethics of Finance & Accounting professionals, Cyber crimes, Ethics & Human rights
Case 1 CISCO’s Evolution of Strategy and Structure. (Hitt & Irelandpage. no 256)
Case 2 selecting a new CEO (Hitt & Irelandpage no 282)
Case 3 The Continuing innovation revolution at Amazon: The kindle and E-books(Hitt & Ireland page
304)
232
REFERENCES:
• Hitt & Ireland and Manikutty,” Strategic Management: A South Asian Perspective”: Cengage
Learning, 9e, 2012
• Mital; Cases in Strategic Management; 3rdEdition, TMH, 2015.
• Mason A Carpenter et al.”Strategic Management: A dynamic Perspective”Pearson,2e, 2012.
• A Nag” Strategic Management:Analysis, Implementation & Control “Vikas Publishing house, 2012.
• Adrian & Alison” Strategic Management: Theory & Application” Oxford UniversityPress, 2010.
• C.L.Bansal, Business and Corporate Laws, 1/e, Excel Books, 2006
233

4 0 0 4
RETAILING MANGEMENT
PG Elective-III (Marketing)
Course Aim: The main aim of this course is a) to enable students to gain an insight into retailing
industry and shopping environment. b) to familiarize them with concepts of Retailing through cases
and motivate them to go for a career in retailing industry.
Learning outcome:
a. To enable the students to link Modern Retailing Concepts to cases and understand the present
Retailing Trends.
b. To facilitate the students to be able to managing retail operations efficiently and effectively.
1. Introduction to Retail Management - Meaning of Retail & Retailing, History, types, functions,
utilities, theories of retailing, e-tailing, structure of Indian retail industry, retailing in Asia, global
retailing, retailing in Europe, service retailing, FDI retailing, Rural marketing, ethics in retailing.
Case: The Classic story.(Aditya page no 283)
Case: The Panwallah. (Aditya Prakash page no 287)
2. Understanding Shoppers & Shopping - Shopping Environment, shopping in a Socio Cultural

Contest, shopping process shopping behaviour, demographics of Indian shoppers, psychographic
profile of Indian shoppers, lifestyle of Indian shoppers, shopping patterns in India.
Case: Multinational Fast Food Chains in India. Retail Management (Suja Nair page no 474)
Case: Changing Indian Consumers. (Aditya page no 258)
Case: Tanishq. (Suja Nair page no 440)
3. Delivering Value though Retail Functions - Classification of formats, ownership-based, store

based, non-store based, other retail formats, Value Based Model of store format choice, attribute
based model of store format choice, the competitive market place, Marketing Structure, the
demand side of retailing, non price decisions, types of competition, evolution of retail competition,
future changes in retail competition.
Case: Nirula’s. (Suja Nair Page no 448)
Case: Hot Breads. (Suja Nair page no 452)
Case: McDonalds India. (Suja Nair page no 459)
Case: Automobile and Niche Marketing ( Dr. Harjit Singh page no 417)
4. Pricing & Supply Chain Management - Pricing Objectives & Policies, Interactive Pricing
Decisions, different Pricing Strategies, Price Adjustment Strategies. SCM- introduction, derivers of
SCM, SCM & competitive advantages, types of supply chain-supply chain length, width, control of
supply chain, framework of Supply Chain Management-SCM network structure, Supply Chain
Business Process, SCM components, Retail Inventory Management, Retail Logistics
Management, EDI in SCM.
Case: Café Coffee Day. (Suja Nair page no 434)
Case: Shoppers stop. (Suja Nair page no 470)
5. Retail Buying & Managing Retail Operations-objectives of buying, organization buying, retailing
buying behaviour, models of buying behaviour, buyer-responsibilities, merchandising &
assortment plans-merchandise plan, merchandise plan for basic stocks retail buying groups,
negotiations in retail, contract in retail, store layout & design, merchandise display-fixtures,
positioning of merchandise, materials & finishes – floors, interior walls, ceilings, lightings, music,
graphics-exterior signage, interior signage, layouts for e-tailers.
Case: Godrej and Boyee’s. (Suja Nair page no 466)
234
Textbook
• Piyush Kumar Sinha, Dwarika Prasad Uniyal, Managing Retailing, 2nd Edition, Oxford, 2012.
Journals : Vikalpa, IIMA, IIMB Review, Decision, IIMC, Vision, MDI, MICA Communications
Review – A Marketing Communications Journal, Mudra Institute of Communications,
Ahmedabad.
References:
1. Lusch, Dunne, Carver, Introduction to Retailing, 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2013.
2. Suja Nair, Retail Management, Himalaya Publication House, 2012.
3. Aditya Prakash Tripathi, Noopur Agrawal, Fundamentals of Retailing (text and cases), Himalaya
Publication House, First Edition, 2009.
4. Swapna Pradhan, Retail Management-Text & Cases, TMH, 2013.
5. Dr. Harjit Singh, Retail Management a global perspective text and cases, S.Chand, 2011.
6. Michael levy, Barton Weits, Ajay Pundit, Retailing Management, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
7. Arif sheikh, Kaneez Fatima, Retail Management, Himalaya Publication House-2012.
8. Chetan Bajaj, Rajnish tuli, Nidhi Varma ,Srivastava, Retail Management, 2nd edition, oxford, 2012.
9. David Gilbert, Retail Marketing Management, 2nd edtion, Pearson, 2013
235

4 0 0 4
SERVICES MARKETING
PG Elective-IV (Marketing)
Course Aim:
To facilitate the students about the concepts of Services Marketing through cases.
Learning Objective: The objective of the course is to provide a deeper insight into the Marketing
Management of companies offering Services as product. The students will be able to understand the
characteristics of services, understand consumer behaviour in services, align service design and
standards, delivering service, managing services promises.
1. Foundations of Service Marketing: What are Services? Why Services Marketing? Role of
Services in Modern Economy, Service and Technology, characteristics of services compared to
goods, Services Marketing Mix, staying focusing on customer, Gaps model of Service Quality-
Customer Gap, Provider Gap, Closing Gap.
Case 1: The United Indian Bank (Govind Apte Page no 55-56)
Case 2: Online air travel: Expedia, Orbitz and Travelocity lead the pack ( John E.G.Bateson Page
no 82-83)
2. Focus on the Consumer: Consumer behaviour in services, Consumer expectations in service,

consumer perceptions of service, Understanding Consumer Requirements-listening to customers
through research, building customer relationships, service recovery.
Case1: The Crestwood Inn, (John E.G.Bateson Page no 320-321)
Case 2: Population growth and the urban poor (Vinnie Jauhari, Kirti Dutta Page no 106-108)
3. Aligning Service Design and Standards: Service innovation and design-challenges, types of
service innovations, stages in service innovation and development, service blueprinting, high
performance service innovations, new Service Development Processes, Customer defined
service standards-factors, types, and development, Physical Evidence and the Services cape.
Case 1: Physical evidence a case of KF. (Vinnie Jauhari Page 236-238).
Case 2: IT Trainers Limited. (Govind Apte Page no 186).
4. Delivering and Performing Service: Employee’s roles in service delivery, customer’s roles in
service delivery, delivering service through intermediaries and electronic channels, managing
demand and capacity.
Case 1: Relationship between Employee satisfaction, Customer satisfaction and market share:
The case of Hewlett-Packard, (Vinnie Jauhari Page 336).
Case 2: Total Assurance Ltd. (Govind Apte Page 207-208).
5. Managing Service Promises: Integrated services marketing communications-need for

coordination, five categories of strategies to match service promises with delivery, Pricing of
Services-three key ways that service prices are different for customers, approaches to pricing
services, pricing strategies that link to the four value definitions.
Case 1: Why Differential Pricing helps the poor? (Vinnie Jauhari et al Page 336).
Textbook
1. Valarie A.Zeithaml & Mary Jo-Bitner: Services Marketing – Integrating customer focus
across the firm, TMH, Fifth edition, 2011.

236
References
1. John E.G.Bateson, K.Douglas Hoffman : Services Marketing, Cengage Learning, Fourth Edition,
2012.
2. Harsh V.Varma: Services Marketing text and cases, Pearson, Second edition, 2012.
3. Ravi Shanker : Services Marketing - The Indian Prespective, Excel Books, 2011.
4. Vinnie Jauhari, Kirti Dutta: Services- Marketing, Operations and Management, Oxford University
Press,2012.
5. Govind Apte : Services Marketing, Oxford Press, 2011.
th
6. Christoper lovelock,Jochen wirtz, Jayanta Chatterjee, Services Marketing, 7 edition Pearson
2013.
7. K.Rama Mohan Rao, Services Marketing, 2nd edition Pearson, 2011.
8. Dr. S. Shajahan, Services Marketing, 2nd edition, HPH, 2012.
9. Ramneek Kapoor, Justin Paul, Biplab Halder, Services Marketing Concepts and Practices, TMH,
2011.
10. Rajendra Nargundkar, Services Marketing, , 3rd edition, TMH,2012.
11. R. Srinivasan, Services Marketing the Indian context, 3rd edition, PHI,2012.
12. Dr. B. Balaji, Services Marketing and Management, S.Chand, 2012.
13. Steve Baron, Kim Harris and Toni Hilton, Services Marketing text and cases, Macmillan, 2009.
14. Nimit Chowdhary, Monika Chowdhary, textbook of Marketing of Service the Indian Experience,
Macmillian, 2013.
237

4 0 0 4
INTERNATIONAL MARKETING
PG Elective-V (Marketing)
Course Aim: To enable the student understand the Global Markets, formulate of Global Marketing
Strategies and Implement.
Learning Objective: The objective of the course is to provide a deeper insight into the global
marketing management, environment of global markets, assessing global market opportunities,
developing and implementing global marketing strategies.
1. Introduction to International Marketing: Definition, Scope, Features, Difference between

Domestic and International Marketing, Why International? International Marketing Theories,
Types of Economics & Markets.
Case: 1 Starbucks –going Global fast. (Philip, John, Prashant Text )
2. Environment of Global Markets: Types: Political, Economical, Social, Legal and Technological
Environments, EXIM Policy, International Trade and its barriers trade in Goods & Services.
Case: 1 IKEA Catalogue. (Svend & Madhurima -Pearson page no 242)
Case: 2 Mc. Donalds and obesity. (Philip John Prashant Text )
3. Assessing Global Market Opportunities: Global vision through Market Research: Market
Selection, Role of Culture, Government Policies of Target Markets, SWOT Analysis of Target
Markets, International Trade Agreements, World Market Stages.
Case:1 Reliance Entertainment(Svend & Madhurima, Pearson page no 312)
Case:2 Mahindra & Mahindra (Svend & Madhurima,Pearson page no 356)
Case:3. IMAX corporation (Svend & Madhurima, Pearson page no 412)
4. Developing Global Market strategies: Segmentation product & services decisions for
consumers and Business: Marketing channels and Distribution, Promotion Strategies, Pricing
strategies.
Case:1 Harley-Davidson:-Price level (Svend & Madhurima,pearson page no 510)
Case:2 Mc Donalds Great Britain –the Turnaround (Text page no 793)
5. Implementing Global marketing strategies: Negotiation with customers and selection method,
E-Marketing channels organization & controlling of the global marketing programme.
Case: 1 NTT DOCOMO (Svend & Madhurima,Pearson page no 709)
Textbook
• Philip R. Cateora, John L graham, Prashant Salwan, International Marketing -13th edition –
TMH-2011.
References
1. Svend Hollensen, Madhumita Benerjee-Global Marketing-4th Edition- Pearson-2010.
nd
2. Rajagopal –International Marketing-2 Edition –Vikas -2011
th
3. P.K.Vasudeva, International Marketing-4 edition-Excel Books-2012
4. Dr.Gajender Sharma- International Marketing-1st edition-Excel Books-2010
5. Justin Paul, International Marketing – Text and Cases, TMH, 2013.
rd
6. Kiefer Lee, Steve Carter-Global Marketing Management-3 edition-Oxford-2011.
th
7. Warner J.Keogan, Naval K.Bghargava-Global Management-7 Edition-Person-2011
th
8. Francis Cherunilam- International Marketing-12 Edition-HPH-2012.
9. Rathor, Jani,Rathor- International Marketing-4th edition- HPH-2011
238

4 0 0 4
COMPENSATION & REWARD MANAGEMENT

PG Elective – III (HR)
Course Aim:
It enables the student understand the concepts issues and challenges of compensation and reward
management.
Learning Outcome:
The student understands how to design the compensation for various levels of jobs in the
organization, designing the compensation for special groups. Government and legal issues in
compensation design.
1. The Pay Model Strategy: The Totality of Decisions, Defining Internal Alignment, Job Analysis,
Evaluating Work, Job Evaluation, person-based Structures.
Case: So you want to lead an orchestra (George T Milkovich page no 72)
Case: Job Evaluation at whole foods (George T Milkovich page no 125)
2. Defining Competitiveness, Designing pay levels, Mix and pay structures, pay for performance.
The Evidence pay for performance plans.
Case: Burger Boy(George T Milkovich page no 249)
Case: Incentives in the club House(George T Milkovich page no 279)
3. Performance Appraisals, Benefits Determination Process, statutory Benefits including Health

care, Employee welfare and Retirement Benefits.
Case: Merit pay: Making policies and practices that work (George T Milkovich page no 319)
4. Compensation of Special Groups, Union role in wage and Salary administration. International pay
systems.
Case: Compensation of special groups (George T Milkovich page no 443)
Case: Coke and IBM(George T Milkovich page no 491)
5. Government and legal issues in compensation Public sector pay Management: Making it work.
Case: Communicating by copier(George T Milkovich page no 575)
Textbook:
• George T Milkovich, Jerry M Newman, C S Venkata Ratnam” TMH,2013.
References:
1. B D Singh “Compensation and Reward Management” Excel books,2012
2. Joseph J.Martocchio “Strategic Compensation” Pearson, 2012.
3. Kanchan Bhatia “Compensation Management” Himalaya, 2012.
4. Henderson “Compensation Management in a Knowledge Based World” 3e, Pearson, 2012.
5. Luis R.FGomez- Mejia “Compensation and Organizational Performance” Yesdee Publishing,
2012.
6. Michale Armstrong” Employee Reward” University Press, 2012.
7. Barry Gerhart, “Compensation” Sage, 20
239

4 0 0 4
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
PG Elective – IV (HR)
Course Aim:
The course enables the student to understand the concept change management. This will help them
to emerge as leaders in the organizations.
Learning Outcome:
The student understands the need to bring change, how to design change in the organizations, role
of leadership in change management, change communication and resistance to change and the role
of HR in change management.
1. Managing Change Conundrums, Organizational change classifications, History and

organizational change. The role of paradigms and perspectives. External and Internal change
contexts.
Case: Changing times at Factory Bank (Mark Hughes page no 70)
2. Organizational design and change, strategic level change, Group and team level change, and
Individual level change. Organizational Structure. Organizational Culture and Management of
Change.
Case: Restructuring at Flexco (Adrian page no 57)
Case: Cultural change at Dupont Nylone (Adrian page no 65)
3. The leadership of Change, Change communication, resistance to change, Organizational
learning, power, politics and Organizational change. Ethics and Managing Change, Change
Agents and Agency.
Case: Funding crisis at Musicians in the community (Mark Hughes page no 221)
4. HR and Managing Change: Recruitment & Selection & The Management of Change,
Performance Management &Management of Change, Reward Managements & The Management
of Change, Technological Change.
Case: Recruitment and Selection at Unicol (Adrian page no 117)
Case: Reward Management at Midland Main Line - Strategic Reward Management (Adrian
page no 191).
5. Employee Relations, Involvement Strategies, Management of Change, Downsizing and the
Management of Change, Evaluating and Promoting change.
Case: Downsizing at Energy Co (Adrian page no 268)
Case: Evaluating a possible change to training methods at telesales Incorporated (Adrian page
no 300)
Textbook:
• Mark Hughes, “ Managing Change – a critical perspective”, Universities Press, 2011.
References:
1. Adrian Thornhill,Phil Lewis,Mike Millmore. Mark N K Saunders “Managing change”,
Pearson,2011.
2. John Hayes “ The Theory and Practice of Change Management”, Palgrave,2012.
3. Robert A Paton “Change Management” 3e , Sage Publications ,2012.
4. Palmer Dunford ‘Managing Organizational Change” TMH,2012.
5. Radha R Sharma “Change Management and Organizational Transformation” Mc Grawhill, 2012.
6. Dipak Kumar “ Organizational Change and Development” Oxford,2012.
7. Niloanjan Sengupta “ Managing Change in Organizations” PHI ,2012.
8. Nic Beech “ Managing Change” Cambridge Press” 2012
240

4 0 0 4
PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
PG Elective - V (HR)
Course Aim:
To give an understanding about performance management and reward system linked with
performance.
Learning Outcome:
The students can understand the importance of performance Management, Performance Appraisals,
Reward System, and other performance related concepts.
1. Performance Management and reward systems in context, Performance Management process,

Performance Management strategic planning.
Case: Performance Management at Network Solutions,Inc (Herman Aguinis page no 26)
Case: Performance Management at the University of Ghana (Herman Aguinis page no 48)
2. Defining performance and choosing a Measurement Approach, Measuring Results and

Behaviours. Gathering performance Information, Implementing a performance Management
System.
Case: Accountabilities, Objectives and Standards (Herman Aguinis page no 113)
Case: Evaluating the appraisal form used by a Grocery Retailer ((Herman Aguinis page no 145)
3. Performance Management and employee development, Performance Management skills.

Case: Implementation of 360 degree feed back system at Ridge intellectual (Herman Aguinis
page no 204)
Case: Was Robert Eaton A Good Coach (Herman Aguinis page no 233)
4. Reward Systems and legal issues, Managing Team performance.

Case: Possible Illegal Discrimination at Tractors,Inc. (Herman Aguinis page no 265)
Case: Team Performance Management at Duke University Health systems. (Herman Aguinis
page no 283)
5. Relevant Performance related concepts: Bench marking, Six Sigma, Competency Mapping,
Balance Score card, Coaching and Mentoring Pygmalion effect, Job Analysis.
Case: BHEL,EVA Incentive Schemes: (B D Singh page no 589)
Case: The TCS Approach and experience(B D Singh page no 601)
Case: NTPC Performance Management System(B D Singh page no 632)
Case: Performance Management system(PMS) at Bharti Telecom(B D Singh page no 663)
Textbook.
1. Ram Kumar Balyan, Vikramender Singh & Suman “Performance management text and
cases”, Himalaya Publications, 2011.
Reference
1. Herman Aguinis, “ Performance Management” Pearson, 2012.
2. Anjali Ghanekar’ Essentials of Performance Management’ Everest Publishing House, 2010
3. Lance A Berger & Dorothy R Berger “ The Talent Management Hand Book” 2nd edition TMH,
2013.
4. B D Singh, “ Performance Management System- a holistic approach” excel Books,2010
5. Prem Chadha “Performance management” Macmillan, 2012.
6. Srinivas K Kandula “Performance Management” PHI, 2010.
7. R K Sahu : Performance Management System, Excel, 2013
241

4 0 0 4
STRATEGIC INVESTMENT AND FINANCING DECISIONS

PG Elective – III (Finance)
Aim:
To develop an understanding of the role of financial strategy, in the investing, financing and resource
allocation decisions with in an organization. To develop an understanding of the various strategies
that are in use to trade off risk and return
Learning Outcome:
To explain the role and nature of investment and financial strategies and its relationship to
maximization of wealth/shareholders value. To examine various risk models in capital budgeting. To
evaluate the motives for financial implications of mergers and acquisitions and lease financing. To
discuss the impact of general and specific inflation on financial and investment strategy decisions.
1. Investment decisions under conditions of Risk and uncertainty: Concepts of risk and uncertainty.
Risk Analysis in Investment Decisions. Risk adjusted rate of return, certainty equivalents,
probability distribution of cash flows, decision trees, sensitivity analysis and Monte Carlo
Approach to Simulation. Investment Decisions under capital constraints: Capital Rationing Vs.
Portfolio. Portfolio Risk and diversified projects.
2. Types of Investments and disinvestments: Project abandonment decisions, Evidence of IRR.

Multiple IRR, Modified IRR, Pure, simple and mixed investments. Lorie Savage Paradox.
Adjusted NPV and impact of inflation on capital budgeting decisions.
3. Critical analysis of appraisal techniques: Discounted pay back, post pay back, surplus life and
surplus pay back, Bail-out pay back, Return on Investment, Equivalent Annual Cost, Terminal
Value, single period constraints, multi-period capital constraint and an unresolved problem, NPV
mean variance analysis, Hertz Simulation and Hillier approaches. Significance of information and
data bank in project selections.
4. Strategic Analysis of selected investment decisions: Lease Financing, Leasing Vs. Operating
Risk, borrowing vs. procuring. Hire purchase and Instalment decisions. Lease Risk Management,
Leasing as a Financing Decision, Advantages of Leasing, and Leasing Decision in practice.
5. Financing Decisions: Mergers and Acquisitions Basic Issues, Strategy , Diversification and
Mergers and Acquisitions , Theories of Mergers, Types of Mergers ,Cost of Mergers ,
Government guidelines for Takeover, Problems on Mergers & Acquisitions and cases
Textbooks:
Ravi M Kishore “ Strategic Financial Management, Taxman 2012.
References:
1. Prasanna Chandra: Financial Management, 8/e, TMH, 2012
2. Prasanna Chandra: Projects: Planning, Analysis, Financing Implementation and Review, 6/e,
TMH, 2012
3. I.M. Pandey: Financial Management, Vikas 2012.
4. Brigham & Ehrhardt: Financial Management, Text and Cases, Cengage, 2012.
5. G.V.Satya Sekhar, Strategic Financial Management , Himalaya Publishing House 2012
6. MY Khan and PK Jain: Financial Management: Text, Problems & Cases, TMH, 2012.
242

4 0 0 4
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

PG Elective – IV (Finance)
Course Aim:
To give an understanding about MNC Financial Management.
Learning Outcome:
The objective of the course is to provide students with a broad view of International Monetary
Systems and its understanding to enable a global manager to do business in a global setting. The
prerequisite for the course is Financial Accounting and Analysis and Financial Management.
1. International Financial Management: An overview, Importance, nature and scope, International

Business Methods, Recent changes and challenges in IFM
2. International Flow of Funds: Balance of Payments (BoP), Fundamentals of BoP, Accounting

components of BOP, Factors affecting International Trade flows, Agencies that facilitate
International flows. Indian BoP Trends. International Monetary System: Evolution, Gold Standard,
Bretton Woods’s system, the flexible exchange rate regime, evaluation of floating rates, the
current exchange rate arrangements, the Economic and Monetary Union (EMU).
3. Foreign Exchange Market: Function and Structure of the Forex markets, major participants, types
of transactions and settlements dates, Foreign exchange quotations. Process of arbitrage,
speculation in the forward market - Currency Futures and Options Markets, Overview of the other
markets – Euro currency market, Euro credit market, Euro bond market, International Stock
market.
4. (a) Exchange Rates: Measuring exchange rate movements, Factors influencing exchange rates.
Government influence on exchange rates – exchange rate systems. Managing Foreign exchange
Risk. International arbitrage and interest rate parity.
(b) Relationship between inflation, interest rates and exchange rates – Purchasing Power Parity –
International Fisher Effect – Fisher Effect.
5. Asset–liability Management: Foreign Direct Investment, International Capital Budgeting,

International Capital structure and cost of capital. International Portfolio Management.
International Financing: Equity, Bond financing, parallel loans - International Cash management,
accounts receivable management, inventory management. Payment methods of international
trade, trade finance methods, Export – Import bank of India, recent amendments in EXIM policy,
regulations and guidelines.
Textbooks:
1. Jeff Madura: International Corporate Management, Cengage, 2012.
References:
1. Alan C.Shapiro: Multinational Financial Management, John Wiley, 2012
2. Sharan.V: International Financial Management 5Th Ed.PHI2012
3. Madhu Vij: International Financial Management, Excel, 2012.
4. Ephraim Clark: International Finance, , Second Edition, Thomson.
5. P.G.Apte: International Financial Management, TMH 2012.
6. S.Eun Choel and Risnick Bruce: International Financial Management, TMH, 2012
7. Reid. W.Click& Joshua D.Coval, PHI 2012
243

4 0 0 4
DERIVATIVES
PG Elective – V (Finance)
Aim:
To give an understanding about the derivatives in stock, commodity and Forex markets.
Learning Outcome:
The objective of this course is to make students efficient in the area of Derivatives, giving them the
knowledge of basics in Derivatives, Future Markets, Option Strategies, etc
1. Introduction to Derivatives – Development and Growth of Derivative Markets, Types of

Derivatives, Uses of Derivatives, Fundamental linkages between spot & Derivative Markets, The
Role of Derivatives Market, Uses & Misuses of derivatives.
2. Future and Forward Market structure of forward and Future Markets, Mechanics of future
markets, Hedging Strategies, Using futures, Determination of forward and future prices, Interest
rate futures, Currency futures and Forwards.
3. (a) Options – Distinguish between Options and Futures, Structure of Options Market, Principles
of Option Pricing, Option Pricing Models: The Binomial Model, The Black – Scholes Merton
Model.
(b) Basic Option Strategies, Advanced Option Strategies, Trading with Options, Hedging with
Options, Currency Options.
4. Commodity Market Derivatives- Introduction, Types, Commodity Futures and Options, Swaps.
Commodity Exchanges- MCX, NCDEX- Role, Functions & Trading. (Refer : M.Ranganatham &
R.Madhumathi)
5. Swaps – Concept and Nature, Evolution of Swap Market, Features of Swaps, Major types of
Swaps, Interest Rate Swaps, Currency Swaps, Commodity Swaps, Equity Index Swaps, Credit
Risk in Swaps, Credit Swaps, using Swaps to Manage Risk, Pricing and Valuing Swaps.
Textbooks:
1. John C Hull: Options, Futures and other derivatives, , Pearson , 2012.
References:
1. M.Ranganatham & R.Madhumathi : Derivatives and Risk Management, Pearson, 2012
2. Robert A Strong: Derivatives – An Introduction, ThomsonT 2012
3. Gupta: Financial Derivatives, PHI 2012
4. Dubofsky, Miller: Derivatives Valuations and Risk Management, Oxford. 2012.
5. Don M. Chance, Robert Brooks: Derivatives and Risk Management Basic, Cengage. 2012.
244

4 0 0 4
E-BUSINESS
PG Elective – III (SYSTEMS)
Course Aim:
It enables the student understand the concepts of Electronic Business.
Learning Outcome:
The student understands E-Business, its Models, E-Business plans, E-Business Application and
Securing E- Business
1. Electronic Business- Understanding new Internet Economy and Business-E-business an e-

commerce-Features of E-Business- Advantages of E-Business- Busines Environment-
Establishing E-Business.
Case : Barnes & Noble nad Amazon. Com (Ref 1- Kulkarni).
2. E-Business Models- E-Business Strucutre- E-Business models- E-Business model Design-IT

infrastructure requirement of E-business models.
Case: B2C model at Aradhana Tours. ( Ref 1 Kulkarni)
3. Creating E-Business plans- softwareprograms to create a business- Phases /Aspects of E-

Business- e-Marketinmg and sales Strategies-website and portal managmenet.
Case” FLOP (ref 1 :Kulkarni)
4. E-Business Appliications- Charactersttics o E-Business applications-Project palning approach for

E-Business applications- Application Integration- application in various domains.
Case Nokia ( Ref 1 Kulkarni)
5. Securing your e-business- risk Managment- business continuity planning-Network and web site
security-web sire Defacement-Secuiryt audit and Pentration Testing.
Case: Asmi Agencies-e-market ( Ref 1 Kulkarni)
Textbook:
• Kulkarni et al. “E-Business” Oxford, 2012.
Reference
1. Dave chaffey, e-business & e- commerece management- strategy, implementation and practice,
5th edition, pearson, 2013.
2. Napier et al “ Creating A Winning E-Business” Cengage, 2012.
3. Parad Diwan : e-commerce A Manager's Guide to e-business, Excel, 2013.
245

4 0 0 4
CYBER SECURITY
PG Elective – IV (SYSTEMS)
(Students must read textbook. Faculty are free to choose any cases)
Course Aim:
It enables the student to understand Cyber crime, Tools and methods used in cyber crime and Cyber
Security.
Learning Outcome:
The student understands the cyber crimes. Computer forensic system, and Cyber Security.
1. Cyber crime: Mobile and Wireless devices-Trend mobility-authentication service security-Attacks

on mobile phones-mobile phone security Implications for organizations-Organizational
measurement for Handling mobile-Security policies and measures in mobile computing era.
2. Tools and methods used in cyber crime-Proxy servers and Anonymizers-Phishing-Password

cracking-Key loggers and Spywares-Virus and worms-Trojan Horse and Backdoors-
Steganography-SQL Injection-Buffer overflow-Attacks on wireless network.
3. Understanding computer forensic-Historical background of cyber forensic-Forensic analysis of e-

mail-Digital forensic life cycle-Network forensic-Setting up a computer forensic Laboratory-
Relevance of the OSI 7 Layer model to computer Forensic-Computer forensic from compliance
perspectives.
4. Forensic of Hand –Held Devices-Understanding cell phone working characteristics-Hand-Held

devices and digital forensic- Toolkits for Hand-Held device-Forensic of i-pod and digital music
devices-Techno legal Challenges with evidence from hand-held Devices.
5. Cyber Security –Organizational implications-cost of cybercrimes and IPR issues-Web threats for
organizations: the evils and Perils-Social media marketing-Security and privacy Implications-
Protecting people privacy in the organizations-Forensic best practices for organizations.
Textbook:
• Nina Godbole & Sunit Belapure “Cyber Security”, Wiley india, 2012.
Reference:
1. Harish Chander, “cyber laws & IT protection”, PHI learning pvt.ltd, 2012.
2. Dhiren R Patel, “Information security theory & practice”,PHI learning pvt ltd,2010.
3. MS.M.K.Geetha & Ms.Swapne Raman”Cyber Crimes and Fraud Management, ”MACMILLAN,
2012.
4. Pankaj Agarwal : Information Security & Cyber Laws (Acme Learning), Excel, 2013.
5. Vivek Sood, Cyber Law Simplified, TMH, 2012.
246

4 0 0 4
INFORAMTION SYSTEM CONTROL AND AUDIT

PG Elective – V (SYSTEMS)
Course Aim:
It enables the student understand the concepts of Information System and Control.
Learning Outcome:
The student understands the audit standards, Audit Process, Computer assistance Audit tools,
Managing Audit tools and Strategy and Standards for Auditing.
1. Audit and review the role of Inforamntion Technology-Audit standards-Importance of audit

standard independence- AICPA proannouncmenet- The need for IT audit function- role of the IT
auditor-Legal implications.
Cases.
2. Auidit proces in a inforamtion Technology Envionment-Risk Assesmant-Audit budget- Objectives

and context-prelimenary review-Feildwork and implermentating audit Methodology-Docukenting
results.
Cases.
3. Computer Assistance Audit tools- Auditor productivity tools-Flowcharting Techniques-

Flowcharting an nalytical tool- Defininf critical data-Flowcharting technique-Generalizing audit
software-Computer forensic.
Cases.
4. Managing IT audits- Estabish a career develpement and planning-Evaluvating IT audit quality-

criteria for IT audit quality-IT auditing in new millinieum-code of ethics and professional standards-
Private industry- Managmeent consultancy.
Cases.
5. Strategy and standards for Auditing- Strategic palnning- communication- demand managmeent-
Architecture and standards- Busines architecture- application and inforamtion architecture-
Architecture fuanctions.
Cases.
Textbook:
• Sandra Senft & fredrick “ Inforamtion Technology Control and Audit “ CRC Press, 2012.
Reference:
• DP Dube, V P Gulati, Information System Audit and Assurance – Includes case studies
and chelists from the banking industry, TMH, 2008.
247

Ece Idp 2015 16 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ece Idp 2015 16 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ece Idp 2015 16 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

5 YEAR INTEGRATED DUAL DEGREE PROGRAM (I.D.P)

(B.TECH. & M.Tech. / MBA )

(Applicable for the batches admitted from 2015-2016)

JNTUH COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING HYDERABAD

JNTUH COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING HYDERABAD

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS 2015

(Effective for the students admitted into I year from the

S.No. UG Program PG Program

(* A Minimum of 15 students is necessary for any specialization to be offered.)

2.0 Eligibility for Admission

3.0 IDP Structure

3.3 Semester Scheme:

3.4 Credit Courses:

3.5 Subject/ Course Classification:

- Foundation Courses (FnC) are further categorized as : (i) HS (Humanities and

- Core Courses (CoC) and Elective Courses (EℓC) are categorized as PS

- Minor Courses (1 or 2 Credit Courses, belonging to HS/ BS/ ES/ PC as per

3.6 Course Nomenclature:

S.No UG/PG Group/Category/Co Description

3) UG HS – Humanities Includes subjects related to Humanities,

5) UG PE – Professional Includes Elective subjects related to the

4.0 Course Work

5.0 Course Registration

5.12 Cancelation of Registration of Subjects/ Courses may be permitted, ONLY AFTER

6.0 Subjects/ Courses to be offered

7.0 Attendance Requirements

7.3 A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condoning of shortage of attendance.

7.4 Shortage of Attendance below 65% shall in NO case be condoned.

8.0 Academic Requirements

8.1 (a) UG Part

9.0 Evaluation - Distribution and Weightage of Marks

(b) PG Part (M.Tech.)

i) For Theory Subjects, CIE Marks shall comprise of - Mid-Term Examination

(c) PG Part (MBA)

11.0 Grading Procedure

% of Marks Secured Letter Grade Grade

% of Marks Secured (Class Intervals) Letter Grade (UGC Grade

11.4 A Letter Grade does not imply any specific % of Marks.

11.12 Passing Standards:

i) A student shall be declared successful or ‘passed’ in a Semester, only when

(iii) A Student shall be declared successful or ‘passed’ in any Non-Credit Subject/

12.0 Declaration of Results

13.0 Award of Degree

14.0 Withholding of Results

15.0 Transitory Regulations

16.0 Student Transfers

Nature of Malpractices Punishment

two consecutive semesters from class work and

JNTUH COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING HYDERABAD

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

III YEAR I SEMESTER

III YEAR II SEMESTER

Professional Elective (PE) Subjects Lists

PG Elective (PG E ) Subjects List

JNTUH COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING HYDERABAD

COURSE STRUCTURE FOR MBA

Core & Electives: